Power Focus 4000

User guide
Power Focus
Atlas Copco Industrial Technique AB
9836 3123 01
Software release W10.9 SR3
Edition 18.2
2013-03
Copyright Atlas Copco Tools and Assembly Systems
Note! This manual can be altered without further notice.
For further information log in to Atlas Copco www.atlascopco.com
Contents
Contents
Contents ......................................................................................................................... 3
1 General safety instructions ................................................................................ 11
1.1 Work area .............................................................................................................. 11
1.2 Electrical safety ...................................................................................................... 11
1.3 Personal safety ...................................................................................................... 12
1.4 Service ................................................................................................................... 13
2 Introduction ......................................................................................................... 15
2.1 Revision history ...................................................................................................... 15
2.2 Abbreviations ......................................................................................................... 15
3 Introduction to Power Focus.............................................................................. 17
3.1 PF 4000 ................................................................................................................. 18
3.2 PF 3000/3100/3102 ................................................................................................ 19
3.3 RBU ....................................................................................................................... 20
3.4 ToolsTalk PF .......................................................................................................... 20
3.5 Communication ...................................................................................................... 20
3.6 Tensor tools ........................................................................................................... 22
3.6.1 Tool accessories ...................................................................................................... 23
3.7 Hardware accessories ............................................................................................ 25
3.8 Software accessories ............................................................................................. 27
3.8.1 ATS .......................................................................................................................... 27
3.8.2 ACTA 4000 .............................................................................................................. 28
4 Connecting devices ............................................................................................ 29
4.1 PF connections ...................................................................................................... 29
4.2 RBU ....................................................................................................................... 30
4.2.1 MAC-address ........................................................................................................... 30
4.2.2 PF start-up instructions ............................................................................................ 30
4.3 Tool connection and start-up .................................................................................. 31
4.3.1 Tools with cable connection .................................................................................... 31
4.3.2 Tensor STB.............................................................................................................. 32
4.3.3 Start-up instruction for open-end tools .................................................................... 32
4.3.4 Wireless tools .......................................................................................................... 33
4.3.5 ST GPIO connection ................................................................................................ 33
4.3.6 ST-selector connection ............................................................................................ 34
4.4 Printer .................................................................................................................... 35
4.5 Serial connection.................................................................................................... 35
4.5.1 Serial RS232 #1 ...................................................................................................... 35
4.5.2 Serial RS232 #2 ...................................................................................................... 36
4.6 Ethernet TCP/IP ..................................................................................................... 36
9836 3123 01 3 (428)

Contents
4.7 Digital inputs ........................................................................................................... 36

4.8 Digital outputs (relays) ............................................................................................ 37
4.9 24 VDC output ........................................................................................................ 38
4.10 I/O Bus ................................................................................................................... 38
4.11 Remote start connector .......................................................................................... 39
4.12 Main power connector ............................................................................................ 40
5 PF user interface ................................................................................................. 41
5.1 PF Graph ................................................................................................................ 41
5.1.1 Front panel .............................................................................................................. 41
5.1.2 Display .................................................................................................................... 43
5.1.3 Programming PF Graph .......................................................................................... 44
5.2 PF Compact............................................................................................................ 49
5.2.1 Front panel .............................................................................................................. 49
5.2.2 Display .................................................................................................................... 50
5.2.3 Indicator lights ......................................................................................................... 51
5.2.4 Keypad .................................................................................................................... 52
6 Getting started with ToolsTalk PF ..................................................................... 55
6.1 Installing ToolsTalk PF ........................................................................................... 55
6.2 ToolsTalk overview ................................................................................................. 56
6.2.1 Menu list.................................................................................................................. 56
6.2.2 Selection panel ....................................................................................................... 59
6.2.3 Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 60
6.2.4 PF Map ................................................................................................................... 62
6.3 Configuring ToolsTalk settings ................................................................................ 63
6.3.1 Communication ....................................................................................................... 63
6.3.2 Application .............................................................................................................. 65
6.3.3 Printout.................................................................................................................... 66
6.3.4 PF List ..................................................................................................................... 67
6.4 Connecting a PF ..................................................................................................... 68
6.4.1 Ethernet connection ................................................................................................ 68
6.4.2 Serial connection .................................................................................................... 68
6.4.3 USB connection ...................................................................................................... 69
6.4.4 To connect .............................................................................................................. 70
6.4.5 To disconnect ......................................................................................................... 70
6.4.6 Cordless tools ......................................................................................................... 70
6.5 Storing programming on file .................................................................................... 70
6.5.1 Store PF to file ........................................................................................................ 71
6.5.2 Read PF from file .................................................................................................... 72
6.6 Offline ..................................................................................................................... 73
6.6.1 Configuring a tool offline ......................................................................................... 74
7 Pset....................................................................................................................... 75
7.1 Create new Pset/Open Pset ................................................................................... 76
7.2 Autoset ................................................................................................................... 77
4 (428) 9836 3123 01

Contents
7.3 Quick programming ................................................................................................ 78

7.4 Programming help .................................................................................................. 79
7.5 Programming ......................................................................................................... 80
7.6 Control strategies ................................................................................................... 84
7.6.1 Tq con ...................................................................................................................... 84
7.6.2 Tq con/ang mon ....................................................................................................... 85
7.6.3 Ang con/tq mon ....................................................................................................... 85
7.6.4 Tq con/ang con (AND) / (OR) .................................................................................. 86
7.6.5 Reverse ang ............................................................................................................ 87
7.6.6 Rotate spindle forward/reverse................................................................................ 88
7.6.7 Click wrench ............................................................................................................ 88
7.6.8 Home position forward and reverse ........................................................................ 89
7.6.9 Yield control (Yield) ................................................................................................. 90
7.6.10 Yield/Tq con (OR) .................................................................................................... 90
7.6.11 DS con ..................................................................................................................... 91
7.6.12 DS con/tq mon ......................................................................................................... 92
7.6.13 Snug gradient .......................................................................................................... 93
7.6.14 PVT comp with snug ................................................................................................ 94
7.7 Tightening strategies .............................................................................................. 95
7.7.1 One stage ................................................................................................................ 96
7.7.2 Two stage ................................................................................................................ 96
7.7.3 Quick step ................................................................................................................ 97
7.7.4 Ergo ramp ................................................................................................................ 98
7.7.5 Additional control options ........................................................................................ 98
7.7.6 Rehit detection ......................................................................................................... 99
7.8 Programming + ...................................................................................................... 99
7.8.1 Current monitoring ................................................................................................. 100
7.8.2 PVT selftap ............................................................................................................ 101
7.8.3 PVT monitoring ...................................................................................................... 102
7.8.4 PVT compensate ................................................................................................... 104
7.8.5 Options .................................................................................................................. 105
7.8.6 Gradient monitoring ............................................................................................... 106
7.8.7 Yield control ........................................................................................................... 107
7.8.8 Post view torque .................................................................................................... 109
7.9 Pset setup ............................................................................................................ 110
7.10 Statistic programming........................................................................................... 112
7.11 Running a Pset..................................................................................................... 112
8 Multistage .......................................................................................................... 113
8.1 Create new Multistage/Open Multistage ............................................................... 114
9 Job...................................................................................................................... 117
9.1 Job concepts ........................................................................................................ 117
9.2 Job configuration .................................................................................................. 119
9.2.1 Creating a Job group ............................................................................................. 119
9836 3123 01 5 (428)

Contents
9.2.2 Creating a new Job ............................................................................................... 120

9.2.3 Select Job ............................................................................................................. 122
9.3 Functions in the Job monitor ................................................................................. 124
9.4 Unlock the tool ...................................................................................................... 125
10 Controller ........................................................................................................... 126
10.1 Information ........................................................................................................... 126
10.2 Configuration ........................................................................................................ 128
10.3 Network ................................................................................................................ 130
10.3.1 Cell and Net configuration .................................................................................... 132
10.4 COM ports ............................................................................................................ 136
10.5 Display.................................................................................................................. 137
10.6 Memory ................................................................................................................ 138
10.7 Accessibility .......................................................................................................... 141
11 Tool..................................................................................................................... 143
11.1 Tool information .................................................................................................... 143
11.2 Tool configuration ................................................................................................. 145
11.2.1 Tool start and Accessory bus ............................................................................... 145
11.2.2 Sound and buzzer ................................................................................................. 147
11.2.3 Tool function buttons ............................................................................................ 149
11.2.4 Blue LED ............................................................................................................... 151
11.2.5 Tool illuminator and lights ..................................................................................... 152
11.2.6 Radio and Connection .......................................................................................... 153
11.3 Tool diagnostic ..................................................................................................... 154
11.3.1 Sensor tracking ..................................................................................................... 155
11.3.1 Transducer calibration .......................................................................................... 155
11.4 Tool maintenance ................................................................................................. 157
11.4.1 Calibration and Service ......................................................................................... 158
11.4.2 Open-end tuning ................................................................................................... 158
11.4.3 Wear indicator ....................................................................................................... 160
11.4.4 ACTA .................................................................................................................... 160
11.4.5 Motor tuning .......................................................................................................... 161
11.4.6 Disconnect tool ..................................................................................................... 162
11.4.7 Hot swap ............................................................................................................... 164
11.5 Tool lock functionality ........................................................................................... 164
11.5.1 Locking of tools from an external source in time critical applications ................... 164
11.5.2 Intentional locking of tools .................................................................................... 165
11.5.3 Definition of a locked tool...................................................................................... 165
11.5.4 Tool locking event codes ...................................................................................... 165
12 Accessories ....................................................................................................... 167
12.1 Digital I/O.............................................................................................................. 167
12.2 I/O bus .................................................................................................................. 170
12.3 Tool bus................................................................................................................ 175
6 (428) 9836 3123 01

Contents
12.4 Printer .................................................................................................................. 178

13 Sync ................................................................................................................... 181
13.1 Sync prerequisites and limitations ........................................................................ 182
13.2 Hardware configuration ........................................................................................ 183
13.3 Sync configuration................................................................................................ 184
13.3.1 Sync members configuration ................................................................................. 184
13.3.2 Sync reference configuration ................................................................................. 185
13.4 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................... 187
14 Identifier ............................................................................................................. 189
14.1 Identifier concepts ................................................................................................ 189
14.2 Identifier prerequisites and details ........................................................................ 190
14.3 Configuration of identifier functions ...................................................................... 192
14.3.1 Configuring identifiers ............................................................................................ 193
14.3.2 Configuring a work order ....................................................................................... 195
14.3.3 Configuring result parts ......................................................................................... 196
14.3.4 Additional identifier functions ................................................................................. 197
15 Fieldbus ............................................................................................................. 199
15.1 General setup ...................................................................................................... 200
15.1.1 Parameters in General setup................................................................................. 201
15.1.2 View fieldbus information ....................................................................................... 203
15.2 From PF setup and to PF setup ........................................................................... 204
15.2.1 Fieldbus modes ..................................................................................................... 205
15.3 Storing fieldbus configuration ............................................................................... 206
15.4 Disable fieldbus carried signals ............................................................................ 206
15.5 Fieldbus data format ............................................................................................ 207
15.5.1 Bitmap select (Endian mode) ................................................................................ 207
15.5.2 Fieldbus data types ............................................................................................... 207
15.6 Fieldbus selector configuration ............................................................................. 212
15.7 Select Pset from fieldbus and set batch size ........................................................ 213
15.8 Fieldbus information ............................................................................................. 214
15.8.1 ProfiBus-DP ........................................................................................................... 214
15.8.2 DeviceNet .............................................................................................................. 218
15.8.3 InterBus/InterBus2MB ........................................................................................... 223
15.8.4 ModBusPlus........................................................................................................... 227
15.8.5 Ethernet/IP ............................................................................................................. 231
15.8.6 Modbus/TCP .......................................................................................................... 233
15.8.7 ControlNet.............................................................................................................. 234
15.8.8 Profinet .................................................................................................................. 236
15.8.9 FL-Net .................................................................................................................... 238
15.8.10 CC-Link .................................................................................................................. 239
16 Logic Configurator ............................................................................................ 245
16.1 Process description (an example) ........................................................................ 246
9836 3123 01 7 (428)

Contents
16.2 Logic operators and function blocks ...................................................................... 247

16.2.1 Logic gates............................................................................................................ 247
16.2.2 Function blocks ..................................................................................................... 248
16.3 Logic Configurator setup ....................................................................................... 251
16.3.1 Simulation ............................................................................................................. 256
17 Monitors ............................................................................................................. 259
17.1 Result Monitor ...................................................................................................... 260
17.2 Job Monitor ........................................................................................................... 262
17.3 Operator Monitor .................................................................................................. 263
17.3.1 Picture Monitor ...................................................................................................... 266
17.4 Identifier Monitor ................................................................................................... 267
17.5 Get all results........................................................................................................ 268
18 Trace................................................................................................................... 271
18.1 The trace window ................................................................................................. 271
19 Statistics ............................................................................................................ 275
19.1 Statistic alarm ....................................................................................................... 276
19.2 Trend deviation alarm ........................................................................................... 277
19.3 Calculation of UCL and LCL ................................................................................. 277
19.4 Calculation of mean values ................................................................................... 277
19.5 Calculation formulas ............................................................................................. 278
19.6 Constants for calculation of SPC variables ........................................................... 280
20 Quick reference guide....................................................................................... 281
20.1 Tq con .................................................................................................................. 282
20.1.1 One stage ............................................................................................................. 282
20.1.2 Two stage ............................................................................................................. 283
20.1.3 Quick step ............................................................................................................. 284
20.1.4 Ergo ramp ............................................................................................................. 285
20.2 Tq con/ang mon.................................................................................................... 286
20.2.1 One stage ............................................................................................................. 286
20.2.2 Two stage ............................................................................................................. 287
20.2.3 Quick step ............................................................................................................. 288
20.2.4 Ergo ramp ............................................................................................................. 289
20.3 Tq con/ang con (AND) and Tq con/ang con (OR) ................................................. 290
20.3.1 One stage ............................................................................................................. 290
20.3.2 Two stage ............................................................................................................. 291
20.3.3 Quick step ............................................................................................................. 292
20.3.4 Ergo ramp ............................................................................................................. 293
20.4 Ang con/tq mon .................................................................................................... 294
20.4.1 One stage ............................................................................................................. 294
20.4.2 Two stage ............................................................................................................. 295
20.4.3 Quick step ............................................................................................................. 296
20.4.4 Ergo ramp ............................................................................................................. 297
8 (428) 9836 3123 01

Contents
20.5 Reverse ang ......................................................................................................... 298

20.6 Rotate spindle forward and Rotate spindle reverse .............................................. 299
20.7 Home position forward and reverse ...................................................................... 300
20.8 DS con ................................................................................................................. 301
20.8.1 One stage .............................................................................................................. 301
20.8.2 Two stage .............................................................................................................. 301
20.8.3 Quick step .............................................................................................................. 302
20.8.4 Ergo ramp .............................................................................................................. 303
20.9 Snug gradient ....................................................................................................... 304
20.9.1 One stage .............................................................................................................. 304
20.9.2 Two stage .............................................................................................................. 305
20.9.3 Quick step .............................................................................................................. 306
21 Digital I/O and fieldbus items ........................................................................... 307
21.1 Digital output (relay) and fieldbus items from PF .................................................. 307
21.2 Digital input and fieldbus items to PF ................................................................... 328
22 Parameter list .................................................................................................... 341
22.1 Pset...................................................................................................................... 341
22.1.1 Programming ......................................................................................................... 341
22.1.2 Programming + ...................................................................................................... 346
22.1.3 Pset setup .............................................................................................................. 350
22.1.4 Statistic programming ............................................................................................ 350
22.2 Multistage............................................................................................................. 353
22.2.1 Setup ..................................................................................................................... 353
22.2.2 Multistage programming ........................................................................................ 354
22.3 Job ....................................................................................................................... 356
22.3.1 Setup ..................................................................................................................... 356
22.3.2 Programming ......................................................................................................... 357
22.4 Controller ............................................................................................................. 360
22.4.1 Information ............................................................................................................. 360
22.4.2 Configuration ......................................................................................................... 361
22.4.3 Network .................................................................................................................. 362
22.4.4 COM ports ............................................................................................................. 364
22.4.5 Display ................................................................................................................... 364
22.4.6 Memory .................................................................................................................. 365
22.4.7 Accessibility ........................................................................................................... 366
22.5 Tool ...................................................................................................................... 366
22.5.1 Information ............................................................................................................. 366
22.5.2 Configuration ......................................................................................................... 367
22.5.3 Diagnostic .............................................................................................................. 371
22.5.4 Maintenance .......................................................................................................... 371
22.5.5 Buzzer configuration .............................................................................................. 374
22.5.6 Sound configuration ............................................................................................... 374
22.6 Accessories.......................................................................................................... 375
9836 3123 01 9 (428)

Contents
22.6.1 Digital I/O .............................................................................................................. 375

22.6.2 I/O bus .................................................................................................................. 376
22.6.3 Tool bus ................................................................................................................ 377
22.6.4 Printer ................................................................................................................... 377
22.7 Sync ..................................................................................................................... 377
22.7.1 Programming ........................................................................................................ 377
22.8 Identifier................................................................................................................ 378
22.8.1 Identifier setup ...................................................................................................... 378
22.9 Fieldbus ................................................................................................................ 379
23 Event codes ....................................................................................................... 383
23.1 Event code list ...................................................................................................... 385
23.1.1 E001-E099 Rundown failures ............................................................................... 386
23.1.2 E100-E199 Event related errors ........................................................................... 387
23.1.3 E200-E299 User input events ............................................................................... 398
23.1.4 E300-E399 Statistical events ................................................................................ 401
23.1.5 E400-E499 Communication events ...................................................................... 405
23.1.6 E500-E599 Hardware events (tools) .................................................................... 409
23.1.7 E600-E699 Hardware events................................................................................ 415
23.1.8 E700-E799 Hardware events................................................................................ 416
23.1.9 E800-E899 Software events ................................................................................. 418
23.1.10 E900-E999 Events MMI ........................................................................................ 421
24 Index ................................................................................................................... 422
10 (428) 9836 3123 01

General safety instructions
1 General safety instructions

Ensure that you read and understand all instructions. Failure to follow all the instructions listed below may
result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury. All locally legislated safety regulations with
regard to installation, operation and maintenance must be adhered to at all times. Refer installation and
servicing to qualified personnel only.
1.1 Work area

Keep the work area clear and well illuminated. Cluttered benches and unlit areas invite accidents.
Do not operate power tools in explosive atmospheres, such as in the presence of flammable liquids, gases, or
dust. Power tools create sparks, which may ignite dust or fumes.
Keep bystanders, children, and visitors at a safe distance while operating a power tool. Distractions may
cause you to lose control.
1.2 Electrical safety

Earthed tools must be plugged into a socket that has been properly installed and earthed according to
appropriate regulations. Never remove the earth pin or modify the plug in any way. Do not use any adapter
plugs. Check with a qualified electrician if you are in any doubt as to whether the outlet is properly earthed.
Should the tools suffer electronic malfunction or breakdown, the earth provides a low resistance path to
carry electricity away from the user. Applicable only to Class I (earthed) tools.
This apparatus must be earthed.
A Power Focus (PF) cannot be fitted with a galvanic isolated voltage as this would inhibit the function of
the Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI). The test button on the GFI also activates the GFI in instances where a
PF is equipped with an isolated transformer. Test the earth fault protector by pressing the test button located
on the rear panel of PF.
Test the earth protector every month by pressing the test button. Should the earth fault protector disconnect
the system, be sure to find the primary reason before you resume operation.
Avoid physical contact with grounded surfaces such as pipes, radiators, ovens and refrigerators. There is an
9836 3123 01 11 (428)

increased risk of electric shock if your body is grounded.

Do not expose power tools to rain or wet conditions. Water entering a power tool will increase the risk of
electric shock. This instruction does not apply to tools classified as watertight or splash proof.
For minimum electrical interference, locate the controller as far as possible from sources of electrical noise,
e.g. arc welding equipment etc.
Do not abuse the power lead. Never use the power lead to carry the tool or to pull the plug from a socket.
Keep the power lead away from heat, oil, sharp edges or moving parts. Replace damaged leads immediately.
Damaged leads increase the risk of electric shock.
1.3 Personal safety

Stay alert, watch what you are doing and use common sense when operating a power tool. Do not use a tool
while tired or under the influence of drugs, alcohol, or medication. A momentary lapse in concentration
whilst operating power tools may result in serious personal injury.
Dress properly. Do not wear loose clothing or jewelry. Tie long hair back. Keep your hair, clothing, and
gloves away from moving parts. Loose clothes, jewelry, or long hair can become caught in moving parts.
Avoid accidental starting. Ensure switches are in the off position before plugging in. Carrying a tool with
your finger on the switch or plugging in a tool that has the switch set to “On” is inviting an accident.
Remove adjusting keys or switches before turning the tool on. A wrench or a key that is left attached to a
rotating part of the tool could lead to personal injury.
Do not overreach. Keep proper footing and balance at all times. Proper footing and balance enables better
control of the tool in unexpected situations.
Use clamps or other practical means to secure and support the work piece to a stable platform. Holding the
work by hand or against your body is unstable and may lead to loss of control.
Do not force the tool. Use the correct Atlas Copco Tensor tool for your application. The correct tool will do
the Job better and more safely in a manner for which it was designed.
Do not use a tool if the switch does not work. Any tool that cannot be controlled by the switch is dangerous
and must be repaired.
Disconnect the plug from the power source before making any adjustments, changing accessories, or storing
the tool. Such preventive safety measures reduce the risk of the tool starting accidentally. The mains plug is
considered to be a disconnecting device. Disconnect the tool from the mains by removing the plug from the
socket in order to cut the power.
Store tools out of the reach of children and other untrained persons when not in use. Tools are dangerous in
12 (428) 9836 3123 01

the hands of untrained users.

Check for misalignment, obstruction of moving parts, damage, and any other condition that may affect tool
operation. If damaged, have the tool serviced before using. Poorly maintained tools cause many accidents.
Only use accessories that are recommended by the manufacturer for your model. Accessories that may be
suitable for one tool may become hazardous when used on another tool.
1.4 Service
Tools should only be serviced by qualified repair personnel. Service or maintenance performed by
unqualified personnel could expose users to serious personal injury.
When servicing a tool, only use original replacement parts. Use of unauthorized parts or failure to follow
maintenance instructions may lead to electric shock or personal injury.
Always refer to the Product Information for PF4000 (9836 3113 00) and Product Information for PF3000 (9836 2156
01) for spare parts and instructions, and Atlas Copco spare part list for the tool used.
There is a risk of explosion if batteries are incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same
or equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Discard used batteries in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
9836 3123 01 13 (428)

Introduction
2 Introduction
This manual describes the Power Focus (PF) controller and how to configure it using ToolsTalk PF.
 The first sections describe PF with hardware and software accessories, how to connect, and the user
interface.
 The main part of the user guide describes how to use the ToolsTalk PF software to configure PF.
 The last part of the user guide lists the parameters and event codes used in PF.
2.1 Revision history

Apart from editorial updates, this manual has been revised as follows.
 Updates to reflect functional changes: Contact Atlas Copco for a release description for the current
release.
2.2 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Description
Abbreviation Description CAN Controller Area Network
The center line CC Control Card
R
CCW Counter-Clockwise
X The mean
CD Compact Disc
The mean of the average Ch Channel
X
<= => Arrow (button) CL Clear (button)
 Sigma (standard deviation) Config Configuration
α Alpha (often a symbol for angle) CW Clockwise
µ Mu (the values of the mean) DC Direct Current
% Percent Deg Degrees
A Ampere Deg C Degrees centigrade
AC Alternating Current DigIn Digital Input
ACK Acknowledged DigOut Digital Output (relay)
Admin Administration DSP Digital Signal Processor
Ang con Angle control ft.lb Foot-pound
Ang mon Angle monitoring GFI Ground Fault Interrupter
bits/s Bits per second HW Hardware
9836 3123 01 15 (428)

Introduction
Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description

Hz Hertz (unit of frequency) R chart Range chart
I/O Input/Output RAM Random Access Memory
ID Identification RAS Remote Access Server
in.lb Inch-pound RBU Rapid Backup Memory
IR Infra-Red rpm Revolutions per minute
IRC Industrial Radio Communication RS232 Serial communication link
kpm Kilo pound meter S4/S7/S9 Motor sizes in Tensor S tools
LCD Liquid Crystal Display sec second
LED Light Emitting Diode SPC Statistic Parameter Control
LCK Tool Locked STAT Statistic (button)
LCL Lower Control Limit SW Software
MC Motor Card TNR Tool not ready
ms millisecond Tq Torque
n Number (of values) Tq con Torque control
Nm Newton meter Tq mon Torque monitoring
No. Number TTPF Tools Talk Power Focus (SW)
NOK Not approved (tightenings) UCL Upper Control Limit
nxOK Number of approved (tightenings) UTL Upper Tolerance Limit
OK Approved (tightenings) V Volt
PF Power Focus VIN Vehicle Identification Number
PFNR Power Focus Not Ready (PF not ready) X-bar The mean
PLC Programmable Logic Controller X-bar-bar The average of means
PROG Program (button) z subgroup size, group size
Pset Parameter set
PVT Prevailing Torque
16 (428) 9836 3123 01

Introduction to Power Focus
3 Introduction to Power Focus

Power Focus is the latest generation of control and monitoring systems for advanced tightening
technology. The system is designed for the modern assembly industry with high demands and stringent
quality and efficiency requirements, and offers full modularity through the combination of hardware and
software.
This manual handles the ToolsTalk PF but is also applicable for Power Focus Graph. When
programming on a Power Focus Graph display, we refer to the corresponding section in
ToolsTalk PF.
This section includes an overview of the system, and a brief description of the options and accessories. For
more information about the available system parts and their functionality, contact your Atlas Copco
representative and consult the relevant user guide or catalog.
9836 3123 01 17 (428)

3.1 PF 4000
PF 4000 is a new generation of control systems suitable for most Tensor tools. Unlike its predecessor,
PF 3100, PF 4000 is available in one model with two versions (Compact and Graph) that can handle all
torque levels.
Advanced control functions built into Power Focus 4000 prevent the operator from deviating from the
required process. When it receives assembly information, the programmed Job function automatically
selects the correct tightening sequence and parameters. When combined with barcode scanning for
component identification, the Job function offers traceable, zero-fault process control.
The controller is equipped with a USB connector for laptop access. It is located on the front of the unit for
maximum accessibility. Communication is also possible over serial RS232, Ethernet TCP/IP and various
fieldbus types.
PF 4000 Graph has an easy-to-read LCD color display.

Statistical data is collected, analyzed and presented on the
screen. Changes and trends in the assembly process are
indicated by diagnostics and statistical alarms, such as SPC
monitor charts and capability (Cpk) alarms. Alpha-numeric
keys allow on-unit setup and easy checking of traces and
statistics. PF 4000 Graph model has a very compact design,
and a standardized mounting plate ensures easy installation
at every workstation.
Completing the range, PF 4000 Compact has a basic operator
interface with six-button keyboard and LED display. Pre-
programmed using ToolsTalk PF and with a PC as the
interface, it offers the same functionality as the Graph
model. PF 4000 Compact PF 4000 Graph
For technical data, dimensions drawings, connections and spare parts list,
see Product Information for PF4000 (9836 3113 00)
18 (428) 9836 3123 01

3.2 PF 3000/3100/3102
The PF 3000 is a control system for Atlas Copco Tensor S and DS tools. PF 3100 is a control system for
Atlas Copco Tensor ST tools (including functionality for S and DS tools). PF 3102 is the control system
for Atlas Copco Tensor SL tools.
Tensor STB tools require a communication kit to work with Power Focus 3100. The kit
consists of a serial port adapter (access point); cable connector (supplies the serial port
adapter with power).
Two different hardware units are available, Graph and Compact.

PF 3000 Compact offers minimum hardware expenditure and is easily stackable for multiple tool
configurations. PF 3000 Graph models offer full stand-alone programming via an integrated keyboard and
large display located on the front panel of the unit. PF Graph can also be used as a terminal for one or
more PF Compact controllers.
PF 3000 Compact PF 3000 Graph
For technical data, dimensions drawings, connections and spare part list, see Product
Information for PF3000 (9836 2156 01).
For PF 3102 controllers (SL tool drivers) only the Compact model is available.
9836 3123 01 19 (428)

3.3 RBU
RBU (Rapid Backup Unit) unlocks a specified level of functionality and acts as a back-
up unit for the configuration of PF. There are different types of RBU; Gold, Silver,
Bronze, X (for ETX tool functionality) and DS (for Tensor DS tool functionality). The
RBU Gold unlocks the full capacity and functionality of the Power Focus. Combine the
RBU giving the required functionality with the chosen hardware.
For a list of the current RBU functionality, contact your Atlas Copco representative.
When an RBU is plugged in to an empty PF, the RBU configuration is transferred to the controller. This
allows the quick installation and replacement of controllers on the assembly line.
3.4 ToolsTalk PF
ToolsTalk PF, aPC software package developed by Atlas Copco, offers easy and user-friendly
programming and real time monitoring of Power Focus units. ToolsTalk PF is based on extensive
experience and thorough analysis of existing manufacturing industry needs.
ToolsTalk PF can be installed on standard PCs running Windows XP, Windows 7 (32-bit), or Windows 7
(64-bit) and communicates with PF via the serial port or via Ethernet TCP/IP. The real time monitoring
1
functions include access to Cpk, Traces, Operator monitor, etc.
3.5 Communication
Built-in communication provides efficient use of modern communication technologies with Atlas Copco
products. The Power Focus system can be built to suit the user’s needs, from a simple system offering
many functions, to a complete factory system. Using open standards like TCP/IP, it is possible to connect
and communicate with external systems and allows global communication.
1
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries.
20 (428) 9836 3123 01

Communicate with one PF at a time via the serial connection or with a complete network of PF units via
the built-in TCP/IP connection.
Power Focus communicates with a range of accessories via the internal I/O bus. PF units and accessories
can be combined according to the customer’s requirements.
The Power Focus can be configured to communicate via the most common buses on the market; ProfiBus,
DeviceNet, InterBus, etc. Real time communication is done over a proprietary I/O bus for tool
synchronization. Several outputs can be activated for communication with PLC’s and other external
equipment. Each PF has four relay contacts, four optic isolated inputs and a 24 V DC / 1 A internal power
supply for external control circuits. All inputs and outputs can be configured using the ToolsTalk PF
software. The number of digital inputs and outputs can be increased using an I/O Expander on the I/O
bus.
With Power Focus, full networking capability is available in the controller as an integrated function, in
relation to both hardware and software. ToolsNet is Windows NT compatible, which offers easy to use,
effective database and data collection functions, using standard databases like SQL, Oracle and Microsoft
Access. PF can be connected to a network for central programming and data collection using ToolsNet.
With the modular concept, the Power Focus is the building block used to create complete and cost
efficient solutions that satisfy the various needs of modern industrial assembly operations.
9836 3123 01 21 (428)

3.6 Tensor tools

This is a brief overview of Atlas Copco Tensor tools and tool accessories. See tool specific information for
a complete list of tools and options for each tool.
Tensor STB communicates with the tightening controller systems through wireless digital communication,
built on IRC (Industrial Radio Communication) technique.
Tensor ST tools communicate with controllers through digital communication, allowing new tool features
and greater flexibility due to not so many wires and leads. Compared with a Tensor S tool, it is also
lighter with improved accessibility.
Tensor SL is a range of low torque transducerized tools based on Tensor ST technology.
Tensor S tools are available in different configurations and motor types. Fixtured applications can easily
be installed and integrated with standard Atlas Copco components.
The ultra-compact ETX tool is designed for fixtured applications.
Atlas Copco’s Tensor DS tools have no transducer. Instead of receiving an electrical signal from a strain
gauge, the tool derives the torque from several relevant parameters, such as voltage, speed, temperature
and current.
An open-end tool (or tube nut tool) is a

Tensor tool equipped with an open-
ended head. It is used to tighten nuts
on tubes and similar applications. The
open-end is available for several, but
not all, tools.
Open-end tools can only be
used with lock-off lever for
personal safety reasons.
22 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool parts
Figure shows Tensor ST.
STwrench is a torque wrench

that can be controlled by the
Power Focus. The STwrench
communicates with the
tightening controller systems
through wireless digital
communication, built on IRC
(Industrial Radio
Communication) technique.
3.6.1 Tool accessories

See Atlas Copco tool specific information for a list of options for each tool.
9836 3123 01 23 (428)

ST scanner is placed on the tool and works as a barcode reader. For more information
about the function of identifiers, see section Identifier.
GPIO (General purpose I/O) is a digital input and output connector. The four buttons
combined with four LED’s can each be configured as a digital input and/or digital
output.
ST selector has two different modes, mode 1 and mode 2. In Mode 1, the selector only
utilizes the tool accessory bus as GPIO. This mode only supports a maximum of 15 Psets
(1-15). In Mode 2, the selector takes full advantage of the bus capabilities.
For more information about the ST selector, see section ST-selector connection.
TLS ST Tag is an external positioning unit for positioning of the tool in the surroundings.
The unit also has a 7-color LCD indicator for sending status messages to the operator.
24 (428) 9836 3123 01

3.7 Hardware accessories

The Power Focus concept features a number of accessories that simplify the guidance and follow-up of
performed tightenings. The accessory functions can be set up using ToolsTalk PF or a PF Graph unit.
The benefit of using serial bus-based accessories (I/O bus) is that they can be connected in series, from
accessory to accessory rather than hard wiring each accessory to the Power Focus. This arrangement
increases flexibility and quick installation.
Power Focus uses 24 V DC, 1 A to power the bus, which is also used to power external I/O's. If more
current is needed, the bus must be powered externally. Every device has a 24 V DC input for this
purpose.
I/O Expander enables the connection of several inputs and relays when more
than those built-in are required. There are 8 inputs and 8 relays with the same
functionality as the four built-in I/O's. Each input and relay can be configured
individually.
I/O Expander, sealed
The sealed I/O Expander is designed for more demanding environments than
I/O Expander. It will add eight digital inputs as well as four digital and four
relay outputs to your system.
Indicator Box isa flexible display indicator used together with our Start
handle for indication of status signals from the controller. The box can easily
be connected to the Power Focus with premade cablings.
9836 3123 01 25 (428)

Socket Selector is a socket tray with LED’s that can be used to guide the user
through, for example, a Job sequence. When using more than one Pset it is
very convenient to use a selector. When a socket is lifted, the corresponding
Pset will be selected.
The Socket Selector is available with four or eight sockets, and
communicates on the I/O bus.
Operator Panel is an external device for PF. It is a general purpose lamp- and
switchbox, replacing the customer specials that are made today. The Operator Panel
communicates directly with Power Focus and the device configuration is made in
ToolsTalk PF.
Stacklight ESL-04 is a
flexible light and switch device designed to interface with
controllers equipped with an I/O Bus.
Stacklight DSL-03 is a simple and customizable light and switch device, designed to
interface with controllers equipped with Internal I/O connectors instead of I/O-bus.
The stacklight comes with features such as buzzer, rotating light etc.
MiniDisplay isa compact remote interface. It runs the Operator Guidance

application program to give the operator visual support. It is equipped with a
touch-screen and is fully configurable. The MiniDisplay is connected through
Ethernet and does not support I/O-bus communication.
26 (428) 9836 3123 01

3.8 Software accessories
3.8.1 ATS
The ATS (Assembly Tools Software) works together with PF to complete the tightening process. The
following software products are part of ATS.
ToolsNet
ToolsNet works together with the controllers and the selected database, MS SQL Server or Oracle to
collect, store and visualize all historic tightening-related data. ToolsNet allows the user to get reports on
shifts, lines, individual vehicles or controllers for process improvement purposes. All the reports can
easily be exported to Excel.
 ToolsNet can be used as a standalone product or together with the other modules from the ATS.
Factory Overview
Factory Overview is the portal to the tightening process. It visualizes the whole process and makes it
possible to monitor all tightening applications from one central place. Factory Overview can be used both
as a standalone product and together with the other modules from the ATS.
Event Monitor
Event Monitor offers real-time event reporting from the controllers in a centralized and filtered format.
Event Monitor can be used both as a standalone product and together with the other modules
from the ATS.
Open Protocol
The PF open protocol can be run using Ethernet or serial communication. It is a full duplex protocol,
which means that data can be exchanged in both directions simultaneously. Every communication partner
must be able to operate a send and receive facility simultaneously.
The torque controller is the server and the station computer the client. The torque controller can accept up
to 5 connections at a time. The protocol used is TCP/IP.
9836 3123 01 27 (428)

3.8.2 ACTA 4000

An ACTA 4000 performs a full range of functions, from simple torque checks
to advanced graphic tightening analysis. It comes in different models and it is
easy to upgrade.
ACTA 4000 measures torque, angle, and pulses and facilitates the conduction
of statistical analyses of the tightening process. An ACTA 4000, together
with the ToolsTalk QAT PC utility, is a complete SPC tool.
28 (428) 9836 3123 01

Connecting devices
4 Connecting devices
This section describes the connections on PF backplane. It also describes the start-up process for PF and
for the tools.
4.1 PF connections
Backplane connections
1 Digital input + internal 24 V DC

2 Relays
3 Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI)
4 Serial #1 (RS 232) to MC-card
5 I/O Bus #1
6 I/O Bus #2
7 Remote start
8 Main fuse
9 Main fuse power connector
10 Ground connection
11 Fieldbus card (optional)
12 RBU
13 Ethernet
14 Serial #2 (RS232) to CC-card
15 Printer
16 Tool output
In addition to backplane connections,

PF4000 has a USB connection on the
front underside.
9836 3123 01 29 (428)

Connecting devices
4.2 RBU
Connect the RBU to the 15-pin connector on the back panel of the Power Focus (see figure below).
Make sure that the power is switched off when connecting and disconnecting the RBU.
The RBU unlocks the software and works as a backup memory for the Power Focus setup data.
The pin configuration is propriety information for Atlas Copco. This connector cannot be used for other
purposes.
Connector: 15-pin D-sub female.
Function: For connection of Atlas Copco RBU.
4.2.1 MAC-address
Power Focus Ethernet address is 00-50-D6 -XX-YY-ZZ (from serial RBU).
Cell network connection requires PF units with identical RBU types inserted.
The RBU serial number is also part of the Power Focus Ethernet MAC address.
Example: RBU with serial number C00015767:
 00015767 (decimal) → 003D97 (hexadecimal)
 003D97 (hexadecimal) → 00-50-D6-00-3D-97 (MAC address)
4.2.2 PF start-up instructions

At start-up, the Power Focus checks for differences between the controller and RBU configurations. If an
inconsistency is detected the user is prompted to select either the controller or RBU configuration. This
makes it possible to move/copy configurations between PF units by using the RBU. The user is also given
the possibility to clear both configurations.
When changing RBU type it is only possible to load the configuration from the RBU.
Press the plus (+) or minus (-) key on PF Compact front panel to toggle between the selections. Confirm
selection with the enter key. Press the corresponding soft key to make a selection on PF Graph.
The table describes the selections available and how to choose configuration. If the Power Focus and RBU
are incompatible for other reasons than a configuration mismatch (e.g. they have an older software
version), either PF or the RBU is considered as NOK.
30 (428) 9836 3123 01

Connecting devices
Message at start-up Action
No message The memory areas of PF and the RBU are identical, and the checksums are
correct.
Clear / RBU / PF The memory areas of PF and the RBU show correct checksums, but they are
different. You need to decide which memory content to use before continuing,
or whether to clear both.
PF / Clear / Stop The memory area of PF shows correct checksum, but the checksum of the RBU
is incorrect, which could indicate a hardware problem. You can select between
using PF setup or clear the memories.
RBU / Clear / Stop The memory area of the RBU shows correct checksum, but the checksum of PF
is incorrect, which could indicate a hardware problem. You can select between
using the RBU setup or clear the memories.
Clear / Stop The memory areas of both PF and the RBU show incorrect checksums, which
could indicate a hardware problem. Your option is to clear the memories.
Changing RBU will clear the tightening result database in Power Focus.
Selecting “Stop” will only prevent the result database from being erased if the RBU has been
changed between RBU Silver and Gold (provided the previous RBU is re-inserted). A change
between RBU Gold and Silver, or bronze and DS will clear the result database even if
selecting “Stop”. If PF is turned on with no RBU or a PF Graph is turned on with a RBU
bronze the tightening result database will be cleared without querying the user.
4.3 Tool connection and start-up
4.3.1 Tools with cable connection

ST and SL tools are used together with a cable, especially designed for the particular
tool type. The cables are equipped with memory devices used for storing information
about the tool cable, number of tightenings etc. This information can be viewed in the
Accessories branch.
An ST tool can be connected and replaced when the PF is powered up. For S tools,
use T460 Disconnect to replace tool without losing data.
9836 3123 01 31 (428)

Connecting devices
4.3.2 Tensor STB

For connection of the wireless Tensor STB, ensure the correct tool connection is configured before
starting the pairing procedure. See PF parameters under Tool > Configuration > Connection and Tool >
Configuration > Radio. For instructions on the pairing procedure, see Tensor STB documentation.
1 Bus connector
(hidden)
2 Buzzer
3 LEDs
4 Function button
5 Battery
6 Direction ring
7 Tool trigger
STB tool
Check tool documentation for compatibility between tool, PF

and RBU.
4.3.3 Start-up instruction for open-end tools

The start-up instruction is recommended every time an open-end tool connected PF is started up
(rebooted), or a hot swap of the tool has been made. The advantages of this are a faster tool rotation to the
open-end position, possibility to select C230 OE forward positioning, and automatic generation of alarms.
Note that the operator has the possibility to perform tightenings without completing the start-up
configuration.
32 (428) 9836 3123 01

Connecting devices
To do a start-up configuration, follow these steps:

1. Reboot PF (or make a tool hot swap).
2. Press the tool trigger on the open-end tool once. The tool head rotates slowly in order to find a
reference position. The tool should now alternate between tightening and positioning when pressing
the tool trigger.
3. Perform ten consecutive tool trigger pressings without installing on a joint; five tightenings and five
positionings, and let the open-end head rotate at least 360 degrees for every tightening. Note that
during this setup phase the OE positioning type is torque based reverse and the max torque
positioning limit is not valid.
4. After five correct tightenings and five correct positionings, the open-end head should rotate with a
faster speed meaning that correct reference point had been set.
If an open-end positioning fails (which happens if positioning is performed with a tool head fixed on the
tube), more tightenings and positionings are needed.
To perform an open-end tuning, see section Open-end tuning.
4.3.4 Wireless tools

For wireless tools, performing a start-up configuration every time the battery is changed would be
ineffective for the operator. Therefore, there is no start-up configuration for STB. Instead, when the
trigger is first pressed after a battery change, the tool rotates slowly in order to find its reference position.
Alternatively, if the operator has selected open-end tuning on PF before pressing the trigger, an open-end
tuning is run. After a successful open-end positioning or open-end tuning, the tool is ready.
4.3.5 ST GPIO connection

The four buttons combined with four LED’s can each be configured as a digital input and/or digital output.
Pin Function Input Output Duration Time
1-4 Input or output Logical function Logical function Output duration Duration time
9836 3123 01 33 (428)

Connecting devices
4.3.6 ST-selector connection

Keep the left button on the selector pressed when powering up (this is done by Pin Function
(input)
hot swapping the tool or powering up PF). The selector will now enter the
configuration mode. 4 Pset Select bit 3
3 Pset Select bit 2
Press the right button on the selector to toggle between mode 1 and 2. Confirm 2 Pset Select bit 1
mode selection by pressing the left button. 1 Pset Select bit 0
If Mode 1 is selected the number of Psets (1-15) to use must now be set. Press the right button to select
the number of Psets to use. Use the left button to confirm. The selector is now ready to use. When using
mode 1 parameter T210 Mode must be set to “GPIO” with the GPIO device configured according to the
table to the right. Parameter C200 Pset must also be set to “DigIn”.
If Mode 2 is selected the T210 Mode must be set to “ST bus”. Parameter C200 Pset also must be set to “ST
selector”. The selector has a number of configurable parameters (see table below).
Selector parameter Selections
Left button and right button Off: button disabled.
Next Pset: select next Pset.
Previous Pset: select previous Pset.
LED status Off and On
(1)
Display Off: display disabled.
Pset no.: displays selected Pset number.
Pset target: displays selected Pset target value (torque or angle).
Result: displays the tightening result.
Pset no. + result: toggles between Pset number and tightening result (2).
Pset target + result: toggles between Pset target and tightening result (2).
Pset no. + Pset target: toggles between Pset number and target (2).
Pset no. + Pset target + result: toggles between Pset number, target and tightening result (2).
(1)
Event codes always displayed, except for “Off“
(2)
The Pset number (or Pset target) is displayed until a tightening result is generated. The tightening
result is displayed until the next tightening is started or a new Pset is selected. In mode “Pset no. + Pset
target” the Pset number and target toggle will show on the display until a result is generated.
34 (428) 9836 3123 01

Connecting devices
4.4 Printer
Connector: 25-pin D-sub female Pin Function Pin Function Pin Function
1 Strobe 10 Acknowledge 19 Ground
Function: Parallel printer 2 Data bit 0 11 Busy 20 Ground
Electrical data: Normal TTL levels 3 Data bit 1 12 Paper end (out of paper) 21 Ground
4 Data bit 2 13 Select 22 Ground
High level signal: 1 5 Data bit 3 14 Auto feed 23 Ground
Outputs: High > 2.4 V; Low < 0.4 V 6 Data bit 4 15 Error 24 Ground
7 Data bit 5 16 Initialize printer 25 Ground
Inputs: High > 2.0 V; Low < 0.8 V 8 Data bit 6 17 Select input
9 Data bit 7 18 Ground
4.5 Serial connection

There are two serial connection ports.
The ToolsTalk PF software must be connected to RS232 port 2.
It is necessary to check if connected device is fully supported by PF and properly configured. If device
responds to unrecognized commands with error messages or sends unexpected data it can invalidate
functionality.
4.5.1 Serial RS232 #1

Connector: 9-pin D-sub female Pin Function
1 Not used
Function: RS232 serial 2 RD, Receive data
Connections: This port is used for 3 TD, Transmit data
communication with minor load, for 4 Not used
example scanners. 5 GND
6 Not used
7 Not used
8 Not used
9 Not used
9836 3123 01 35 (428)

Connecting devices
4.5.2 Serial RS232 #2

Connector: 9-pin D-sub female Pin Function
1 Not used
Function:RS232 serial connection. Use 2 RD, Receive data
Atlas Copco serial cable to connect to a
3 TD, transmit data
PC.
4 +5V max 200 mA
Connections: This port is used for 5 GND
communication with high load, such as 6 Not used
ToolsTalk PF or Open Protocol. It can 7 Not used
also be used for connection with 8 Not used
scanners. 9 Not used
4.6 Ethernet TCP/IP

Connector: Shielded RJ45 for 10-baseT Pin Function
connection 1 Out inverse
2 Out
Function:
10 Mbit half duplex Ethernet
3 In inverse
communication
4 ----
5 ----
6 In
7 ----
8 ----
4.7 Digital inputs

Connector: 10-pin detachable screw terminal. Mating connector phoenix MCVR 1.5/10 -ST- 3.81 or
compatible.
Function: Isolated optic-coupled digital input. Logical function is set in the configuration of the Power
Focus.
Electrical data: “High” input (10 - 40) VDC. Current needed to activate input is 5 mA at 24 V.
This input can be connected to run both positive and negative logic (active high or active low).
36 (428) 9836 3123 01

Connecting devices
Pin Function
13 Digital input 1 +
14 Digital input 1 -
21 + 24 VDC isolated
22 GND (+24VDC isolated)
4.8 Digital outputs (relays)

Connector: 12-pin detachable screw terminal. Mating connector phoenix MCVR 1.5/12-ST-3.81 or
compatible.
Function: Two ways dry contact relays, isolated outputs. Logical function is set in the configuration of the
Power Focus.
Electrical data: Max 50 V DC/AC. Switching load: min 1 mA, max 500 mA resistive loads.
9836 3123 01 37 (428)

Connecting devices
Pin Function
1 Relay 1 Normally open
2 Relay 1 Common
3 Relay 1 Normally closed
4 Relay 2 Normally open
5 Relay 2 Common
7 Relay 3 Normally opened
8 Relay 3 Common
10 Relay 4 Normally opened
11 Relay 4 Common
4.9 24 VDC output

Isolated 24 VDC output. (19 V - 30 V), 1 A maximum load. This output can be used to feed external
equipment such as stack lights and buzzers. Atlas Copco I/O bus accessories are also powered from this
output.
4.10 I/O Bus

There are two I/O bus connectors.
Connector: 9-pin D-sub male.

Function: To connect
Atlas Copco I/O bus accessories and interconnect several PF units in
Synchronization mode. I/O bus connector #1 is parallel with I/O bus connector #2.
38 (428) 9836 3123 01

Connecting devices
There is a range of Power Focus accessories that connect over the proprietary Power Focus I/O bus, for
example Socket selector or I/O Expander.
To have a well functioning I/O bus, always use bus connectors. All accessories and PF units are equipped
with two parallel connectors. When all cables are connected, plug a lead into the empty connector. I/O
bus connectors #1 and #2 are fully parallel and can be used in any combination.
For I/O bus Sync configuration information, see section Sync.
Pin Function
1 +24 V iso.
2 Signal Low
3 0 V (+8V iso)
4 0 V (+24 V iso)
5 Not used
6 0 V (+8V iso)
7 Signal High
8 Not used
9 +8 V iso. (for I/O bus only)
4.11 Remote start connector

Connector: 4-pin detachable screw terminal. Mating connector phoenix MCVR 1.5/4-ST-3.81 or
compatible.
Function: Remote start input for use with external start switch. To run tool in reverse, first close the
reverse switch and then close the start switch. Pin 1 and 2 must be connected at power on to be able to use
the built-in tool trigger. If remote start is to be controlled from other inputs (I/O Expander, Sync, fieldbus
or digital input), pins 2 and 4 must be connected at power on.
9836 3123 01 39 (428)

Connecting devices
Pin Function
1 Tool built-in start switch
2 Common
3 Remote reverse
4 Remote start
Remote start is not available for Tensor STB tools.
Make sure that the power is switched off when changing the remote start connector.
4.12 Main power connector

Connector: IEC320
Electrical data: Input voltage (90 - 120) VAC, (200 - 240) VAC, (50 - 60) Hz. Auto select of voltage input
span.
40 (428) 9836 3123 01

PF user interface
5 PF user interface
This section describes the PF user interface. Except for differences in the user interface, PF Graph and
PF Compact have the same functionality and capacity.
For a description of connections, see section Connecting devices, or documents Product

Information for PF3000 (9836 2156 01), or Product Information for PF4000 (9836 3113 00).
5.1 PF Graph
PF Graph can be programmed in ToolsTalk PF, through a pre-programmed RBU, or by using the function
buttons on the front panel. Another PF can also be programmed by the Graph unit if both controllers are
members of the same cell. A Pset can also be programmed directly via the unit’s Auto set function.
5.1.1 Front panel

The front panel of PF Graph consists of a display,
indicator lights, keys and a red and white power switch.
Number Part Description

1 Indicators Eight indicators
2 Display The front panel has a configurable
color display. A power-save function
deactivates the backlighting on the
display if it is not used for 30 minutes.
3 Soft keys Five soft keys with functionality
according to the display
4 Function keys Used to program PF.
and keyboard
5 Power switch Red and white power switch.
9836 3123 01 41 (428)

PF user interface
Indicators
Indicator Description
OK The OK light indicates when the result of the tightening is within the specified limits. The indicator
remains active until the next cycle starts.
OK flash light indicates that it is safe to disconnect the tool. The LED goes off when the tool is
disconnected.
n x OK The n x OK light indicates when the number of approved tightenings corresponds to the number (batch
size) programmed into PF. The indicator remains active until the next cycle starts.
NOK The NOK red light indicates when at least one result of the tightening falls outside the specified limits.
The light is active until the next cycle starts. NOK flashing red indicates that it is NOT safe to disconnect
the tool. The LED goes off after three seconds.
JOB OK The JOB OK light indicates when the result of the Job is finished. The light remains active until the next
cycle starts or when the system is reset.
ALARM The ALARM indicates that an alarm message needs to be acknowledged. The light is active until the
message is cleared. The alarm light can also flash indicating an active alarm that does not need to be
acknowledged, i.e. service indicator alarm.
STAT The STAT light indicates when the calculated values fall outside statistical control limits. The light
remains active until the values are within the control limits or the memory has been reset.
Autoset (arrow The Auto set light indicates when the Auto set programming function is active. The light goes off when
target) Auto set is finished.
PROG. CONTROL If PF is in programming mode the Programming control light (illustrated by an open padlock) flashes
(padlock symbol) green. Programming control can be undertaken via the unit itself, via another PF Graph or via ToolsTalk
PF. A steady green light indicates that the programming keys on the front panel are unlocked.
Soft keys and keypad

Key Description
Soft keys Each soft key is used to select an option or a menu block from the display.
Channel [+/-] Select another controller within the configured cell.
Pset [+/-] In result mode: Select Pset to use if C200 is set to PF keyboard. In programming mode: Select Pset or
Job to configure.
Question Mark [?] Pressing the Question mark key displays information about the software, RBU type and the connected
tool.
Print symbol Press the Print key to do a print-out to a connected printer.
Arrows Up and down arrows: Scroll up and down in the menus
Left arrow: Leave current option or view
Right arrow: Execute selected function, select current option or view
RESULT Select result mode. Menu block View has options for the result view.
PROG Select programming mode.
OK OK is used to execute selected functions and acknowledge event.
CANCEL Cancel the current operation and return to the previous view.
Keypad Numeric keypad. Press repeatedly to toggle between letters and numbers
CL Clear the last input letter or number.
ENTER Enter is used to activate inputs in the programming blocks
42 (428) 9836 3123 01

PF user interface
5.1.2 Display
PF 4000 Graph features a large back-lit 72 x 96 mm color display with a dialog box-like interface to allow
accurate measurement readings and simple programming.
Header with three fields: channel number and

current Pset or Job, Pset name, and number of
tightenings (in batch). If the field is light-blue,
this indicates that the displayed information is
inactive or from another PF.
Result or Programming dialog box. Available
result view options are shown under the View
menu block. This figure shows the Last Results
view for one channel.
The last result lower windows are configurable.
Menu blocks representing programming tree
functions, short-cuts, arrows. The menu blocks
are controlled by the soft keys below.
Menus
The Menu blocks are located at the bottom of the display. Each soft key is used to select a menu block.
When selecting a menu block with more than one

item, a pull-up menu appears on the display.
To select an option, do one of the following:
 Keypad: Press the digit on the numeric
keypad that corresponds to the desired option.
 Soft keys: Scroll up or down using the soft
keys under the arrows. Then press the soft key
under Enter, or press ENTER on the keypad.
 Arrows: Scroll up or down using the arrows.
Then press the right arrow to confirm the
selection.
9836 3123 01 43 (428)

PF user interface
Data input
To access the data input boxes, do one of the
following:
 Highlight it and then press ENTER.
 Press the digit on the numeric keypad that
corresponds to the option.
To enter data, do the following:
 If it is a text box, use the keypad and press
until the desired figure, letter or symbol
appears. Press ENTER to confirm and exit the
data field.
 If it is a selection list, do one of the following:
o Use the soft keys under the arrows to
highlight the desired parameter. Press Text box
ENTER to confirm and exit the selection
list.
o Press the digit on the numeric keypad that
corresponds to the desired parameter to
confirm and exit the selection list.
Press Store to save the changes in the controller
and stay in the current display.
Press OK to confirm changes and return one level
up in the menu tree. More changes can be made
before storing.
Press Cancel to cancel any changes and leave the
dialog box.
Selection list
5.1.3 Programming PF Graph

To program PF Graph, do the following:
Press PROG. The padlock symbol starts blinking to show that the PF Graph has programming control, and
the programming menu is displayed. Select and fill in applicable parameters.
44 (428) 9836 3123 01

PF user interface
If another person or program has programming control, a message is displayed.
When a change has been made, Store is shown in a lighter color. Press the soft key below Store to confirm
changes.
Press RESULT to return to the result view.
Programming another PF
To program another PF through PF Graph, both channels have to be members of the same cell. The cell
configuration is done through ToolsTalk PF.
Press the Channel -/+ to access other controllers in the cell from the menu tree in the programming mode or
from the result view. Do the applicable programming.
Changing IP address
To change IP address on a controller in the network, do the following:
Press PROG and then 4,3,0,0 to open the IP

address dialog box.
Use the keypad to enter the correct IP
address.
Press Store and then RESULT to confirm
changes and return to the result view.
To change IP address on other channels in
the cell, do the following:
Press Channel -/+ to access the correct
controller. This can be done from the menu
tree in the programming mode, or from the
result view.
Change the IP address.
Programming the last result view

The last result view can be programmed to show different parts of the last result, and also to show the
result from one or two channels.
9836 3123 01 45 (428)

PF user interface
Press PROG and then 4,5,1 to open the result

view.
Press 0 or 1 to select one or two channels.
The programming mode for the result view is

displayed.
Press the number in the area to edit, then press
Enter to open the selection list for the result
view area. Make a selection and proceed with
the other result view areas.
To view more than one channel, press 3 or 4 to
access the lower part of the result view. Select
another PF with Channel -/+, and another Pset
with Pset -/+.
In the result view, press the Type soft key and select two channels to show the result from two channels.
The upper part displays the viewed channel and the lower any selected channel in the cell. R means
running Pset.
46 (428) 9836 3123 01

PF user interface
Print reports
The print key opens the print menu.
If print is selected from, for example the
controller menu, the controller report is
pre-selected.
Trace
One or multiple traces can be shown in the PF Graph display.
To show traces select Trace in the View

menu block. Select which type of chart to
view via the Type menu block.
9836 3123 01 47 (428)

PF user interface
In Torque over time trace mode it is

possible to plot several traces in the same
chart. This is done by accessing the Select
menu block and activating Multiple Traces.
The last ten traces are displayed in the
chart. The chart is scaled according to the
reference. If a reference is not selected the
chart is scaled according to the first plotted
trace.
In Multiple Traces mode a tightening trace

can be set as a reference by using the Select
reference command. The last tightening
trace is set as the reference. When a
reference is selected, all traces except the
reference is cleared. The reference that is
shown in red color is stored in the memory
and is available after reboot. In Select
reference mode the last nine traces and the
references are displayed in the chart.
48 (428) 9836 3123 01

PF user interface
5.2 PF Compact
PF Compact can be programmed in ToolsTalk PF, through a pre-programmed RBU, or programmed using
the cell function on a PF Graph. A Pset can also be programmed directly via the unit’s Auto set function.
Except for differences in the user interface, PF Compact has the same functionality and capacity as the
Graph model.
5.2.1 Front panel

The front panel of PF Compact consists of a display, indicator lights, keys and a red and white power
switch. The display is set up using parameter C512 Compact display.
Number Part Description

1 Display The front panel contains a 4-
digit, 7-segment display.
2 Power Switch Red and white power switch.
PF 3000 PF 4000
9836 3123 01 49 (428)

PF user interface
5.2.2 Display
After a tightening, result is presented on the display in configured presentation unit. If the presentation
value is bigger than 9999, display shows ‘EEEE’.
Engineering unit Convert factor

Nm 1
Nm to Ozfin 141.6
Nm to Lbfin 8.851
Nm to Lbfft 0.737562
Nm to Kgfm 0.101972
Nm to Kgfcm 10.197162
Torque is presented as real numbers in the following format. The decimal point indicates that the number
is a torque value.
Torque (engineering unit) No of decimals

0.00 – 9.99 2
10.00 – 99.99 2
100.0 – 999.9 1
.1000 – .9999 0
In the 1000-9999 interval, a decimal point is located to the left of the first digit to distinguish
torque values from angle values which do not have a decimal point. The reason to the left
position is HW related on the display card.
Angle values are presented as integers in the interval 0-9999 degrees. When a tightening result is
composed by torque and angle, the display alternating shows the torque and angle result (changes every
0.8 sec)
During tightening, the P-set number is displayed. Events are presented on the display with an event code,
being a 3 digit number preceded with an ‘E’.
50 (428) 9836 3123 01

PF user interface
5.2.3 Indicator lights

Indicator Description
OK The OK light indicates when the result of the tightening is
within the specified limits. The indicator remains active until
the next cycle starts.
OK flash light indicates that it is safe to disconnect the tool.
The LED goes off when the tool is disconnected.
NOK The NOK red light indicates when at least one result of the
tightening falls outside the specified limits. The light is active
until the next cycle starts.
NOK flashing red indicates that it is NOT safe to disconnect
the tool. The LED goes off after three seconds.
JOB OK The JOB OK light indicates when the result of the Job is
finished. The light remains active until the next cycle starts or
when the system is reset.
n x OK The n x OK light indicates when the number of approved
tightenings corresponds to the number (batch size)
programmed into PF. The indicator remains active until the
next cycle starts.
ALARM The ALARM indicates that an alarm message needs to be
acknowledged. The light is active until the message is cleared.
The alarm light can also flash indicating an active alarm that
does not need to be acknowledged, i.e. service indicator alarm.
PROG. If PF is in programming mode the Programming control light
CONTROL (illustrated by an open padlock) flashes green. Programming
(padlock symbol) control can be undertaken via the unit itself, via a PF Graph or
via ToolsTalk PF. A steady green light indicates that the
programming keys on the front panel are unlocked.
If PF Compact keypad is locked, the only keys on the
controller that can be used are question mark and enter. (If the
keypad is unlocked, steady green, any key can be accessed.)
AUTO SET The Auto set light indicates when the Auto set programming
(graph symbol) function is active. The light goes off when Auto set is finished.
STAT The STAT light indicates when the calculated values fall
outside statistical control limits. The light remains active until
the values are within the control limits or the memory has been
reset.
9836 3123 01 51 (428)

PF user interface
5.2.4 Keypad
Key Description
Plus [+] Navigates through menus on the display and increases numbers.
Minus [-] Navigates through menus on the display and decreases numbers.
Autoset Press the Autoset key to enter Autoset programming mode.
(arrow target) Aset/Ft alternates in the display and the Autoset LED comes on.
Press Enter. Change the P113 Final target value (if required) by
pressing the +/- keys.
Press Enter to select the P113 Final target. Aset is shown in the
display.
Perform a number of tightenings. When Autoset is ready, the
selected Pset number is displayed and the Autoset LED goes out.
To abort Autoset press the Autoset key (exit and no save).
Question Pressing the Question mark key displays the following
Mark [?] information:
RBU License level: rbu toggle with RBU type. Au = Gold,
Ag = Silver and Br = Bronze.Software version: rEL followed by
version number rolls on the display from right to left.
Tool model name: type toggles with the tool model
name.Current Pset: Pset toggles with the current Pset ID, e.g.
P1.
Current Job: Job toggles with the current Job ID, e.g. J3.
Enter The Enter key is used to execute selected functions and for event
acknowledgement.
Function Description
Key [F]
General Press F (Function key) to display functions. To display function F1 press F once, to display function F2 press F
twice etc. Press Enter to access and edit a function. When finished, press F repeatedly to display result mode
again (or else it takes 30 seconds for the screen to update automatically).
Note: The functionality is dependent on the RBU version.

F1 F1/Ft alternates in the display. If no Pset is selected F1/---- is displayed.
Setting Final Press Enter to select a new P113 Final target value. Change the value by pressing the +/- keys.
Target value Press Enter to save and exit. Press F to exit (no save).
F2 F2/tunE alternates in the display if the selected P100 Control strategy is equal to DS control. Otherwise F2/---- is
Setting displayed.
Torque Tune Press Enter to access the torque tune factor. Change the value by pressing the +/– keys (range 80% - 220%,
Factor default value 100%).
Press Enter to save and exit. Press F to exit (no save).
52 (428) 9836 3123 01

PF user interface
Key [F]
F3 Press the F key three times. F3/tool alternates in the display if a tool is connected. Otherwise F3/---- is displayed.
Motor tuning Press Enter to activate the motor tuning process. The display shows the process status during progress, (1 to 7).
Press the Tool trigger to start motor tuning. The trigger must be pressed during the entire process.
Release Tool trigger or press F to abort the motor tuning process.
When the motor tuning process ends, done (for succeeded) or Err (for failed) is displayed.
After a few seconds F3/tool starts alternating on the display.
F4 F4/Pset alternates in the display if the C200 Pset is set to PF keyboard. Otherwise F4/---- is displayed.
Selecting Press Enter to access the available Psets. Browse existing Psets by pressing the +/- keys.
Pset Press Enter to select a Pset and exit.
Press F to exit (no selection).
F5 F5/batS alternates in the display, indicating that a Pset is selected. Otherwise F5/---- is displayed.
Setting Batch Press Enter to access the Batch Size value (range 0 - 99). Change the batch size value by pressing the +/- keys.
count Press Enter to save and exit.
Press F to exit (no save).
F6 F6/DISC alternates in the display if a tool is connected. Otherwise F6/---- is displayed.
Disconnect If safe to disconnect tool is rolling on the display press Enter. The tool may now be disconnected.
tool If Fail is displayed, DO NOT disconnect the tool. Press F or Enter to exit.
F7 Press the F key seven times. F7/stun alternates in the display.
Sync motor Press Enter to activate the Sync motor tuning process. The display shows two numbers simultaneously during
tuning progress. The number to the left is the percentage of Sync member that has finished motor tuning, and the
number to the right is the process status (1 to 7).
Press the Tool trigger on the Sync reference to start Sync motor tuning. The trigger must be pressed during the
entire process.
Release the Tool trigger or press the F key to abort the motor tuning process.
When the motor tuning process ends, done (for succeeded) or Err (for failed) is displayed. After a few seconds
F7/stun starts alternating on the display.
F8 Press the F key eight times.F8/IP alternates in the display.
Controller IP Press Enter. Addr is shown. Press Enter to edit the first part of the IP address. Increase/decrease the number by
settings pressing the Plus/Minus keys. Press Enter to confirm and edit the second part of the address. Repeat the
procedure for all remaining IP address parts.
Press Enter. Sub is shown. Press Enter to edit the first part of the subnet mask. Increase/decrease the number by
pressing the Plus/Minus keys. Press Enter to confirm and edit the second part. Repeat the procedure for all
remaining subnet parts.
Press Enter. rout is shown. Press Enter to edit the first part of the default router. Increase/decrease the number
by pressing the Plus/Minus keys. Press Enter to confirm and edit the second part. Repeat the procedure for all
remaining router parts.
Event code E857 Reboot needed before changes take effect will be blinking on the display when finished, if any
changes have been made. Press Enter to acknowledge the event.
Restart PF.
F10 Press the F key ten times. F10/pair alternates in the display.
Wireless tool Press Enter to activate the pairing process. The display shows the process status during progress (1 to 5).
pairing mode Event code E550 Radio contact with tool established, tool accessible is shown on the display when finished.
9836 3123 01 53 (428)

Getting started with ToolsTalk PF
6 Getting started with ToolsTalk PF

ToolsTalk PFis an application that acts as an interface between the user and the Power Focus. It is used
for programming and monitoring Power Focus from a PC.
With ToolsTalk PF installed, users can communicate with the Power Focus via the serial port (RS232) as
well as over the Ethernet.
Ethernet communication makes the management of Power Focus easy and efficient, since ToolsTalk PF
can be installed on a PC anywhere in the network.
ToolsTalk PF serves as an interface between the user and PF. With ToolsTalk PF, users can create and
edit instructions and settings for the controller. The settings needed to control the tightening process
performed by the Power Focus include; tightening strategies, control parameters, torque parameters,
angle parameters, speed and ramp parameters and time parameters.
The settings are transferred to Power Focus via an Ethernet connection, via the serial port, or via the
USB port on PF 4000. Process data can be collected from the Power Focus and monitored in real-time.
ToolsTalk PF makes management of Power Focus easy and efficient, since the software can be installed
on any PC on the network.
ToolsTalk PF is fully compatible with Microsoft Windows and supports widely accepted communication
protocols such as; Ethernet, TCP/IP and RS232 (serial communication).
6.1 Installing ToolsTalk PF

ToolsTalk PF is easy to install:
 Insert the installation CD and follow the instructions
 It is possible to select installation of multiple instances of ToolsTalk PF. This
means it is possible to open several ToolsTalk PF instances at the same time in
your desktop.
 Open ToolsTalk by selecting Start > Program > Atlas Copco Tools AB > ToolsTalk
Power Focus
9836 3123 01 55 (428)

6.2 ToolsTalk overview

Almost every function in ToolsTalk PF has its own window. The figure below shows the ToolsTalk PF
interface with menu list, selection panel, toolbar and PF Map.
There are several ways to start a function in ToolsTalk PF. With almost all functions, it is possible to use a
menu item in the menu list. Click on a symbol in the toolbar or double-click on the text in PF Map.
6.2.1 Menu list

The following options are available in the PF Menu list.
An additional menu appears in the Menu list when opening a function window. For example,
when opening a Pset window, a new menu named “Pset” appears in the menu list.
56 (428) 9836 3123 01

Illustration Name Description

File Read and store files, print and exit ToolsTalk
PF from the File menu.
If, for example, the Pset window is active,
options for reading and storing Pset appear in
the File menu.
Edit Create a new Pset, Multistage, Job, Sound and

Logic Configurator from the Edit menu.
Focus The Focus menu specifies the type of

connection to use when connecting to the
Power Focus. Choose between an Ethernet
connection and a Serial connection.
The Offline mode allows access to ToolsTalk
PF without the need for a connection to a
Power Focus.
9836 3123 01 57 (428)


Options The Options menu includes:
ToolsTalk interface settings: View Toolbar,
Settings, Change language and Change Manual.
See section Configuring ToolsTalk for more
information.
Get Event Log: Retrieves the event log from
the connected PF
Forced release progcontrol terminates the
connection to the current PF and enables
another user to take programming control over
PF.
Forced release progcontrol disconnects another
ToolsTalk when programming control
(progcontrol) over the database in PF is needed,
for example for a configuration change. Forced
release progcontrol can not disconnect a graph
interface in the programming view.
Reboot PF. A pop-up window prompts for

confirmation before reboot.
Window Set properties for windows and icons from the

Window menu as well as enable and open the
Activate menu.
58 (428) 9836 3123 01


Activate The Activate menu contains a list of all
available functions (Pset, Job, Multistage, etc.).
Help The Help menu allows access to the Power

Focus help file. Pressing F1 on the keyboard
gives access to the help file from any window.
About ToolsTalk PF brings up details about the
version of the ToolsTalk PF program in use.
6.2.2 Selection panel

Selected The available options are: Serial connection,
Controller Ethernet connection and Offline mode.
Running Job If parameter C201 Job is set to Ethernet/Serial, it is

possible to select a Job to run.
9836 3123 01 59 (428)

Running If parameter C200 Pset is set to Ethernet/Serial, it is

Pset/Multistage possible to select a Pset or Multistage to run.
PF List To simplify the Ethernet connection to a Power

Focus, use the PF List. Select an item and ToolsTalk
PF connects to the corresponding Power Focus. The
information in the list contains; name, IP address
and port number.
6.2.3 Toolbar
The toolbar icons are short-cuts to the basic functions in ToolsTalk PF. See the corresponding section in
this manual for a detailed description of each function.
Icon Icon name Description
Pset This icon opens the programming window for the first Pset.
A Pset contains all the necessary information Power Focus needs to perform a tightening.
There are a number of parameters included in a Pset, among them; control parameters,
torque parameters, angle parameters etc.
Click on the arrow to the right to select between existing Psets (shown along with number
and name).
Use the function in the PF Map to create a new Pset.
Multistage This icon opens the programming window for the first Multistage.
In some instances it is necessary to perform a tightening in several stages. These
circumstances require specific tightening strategies. Multistage allows the user to create
linear sequences of up to eight Psets to perform a tightening divided into stages.
Click on the arrow to the right to select between existing Multistages (shown along with
number and name).
Use the function in the PF Map to create a new Multistage.
Job This icon opens the programming window for the first Job.
A Job is a collection of Psets or Multistages, which are useful when performing several
multiple tightening operations, each with different requirements. This is convenient since the
operator does not have to select a new Pset or Multistage for every tightening.
Click on the arrow to the right to select between existing Jobs (shown along with number
and name).
Use the function in the PF Map to create a new Job.
Controller This icon opens the first part in the Controller programming section.
Controller contains information and settings for PF. This includes network, COM ports,
display, memory and accessibility.
Use the arrow to the right to select between the sub-menus.
60 (428) 9836 3123 01


Tool This icon opens the first part in the Tool programming section.
The Tool branch includes information, configuration, diagnostic and maintenance for the
Tensor tool connected to PF.
Accessories This icon opens the first part in the Accessories programming section.
In the Accessories branch are the digital inputs and outputs of the PF configured and
diagnosed. It also includes information about the devices connected to the I/O bus and tool
bus, and how to configure these devices.
Sync This icon opens the Sync programming section.
Up to ten PF units in the same logical Cell can be Synchronized to perform the same task
simultaneously, a function known as Sync. This type of operation requires Synchronization
of the Power Focuses involved.
Identifier This icon opens the Identifier programming section.
It is possible to send an Identifier string to a PF. This string is normally sent by a barcode
reader connected to one of the serial ports on PF. (This barcode is in car plants usually
known as a VIN or ESN).
Fieldbus This icon opens the fieldbus programming section.
Fieldbus communication is useful for data communication between PF and PLC’s. It is an
effective and fast way for the data transfer of short data packages.
Logic Configurator This icon opens the programming window for the first Logical Configurator.
The ToolsTalk PF software feeds the controller (PF 4000 only) with inputs, called
Configurator sheets. The Configurator sheets consist of a Relay status array and a DigIn
status array. The arrays have the status of each relay/digital input function (if the function is
defined on the internal I/O’s or one of the I/O Expanders).
Every Logic Configurator circuit instruction list is evaluated every 100 ms which
corresponds to a tick or every time an input status changed.
Click on the arrow to the right to select between existing Logical Configurators (shown
along with number and name).
Use the function in the PF Map to create a new Logical Configurator.
Monitors Click on the arrow to the right of this icon to select an appropriate monitor; Result monitor,
Job monitor, Operator monitor, Identifier monitor and Get all results.
ToolsTalk PF provides a number of monitors designed to present extensive information
about the various functions of Power Focus.
Trace Click the Trace icon to bring up a graphical display of the tightening results.
Via the Trace function it is possible to view tightening graphs with different display settings.
Statistic Click on Statistic icon to display statistical results and graphs. Via the arrow to the right it is
possible to select a statistic to run.
PF Map This icon opens the PF Map if it is closed.
9836 3123 01 61 (428)


Connect The Connect icon changes appearance depending on the connection status. When the PC is
not in contact with the Power Focus, this icon is visible. Clicking on it establishes a
connection between the PC and PF. Choose connection in “selected controller” list
(ToolsTalk PF menu list).
Disconnect Once a connection is established this icon appears. Clicking on it disconnects the PC from
PF.
Help This icon opens the Help section.
6.2.4 PF Map
The PF Map gives an overview of and shortcuts to all settings in ToolsTalk PF. Expand and collapse to
open and close menus and double click on function names (Pset, Multistage, Job, etc.) to open the
corresponding function. Right-click the function names to create a new instance of the function.
Brief information about the selected setting is displayed in the right panel of the PF Map.
62 (428) 9836 3123 01

6.3 Configuring ToolsTalk settings

This section describes some of the available ToolsTalk settings. The following settings are located in the
Settings dialog box. The settings are configurable off-line.
 Setup for communication with PF

 Setup for viewing information inside the ToolsTalk PF application
 Printout setup
 Administration of the PF list
On the menu bar, open Options>Settings.
6.3.1 Communication
The Communication tab has four areas; View event setup, Serial setup, Ethernet setup and LOG.
In the View event setup area, make selections for viewing controller errors and warnings.
9836 3123 01 63 (428)

In the Serial setup area, select which Com port to use on the PC, normally Com1 or Com2, for
communication with PF. The Baud rate can be set to 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 or 155200.
The TTPF baud rate must match the baud rate set in PF. The default value is 9600.
In the Ethernet setup area, enter the data for PF. The Port number is default 6543 and does not normally
need to be changed. If using an item from the PF list (PF available list) then all three parameters (type,
port, IP) are set simultaneously.
To edit Ethernet setup parameters, ToolsTalk PF has to be in disconnected mode.
In the LOG area, enable the log function for communication between Power Focus and ToolsTalk PF.
Messages are stored in the file stated in the log file area. Create rules for logging by clicking the Advanced
key.
If Split log in the Advanced log settings is activated the size of log.txt file can not exceed the value set in
Log file size. When the file is full, the program copies the contents to a file called log~.txt and erase the
content of log.txt. Data will then continue to be stored in log.txt.
64 (428) 9836 3123 01

6.3.2 Application
The Application tab has three areas; Presentation, Automatic functionality, and Default directory.
The first area concerns the ToolsTalk PF presentation.

 If the Show hints checkbox is selected, then the limits for each parameter are displayed in the status bar
when the cursor is placed over a parameter box.
 If the Show parameter number checkbox is selected, then all parameter numbers are displayed in the
windows.
 If the Show VIN in result checkbox is selected, then the result parts selected in the Identifier function are
displayed in the Result monitor.
9836 3123 01 65 (428)

The Automatic functionality area activates/deactivates the following functions:

 Auto collapse tree views
 Type of connection at startup: If Serial auto connection on startup or Ethernet auto connection on
startup is checked, ToolsTalk PF connects to Power Focus immediately on start-up.
 If the Auto store PF to file on disconnect box is checked, then ToolsTalk PF stores the PF data to file
when disconnecting.
In the Default directory area, specify where the log files and auto stored PF files are saved.
6.3.3 Printout
The Printout tab contains printout settings.
Text entered in the Printout footer field appears on every printed paper.
In the Printout format and Printout colors areas, make settings for printout.
66 (428) 9836 3123 01

6.3.4 PF List
The PF List tab contains the PF available list box. Add, modify and remove items from here. PF Ethernet
type defines PF in the net, seen from ToolsTalk. Note that the configuration of PF in the net is made from
PF Map>Controller>Network.
9836 3123 01 67 (428)

6.4 Connecting a PF
There are different types of connection possibilities; Ethernet TCP/IP, Serial RS232 and USB. USB
connection is only available for PF 4000.
6.4.1 Ethernet connection

To make an Ethernet connection between PF and Tools Talk, PF must be configured with a unique IP
address. This address must be stored in Tools Talk.
Setting IP address in PF
Do either of the following:
 Connect a PC to PF through serial connection. Follow the instructions in section Network or set the IP-
address in PF from ToolsTalk.
 Use the keypad directly on PF. For PF Compact, select F8 and enter the IP address.
 For PF Graph, press PROG and open the Controller>Network>Ethernet branch. Enter the IP-address.
Storing PF IP address in Tools Talk

 From the Options menu, open the Settings dialog box. Do either of the following:
 Click the Communication tab, Ethernet setup area, type the Controller IP address of the PF to connect
to. Also click the option for NetMaster, CellMaster or Controller.
 Click the PF List tab, and create a list of PF. Note: To configure a cell or net, see section Network
 Save the settings and proceed to section To connect.
6.4.2 Serial connection

When using the serial connection, it is important to use the proper baud rate settings. In
order to establish a connection between ToolsTalk PF and PF they must use the same baud
rate. The default baud rate is set to 9600 bit/s.
From the Options menu, open the Settings dialog box. Check the Baud rate for the PC Com port.
Make sure that the serial cable is connected to the correct Com port on the PC and to Serial RS 232 (2) on
PF.
Open PF Map>Controller>COM ports and check the settings for PF, Serial 2 C410 Baud rate.
Save the settings and proceed to section To connect.
68 (428) 9836 3123 01

6.4.3 USB connection

A USB port is standard on PF 4000. The port is located under the PF front panel.
Connect a USB cable between PF and the PC (PF acts as USB device). An extra COM port should now be
visible on the PC. Open ToolsTalk and connect serially via the extra COM port.
Prior to using USB connection, FTDI’s virtual COM port (VCP) drivers should be installed. The
V.2.08.14 of the file is used for Windows 7, Vista, XP and 2000.
1. Run the CDM20814_Setup.exe file
2. Click Run
3. The driver has been installed when the console window disappears
4. A virtual COM port will appear when connecting to the USB on PF4000 to the PC. Select that
COM port when running Tools Talk Power Focus
If using a different OS then above or to get the latest version of drivers, this driver
can be download from: http://www.ftdichip.com/Drivers/VCP.htm
Also a detailed installation guides are available from:
http://www.ftdichip.com/Documents/InstallGuides.htm .
Contact Atlas Copco representative to obtain more information about available drivers.
9836 3123 01 69 (428)

6.4.4 To connect
There are several ways to connect a Power Focus from ToolsTalk PF:
 Select Focus in the Menu list and then choose between Serial connection and Ethernet connection.
 In the drop-down list for Selected controller in Selection panel, click on either Serial PF or Ethernet PF.
 In the PF Map, double-click on the controller under Serial PF or Ethernet PF.
 Use the Connect icon on the Toolbar. By default, this icon creates a serial connection. However, it
remembers the most recent connection.
 Use predefined PF units from the PF List in the Selection panel.
6.4.5 To disconnect
To disconnect, click on the Disconnect icon on the Toolbar or select Disconnect in the Menu list (Focus >
Ethernet/serial > PF name > Disconnect).
6.4.6 Cordless tools

If the Power Focus is connected serially to an IRC-module for communication with a cordless tool, special
considerations must be taken before serial or USB connection can be established with TTPF.
 The parameter T294 Serial connection in the Tool Configuration->Connection menu must be set to
Internal.
 The baud rate as mentioned in section 6.4.2 must be set the same on the PF 4000 as on TTPF.
 If an IRC Focus is used, the serial connection is available for other use than the cordless tool
communication, so no special consideration is needed.
6.5 Storing programming on file

To store the programmed settings on file, open the File menu. The following options are available:
 Read <object>
 Read PF from File
 Save <object>
 Store PF to File
<Object> could be a section in the PF Map, for instance in Pset, Multistage, Job, Controller, Tool, Sync,
Identifier, Fieldbus, Trace or Diagnostic.
70 (428) 9836 3123 01

See table below for option descriptions.

Option Description
Store PF to File Programmed settings in the Power Focus are stored to a file when connected to a Power Focus.
Read PF from File Power Focus updates with programmed settings stored on file when connected to a Power Focus
and performing Read PF from file.
Read PF from file overwrites current programming and configuration in the
connected PF.
Save <object> This function stores a single object to file. The selected window in ToolsTalk PF is stored to file.
(Controller, Pset, Job etc.)
Read <object > This function writes a single object file to the Power Focus. The selected window is updated with
(Controller, Pset, Job etc.) data from the file.
6.5.1 Store PF to file

When performing Store PF to File, the user should name the file. ToolsTalk PF stores the programmed
settings for more than one file (for example one file for each Pset, Multistage and Job).
When storing PF to file, it is possible to store files in Excel format. Select Excel as file format in the Save
as dialogue. The overhead file has the extension pft. Extensions for the other stored files are xls.
Open ToolsTalk PF and connect to PF.

On the Menu bar, open File>Store PF to file.
A Save as dialog box appears. State target, type name and
save the PF text file (*.pf3).
A Confirmation message is displayed.
The “PF Text file” should be used for the

restoring of data when the memory setup is done.
9836 3123 01 71 (428)

6.5.2 Read PF from file

Command “Read PF from file” overwrites current
programming and configuration in connected PF.
It is necessary to perform “Read PF from file” TWO

times and reboot PF one extra time for changes to
take effect.
Open ToolsTalk PF and connect to PF.

On the Menu bar, open File>Read PF from file.
A Confirm pop up window informs

that restoring from file will replace
everything on the controller.
Select Yes to continue.
Select No to abort operation.
Read Selection window appears.
Select functions to restore. An
unchecked box means no
replacement of data in that
function area.
Click OK to confirm.
A Confirm pop up window
appears.
Select Yes to keep present Power
Focus name and Network setup.
Select No to restore Power Focus
name and network setup from file.
72 (428) 9836 3123 01

6.6 Offline
mode gives the user the opportunity to conduct programming and configuration, without a PF
Offline
connection. All programming is stored to or read from a file. It is possible to copy this file to one or
more PF units.
There are three different ways to select the offline mode:
 In the main Menu list, select Focus>Offline.
 In the Selected controller drop menu, select Offline.
 In the PF Map, double-click Offline.
The file can be located on the local hard drive, network, etc. There is a certain number of default files
supplied when installing ToolsTalk PF. Also, find these files separately on the ToolsTalk PF installation
CD-ROM. Depending on the RBU license level; just select the file to use. The different RBU types
correspond to the names of the default files (“DS.pf3”, “Gold.pf3”, “Silver.pf3” and “Bronze.pf3”). It is
recommended to make a backup of these files.
Select a file with the same license level as PF. ToolsTalk PF opens the
selected file and enables the user to change it.
It is possible to continue to change the content of a file with a higher RBU
license level, but when trying to use the file with a PF with a lower license
level a warning message is generated.
Note: It is also possible to modify the current configuration. Before
disconnecting, use commend File>Store PF to File to store the current
configuration file.
To upload the file, connect PF and select File>Read PF from File.
9836 3123 01 73 (428)

6.6.1 Configuring a tool offline

In offline mode, open Tool>Information in the PF Map.
Click Set tool. The Set tool window appears.
Select a tool or configure a new tool via the Create tool key.
74 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
7 Pset
The set of parameters that controls the tightening process is contained within a Pset. This
section describes how to setup the basic parameters necessary to perform a tightening. Create a
Pset by using Autoset, Quick programming or by setting the parameter values manually using
PF Graph or ToolsTalk PF.
This section includes screenshots from ToolsTalk PF. The screenshots show examples of
parameter settings and are NOT intended to be generally applicable. Check with your
local Atlas Copco representative how to set up your specific system environment.
See parameter list section Pset for a description of all available Pset options.
The basic Pset parameters are located under the Programming branch:
 Control
 Torque
 Angle
 Speed and ramp
 Time
 Batch count
 High speed rundown
 Positioning
 Additional settings are found under Programming+, Pset setup and
Statistic programming.
An easy way to program a Pset is to use the Autoset function.
Quick programming is intended to help users to quickly configure a
Pset. After completing a Quick programming procedure, the tool is
ready to use for tightening.
Programming help shows an image of the selected strategy.
Every time a Pset changes, the ID of the person changing the Pset is
stored in P409 PSet updated by. This information is useful for tracing
who has made the last change in any given PSet. If no user has logged
in the filed values are: TTPF if changed via ToolsTalk, OPER if
changed via the controller, and BLANK if the Pset has been created in
an earlier version of the software. (For being able to log users this
functionality requires a special SW called ToolsUserAdmin, which
handles the access level for users via TTPF.)
9836 3123 01 75 (428)

Pset
All Pset changes are reflected in ToolsNet.
7.1 Create new Pset/Open Pset

In the PF Map, right-click and select
Create New Pset.
Alternatively, double-click or right click

on an existing Pset, to open the Pset
configuration window.
As default there is one Pset

existing in ToolsTalk PF.
The Create new Pset window

pops up.
Select available New Pset ID
from drop down menu.
Enter a New Pset Name
(optional).
Click OK to open the new Pset
setup window.
Continue with Autoset, Quick Programming or Programming.
76 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
7.2 Autoset
An easy way to program a Pset is to use the Autoset function. Power
Focus adapts the programming to the specific joint characteristics and
sets all the parameters automatically. Autoset does not change any
parameters outside the used Pset.
Autoset uses P100 Control strategy DS con for DS tools and
Tq con/ang mon for all other tools.
Autoset can only be selected:
 When a tool is connected
 When PF is switched on
 On the running Pset (displayed in the selection panel)
If using an existing Pset, the parameters are erased and

replaced by the Autoset calculated parameters.
Click Autoset in the Pset window.

A green light on the front panel of the PF indicates that Autoset is activated. When this signal is shut off,
Autoset is finished and PF is now programmed for that joint. The Autoset procedure can be aborted by
clicking cancel before the green light shuts off.
Enter the P113 Final target value

and click OK.
9836 3123 01 77 (428)

Pset
Perform a number of tightenings

with the tool.
The first two tightenings are
completed at very low speed.
Normally, three to ten tightenings
are required in order for the
Power Focus to calculate and set
the required parameters for the
specific joint characteristics.
Click OK when prompted.

Clicking Abort before the Autoset procedure is completed cancels the operation and restores the previous
settings.
7.3 Quick programming

Quick programming is intended to help users to quickly configure a Pset
and gives the opportunity to use the Power Focus after a fast and
simple programming.
The joint angle is the distance from when the screw (nut) head touches
the surface and the torque starts to build up, until it reaches the set
limit. It is possible to measure the joint angle by using a torque wrench.
For hard joints, it is best to set the value at 30 degrees. For soft joints we recommend setting the joint
angle above 100 degrees. This gives a better tightening during the first stage and a distinct second stage.
Adjust the angle if the second stage is too long. It is important that there is a second stage; otherwise the
tool may jerk at full torque (overshoot).
If using an existing Pset, the parameters are erased and replaced by the Quick
programming calculated parameters.
For quick programming, the final target value must be larger or equal to 25 percent of
T102 Tool max torque.
78 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
Open an existing Pset or create a

new one.
Click Quick programming in the Pset
window.
Select P100 Control strategy and enter
the joint angle and P113 Final target.
Click OK to finish.
7.4 Programming help

Via the Programming help function ToolsTalk PF can illustrate an
example of the selected control and tightening strategy.
Click Programming help in the Pset window.
9836 3123 01 79 (428)

Pset
7.5 Programming
In the Pset setup window, expand the Programming branch.
Select Control.
Choose the desired P100

Control strategy, P101
Tightening strategy and
settings for the other
parameters.
For more information, see sections Control strategies,

Tightening strategies and Additional control options.
80 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
In the Pset Programming branch,

select Torque or Angle.
Make suitable parameter settings.
9836 3123 01 81 (428)

Pset

select Speed and ramp or Time.
82 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset

select Batch count, High speed
rundown, Positioning or Snug
gradient.

Click Store to save the settings.
9836 3123 01 83 (428)

Pset
7.6 Control strategies

For all Tq con and DS con tightenings the process starts when the torque reaches P110 Cycle start. When the
torque reaches target and then falls below P115 Cycle complete the process ends. When the torque drops
below P115 Cycle complete without having reached target before, a timer is started. In this case, if the
torque does not increase above P115 cycle complete during P141 End time seconds, the process ends.
For Reverse ang the tightening process also starts when the torque reaches P110 Cycle start.
For Rotate spindle forward/reverse the tightening process starts immediately when the tool starts running.
The P123 Target angle is defined by P121 Measure angle to and can be measured from P120 Start final angle to
Torque peak, Angle peak, P115 Cycle complete, or Shut off.
P124 Final angle max is always evaluated from P120 Start final angle to angle peak.
For cordless tools some of the control strategies and options are not available.
Please consult the relevant tool manuals for more information.
7.6.1 Tq con
The Tq con strategy controls the Torque
torque. This strategy is selectable
for both one stage and two stage
tightenings. The tool stops when
2.
the torque reaches the P113 Final
target. 3.
1.
If, for some reason, the tool
should exceed P114 Final tq max,
the tool shuts off and the (NOK)
tightening result is shown.
Angle
1. P112 Final torque min
2. P114 Final torque max
3. P113 Final target
84 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
7.6.2 Tq con/ang mon

The Tq con/ang mon strategy Torque
controls the torque and monitors
the angle. This strategy is
selectable for both one and two
2.
stage tightenings. The tool stops
when the torque reaches the P113 3.
Final target value. 1.
If the tool for some reason should 4. 5.

exceed P114 Final tq max or P124
Final angle max, the tool shuts off
and the (NOK) tightening result is
Angle
shown.
1. P112 Final torque min 4. P122 Final angle min
2. P114 Final torque max 5. P124 Final angle max
7.6.3 Ang con/tq mon

Ang con/tq mon strategy controls Torque
the angle and monitors the torque.
This strategy is selectable for both
one and two stage tightenings. 6.
2.
P123 Target angle is then defined
as the number of degrees between
P120 Start final angle and angle 1.
peak. The tool stops at P123 Target
angle. 4. 5.
If the tool for some reason should

exceed P114 Final tq max or P124
Angle
Final angle max, the tool shuts off
and the (NOK) tightening results 2. P114 Final torque max 5. P124 Final angle max
are shown. 6. P123 Target angle
9836 3123 01 85 (428)

Pset
7.6.4 Tq con/ang con (AND) / (OR)

The Tq con/ang con (AND)/ (OR) Torque
strategy controls both torque and
angle. This strategy is selectable
for both one and two stage 6.
2.
tightenings.
3.
For Tq con/ang con (AND), Power 1.
Focus controls the P113 Final target
value and the P123 Target angle 4. 5.
value. The tool stops when both
targets are reached. They do not
have to be reached at the same
Angle
time.
For Tq con/ang con (OR), Power 2. P114 Final torque max 5. P124 Final angle max
3. P113 Final target 6. P123 Target angle
Focus controls the P113 Final target
value and the P123 Target angle
value. The tool stops when the
first of these two targets are
reached.
For both Tq con/ang con (AND) and Tq con/ang con (OR) the torque and the angle result must be within
respective min and max limit.
If, for some reason, the tool should exceed P114 Final tq max or P124 Final angle max, the tool shuts off and
the (NOK) tightening results are shown.
86 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
7.6.5 Reverse ang

The Reverse ang strategy reverses Torque
the spindle a specified number of
degrees in the opposite tool
tightening direction. This is useful 3. 2. 1.
when, for example, the bolt needs
to be loosened before the final
tightening. Create a Multistage to
combine and perform several 4.
5.
Psets as one.
P123 Target angle is defined as the
number of degrees between the
P120 Start final angle and the peak Angle
angle. The tool stops at P123 1. P123 Target angle
Target angle. 2. P120 Start final angle
3. P114 Final torque max
4. P122 Final angle min
5. P124 Final angle max
If the tool for some reason should exceed P114 Final tq max or P124 Final angle max, the tool shuts off and
the (NOK) tightening results are shown. The torque value shown in the result is torque at peak angle.
Angle measurement starts when the P120 Start final angle is reached.
For reverse ang, the “active” direction of the tool socket rotation is the opposite of the P240
Tool tightening direction. For instance, to select CW turn the Direction ring to the left position.
For safety reasons, it is not possible to loosen the joint in this way.
9836 3123 01 87 (428)

Pset
7.6.6 Rotate spindle forward/reverse

The rotate spindle forward/reverse Torque
functions rotate the spindle a 2.
specified number of degrees, 7.
either forward or reverse, 1.
independently of torque. The only
torque values monitored are P114
Final tq max and P112 Final tq min.
P123 Target angle is defined as the
number of degrees between start
of tightening and the peak angle. Time
The tool stops at P123 Target
Angle
angle. 5.
If, for some reason, the tool 7.

6.
should exceed P114 Final tq max or 4.
P124 Final angle max, the tool shuts
off and the (NOK) tightening
results are shown.
Time
6. P123 Target angle
7. Acceptance window
The tightening process begins when the trigger is pressed.

For rotate spindle reverse, the “active” direction of the tool socket rotation is the opposite of
the P240 Tool tightening direction. For instance, if “CW” is selected turn the direction ring to
the left position. For safety reasons, it is not possible to loosen the joint with this strategy.
7.6.7 Click wrench

Select the Click wrench function if the Power Focus result data base should include a click wrench or a
non-tightening operation in the work process, such as ocular inspections or the filling of fluid containers.
It is possible to configure four independent click wrench operations. A click wrench Pset consists of a
P107 Click wrench no, P113 Final target only. Each P107 Click wrench no. is associated with one digital input.
Activating the digital input indicates to PF that the specified operation has been performed. Use P113 Final
target to set the torque result level for click wrench operations.
88 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
Resulting torque is the final target set by the Pset.
7.6.8 Home position forward and reverse

The home position function, Torque
suitable for fixtured tools, makes 2.
it possible to mark a socket 7.
position using the Set home 1.
position digital input. When
triggered, the socket rotates (CW
for Home position forward or CCW
for Home position reverse) to the
home position. The digital output
Home position is triggered when Time
the position is reached. The only
Angle
torque values monitored are P114 5.
Final tq max and P112 Final tq min.
The home position function is not 6.
4.
available for open-end tools.
If, for some reason, the tool
should exceed P114 Final tq max or
P124 Final angle max, the tool shuts
off and the (NOK) tightening
results are shown. Time
The tightening process begins when the trigger is pressed.
This strategy is suitable only for tools which are dedicated for fixtured solutions and
full repeatability can not be guaranteed for normal tools.
9836 3123 01 89 (428)

Pset
7.6.9 Yield control (Yield)

Yield control is activated by selecting the P100 Control strategy to Yield. The P101 Tightening strategy can be
set to One stage, Two stage or Quickstep. Yield control interacts in the second stage of the tightening. P105
Zoom step strategy ending is eliminated when yield control is selected.
The settings for Yield are found under Programming+. For more information, see Yield control in section
Programming+.
7.6.10 Yield/Tq con (OR)

Select Yield/Tq con (OR) in P100 Torque
Control strategy.
In addition to the settings for Yield P113 Final target

(see Yield control in section
Programming+) a final target is
set. The tool stops when P113 Final
target is reached if the yield
function has not stopped the tool
before.
Angle
90 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
7.6.11 DS con
The DS con function controls the Torque
torque based on the current
measurement and monitors the
angle. This function is selectable 7.
for two stage tightenings only.
The tool stops when the torque 3.
reaches the P113 Final target value. 1.
If the tool for some reason should 4. 5.

exceed P124 Final angle max, the
tool shuts off and the (NOK)
tightening result is shown.
Angle
3. P113 Final target 5. P124 Final angle max
When programming the DS control strategy it is of greatest importance to have a well-

developed second stage. The fastener/socket should allow some angle rotation in the second
stage of the tightening, or else the torque may overshoot. The best way to determine this is
simply by observing the angle rotation during the second stage.
If the tool overshoots, a red toggling LED is displayed on the tool. The criteria for overshoot are a short
or a non-existing second stage in combination with a high speed in the first stage. On the display event
code E003 Torque measurement possibly invalid is visible.
Torque tuning is performed either from the PF Graph user interface, ToolsTalk PF or automatically with
ACTA 4000. It allows an easy adjustment to the reference system torque values (e.g. ACTA 4000) and
compensates for tool-drive-programming and joint variations. One torque-tuning factor is stored with
each Pset. When a tool is controlled against an external torque reference for calibration, it is
recommended to calculate a new torque tuning value. There is one Torque-tuning factor for each Pset
(when changing Pset settings a new torque tuning factor is needed):
Perform a number of tightenings with the external torque gauge connected, preferably 20 tightenings or
more to achieve a good mean value.
9836 3123 01 91 (428)

Pset
 Calculate the mean value from the tightenings

Final Target
New TorqueTuning Factor   Old TorqueTuning Factor
Measured Mean
 Enter and store the new DS torque tuning factor
 Perform another set of tightenings to control the torque
 If the torque is OK it is possible to run. If not, do the complete procedure over again.
7.6.12 DS con/tq mon

The DS con/tq mon function Torque
controls the torque based on the
current measurement and
monitors the transducer based
torque. It also monitors the angle. 2.
This strategy is selectable for two 3.
stage tightenings only. The tool 1.
stops when the current based
torque reaches the P113 Final target 4. 5.
value.
If the tool for some reason should
exceed P114 Final tq max and P124 Angle
Final angle max, the tool shuts off 1. P112 Final torque min 4. P122 Final angle min
and the (NOK) tightening result is 2. P114 Final torque max 5. P124 Final angle max
shown.
92 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
7.6.13 Snug gradient

The Snug gradient strategy runs
the specified P123 Target angle
from the observed Snug point.
Snug gradient controls the angle 3
and monitors the torque. This u
strategy is selectable for both one
and two stage tightening.
The Snug gradient is the slope 2
calculated by P180 Delta angle and Snug point
P181 Delta torque. The Snug point 2

is defined as the position followed 1
2
by two subsequent slopes larger Angle
4
than the specified Snug gradient.
As soon as two subsequent slopes 1. P110 Cycle start 3. P182 Torque limit
2. P180 Delta angle 4. P123 Target angle
are larger than the Snug gradient
the Snug-point is found.
From this point, the spindle runs
Torque
the specified P123 Target angle.
If the tool should exceed P182
Snug gradient
Torque limit without finding the 3
Snug point, the tool shuts off and
the (NOK) tightening results are 2
shown. Snug point
3
1 2
2
Angle
1. P110 Cycle start 3. P181 Delta torque
2. P180 Delta angle
9836 3123 01 93 (428)

Pset
7.6.14 PVT comp with snug

This tightening strategy is a development of
the existing PVT comp strategy described in
7.8.4. This strategy is useful when the PVT
Snug point
comp torque level is higher than P113 Final P185 compensate value
target. Peak
Average 4
The PVT compensate value is retrieved using
the Snug gradient method described above 7
for finding the snug point and then
5
calculating the torque compensate value P110 6
defined by following parameters. Cycle
2
start
 P183 PVT distance: a
point a defined
3
angle backwards from Snug point
 P184 PVT interval:
an angle interval 1. P186 Delay monitoring after cycle start
1 2. P184 PVT interval
during which the comp value shall be 3. P183 PVT distance
calculated 4. P113 Final target
5. Final target + PVT compensate value
 P185 Compensate value: option 'Peak' or 6. P190 PVT min monitoring limit
7. P191 PVT max monitoring limit
'Average' torque value within the
interval.
P186 Delay monitoring after cycle start: is
a
parameter for filtering out a certain angle in
the beginning of a tightening where
monitoring for a certain 'gradient' is not
interesting. (Useful when the gradient is high
at cycle start etc.).
After finding the snug point and the PVT comp value, the torque defined by P113 Final target is added to
the PVT comp value for reaching a total torque target. The achieved torque and the PVT comp value are
presented as in existing PVT comp strategy (i.e. dependent on C503).
If any of the torque values measured while searching after Snug point are lower than Snug PVT
monitoring min (P190) or higher than Snug PVT monitoring max (P191) the tightening shall stop when
Snug is found.
The presented final angle in the result is measured from the snug point.
94 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
7.7 Tightening strategies

The Power Focus supports a number of different tightening strategies in order to achieve the best quality,
speed and ergonomic behavior. Both standard and proprietary patented strategies are supported. This
section provides a generic description of the tightening strategies available.
9836 3123 01 95 (428)

Pset
7.7.1 One stage

Tightening is performed in One Torque 2.
stage until the P113 Final target
torque has been reached.
1. 6.
Time
3.
4.
1. P110 Cycle start

5. 2. P113 Final target
3. P130 Soft start speed
4. P135 Step 1 ramp
5. P131 Step 1 speed
Tool 6. P115 Cycle complete
speed
7.7.2 Two stage

In a Two stage tightening, the Torque 3.
tool operates at high speed
during the first stage and a lower
2.
speed during the second stage.
The tool stops for about 50
milliseconds between the stages
1.
to reduce joint relaxation and 10.
then accelerates for the second Time
4. 7.
stage. 8. 9.
In this example the strategy ends 5.

1. P110 Cycle start
with a P105 Zoom step, which 2. P111 First target
reduces the risk of overshooting. 3. P113 Final target
6. 4. P130 Soft start speed
5. P135 Step 1 ramp
7. P136 Step 2 ramp
Tool 8. P132 Step 2 speed
speed 9. P105 Zoom step
10. P115 Cycle complete
96 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
7.7.3 Quick step

Quick step is a type of two stages Torque 3.
tightening with high tool speed
during the first stage and a lower
2.
tool speed during the second
stage. The speed changes from
first to second stage speed without
1. 10.
pausing in between.
Time
In this example the strategy ends 4.
8. 9.
with a P105 Zoom step, which
reduces the risk of overshooting. 5.
7. 1. P110 Cycle start
2. P111 First target
6. 4. P130 Soft start speed
5. P135 Step 1 ramp
7. P136 Step 2 ramp
Tool
10. P115 Cycle complete
9836 3123 01 97 (428)

Pset
7.7.4 Ergo ramp

Ergo ramp is a two stage Torque
tightening with a constant 3.
increase of torque during the
2. 4.
second stage. It is set
automatically using the
programmed P137 Ergo ramp value
1.
and the hardness of the joint.
Time
This strategy has the ergonomic
5.
advantage of giving the user the
same reaction torque in the second
step for both soft and hard joints
when using the same Pset.
In this example, the strategy ends 1. P110 Cycle start
2. P111 First target
with a P105 Zoom step, which Hard joint
Soft joint
reduces the risk of overshooting. Tool 4. P137 Ergoramp
7.7.5 Additional control options

Rundown angle
The Rundown angle option monitors the angle at P116 Rundown complete.
If the P104 Rundown angle option From start is selected the rundown phase starts when the tool trigger is
pressed. If P104 Rundown angle option From cycle start is selected the rundown phase starts when the
torque exceeds P110 Cycle start. The acceptance window for the rundown angle is set with the P125
Rundown angle min and P126 Rundown angle max.
Zoom step
The Zoom step option reduces tool speed when the torque approaches P113 Final target. Tool speed is
reduced gradually towards the P138 Zoom step speed, which can be set between 2 and 20 percent of the
maximum speed. Zoom step produces very accurate results, low scatter and quick tightenings.
Combined Zoom step and Ergo ramp

By combining zoom step and ergo ramp, the advantages of both strategies is achieved. Tightenings are
precise and, at the same time, ergonomically correct for the operator.
Zoom step and ergo ramp strategies can be combined for most types of bolted joints.
98 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
7.7.6 Rehit detection

The rehit functionality is designed to detect re-tightenings of an already tightened joint, thereby avoiding
batch counting errors etc. Two parameters have been found to be good indicators of a so-called rehit, tool
speed and tightening angle. If, for two stage torque control tightenings, the tool does not get up to speed
before the first target occurs and the angle of the second stage is not great enough the rehit alarm is
activated.
For two stage torque control tightenings, the speed must reach more than ¼ out of P131 Step 1 speed
between P110 Cycle start and P111 First target or the angle between P111 First target and P113 Final target must
be greater than 120 degrees to avoid a rehit alarm. For one stage tightenings, the speed at P110 Cycle start
and the angle between P110 Cycle start and P113 Final target are used as indicators.
The large angle interval required means that for most normal tightenings it is the speed condition that is
met. Only for very soft joints with a low P111 First target or one stage tightenings is the angle condition met.
For two stage angle control tightenings, the rehit alarm is activated if the tightening is aborted on P114 Final
tq max and the tool speed has not reached ¼ of the P131 Step 1 speed between P110 Cycle start and P111 First
target. For one stage tightenings, the speed at P110 Cycle start is used as indicator.
The rehit functionality is valid for most, but not all, control strategies.
7.8 Programming +
Expand the Programming + branch.
This section has applications for additional Pset functionality.
The Current monitoring includes parameters regarding the motor
current.
PVT selftap includes settings when the joint has a torque peak at the
start of the tightening.
PVT monitoring include settings where the prevailing torque during the
rundown phase is monitored, and PVT compensate settings where it is
included in the calculation for the target torque.
The PVT options can be used together or independently of each other.
The Options window includes settings for tool tightening direction and
some alarm settings, for example.
9836 3123 01 99 (428)

Pset
Gradient monitoring, for monitoring joint hardness.

Yield control,
available for PF 4000, for individual joint control at the
second stage of the tightening.
The Post view torque function makes it possible to monitor torque
values during two specified angular intervals.
7.8.1 Current monitoring

Select Current monitoring and make
suitable parameter settings.
100 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
The spindle torque is Torque

proportional to the motor
2.
current. By measuring motor
current, a method of
measurement that is independent 3.
of the torque transducer is 5.
1.
achieved. The torque forming
current is expressed as a
percentage of the nominal 4.
current at T102 Tool max torque.
With P200 Current monitoring
selected it is possible to set an
acceptance window for the
torque as a redundant process
Time
control.
1. P201 CM min
2. P202 CM max
4. Torque (transducer)
5. Torque (current)
7.8.2 PVT selftap

In the Pset Programming + branch,
select PVT selftap.
When the joint has a torque peak at
the start of the tightening it is
recommended to use the PVT
selftap monitoring option, P210
Selftap, to ensure that the tightening
achieves the right characteristics.
PVT selftap also makes it possible to perform tightenings where the start torque is higher than the P113
Final target or P114 Final tq max.
The selftap interval starts at P110 Cycle start. During the P211 Selftap interval the torque has to reach at
least the P213 Selftap min level but must stay below the P214 Selftap max limit. The P214 Selftap max is
monitored in real time during the selftap interval. The P213 Selftap min value is evaluated against the
selftap interval peak value at the end of the interval.
To reduce the effects of noise, mean values are calculated from P212 Number of selftap windows. A small
number of windows means that more samples are grouped together, hence one odd sample has less
9836 3123 01 101 (428)

Pset
impact on the calculated mean value and vice versa. A high number of windows make the monitoring
more sensitive; a low number filters more noise.
Torque
1. P211 Selftap interval

4. 2. P110 Cycle start
3. P213 Selftap min
4. P214 Selftap max
5.
3.
2.
Angle
1.
Graph illustrating PVT selftap
7.8.3 PVT monitoring

select PVT monitoring.
PVT monitoring is used when the
joint torque has to pass through an
acceptance window prior to P116
Rundown complete in order to pass as
a correct tightening.
102 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
With P220 PVT monitoring selected, an acceptance window for the torque before P116 Rundown complete is
set. The P225 PVT max limit is monitored in real time during the P222 PVT monitor interval. The tool stops
immediately if this limit is exceeded. The P224 PVT min limit is evaluated against the monitor interval
average value at the end of the interval. Monitoring starts at cycle start or after selftap interval.
To reduce the effect of noise, the mean values are calculated from P223 No of PVT windows. A high
number of windows make the monitoring more sensitive; a low number filters more noise.
Torque
1. P221 PVT delay interval

2. P222 PVT monitor interval
3. P224 PVT min limit
4. P225 PVT max limit
6. P110 Cycle start
4.
6.
5. 3.
Angle
1. 2.
Graph illustrating PVT monitoring
9836 3123 01 103 (428)

Pset
7.8.4 PVT compensate

select PVT compensate.
Via the PVT compensate function, PF allows the P111 First target, P113 Final target and P114 Final tq max to
be compensated for the prevailing torque during the rundown phase.
The PVT compensation value is calculated at P116 Rundown complete as an average torque from an
interval preceding the P231 PVT comp point. The PVT compensation value is used as a base reference for
the torque used during tightening, and the torque levels can change dynamically for each new tightening.
When setting P231 PVT comp point larger than the total performed angle at rundown
complete, the tightening will be aborted and the error PVT compensate overflow is
triggered.
As default, the tightening results are presented with the compensation value subtracted, but can be
presented with PVT compensation value added by checking the box C503 Torque with PVT comp.
Torque
1. P116 Rundown complete

2. P231 PVT comp point
3. Compensation value
4. Final torque with compensation value added
5. Final torque
6. First torque with compensation value added 4.
7. First torque
5.
2.
6.
3.
1. 7.
3.
Angle
Graph illustrating PVT compensate
104 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
7.8.5 Options
In the Pset Programming +
branch, select Options.
Make suitable parameter
settings.
See parameter list section Pset
for information on parameters
P241-P247. P240 see below.
Tool rotation direction

There are different variables that control the tool rotation direction: tool direction ring, P240 Tool
tightening direction and P101 Tightening strategy.
Tightening a screw or nut is in accordance with the selected P100 Control strategy. Loosening is equal to
reversing the screw or nut. Loosening speed and ramp can be programmed. Reverse is a control strategy
that loosens the screw or nut a programmed number of degrees. The direction is always the opposite of
the tightening direction.
The position of the tool direction ring at the time the tool trigger is pressed decides the direction of
rotation. If the ring is in the right position, the tool rotates clockwise (CW), and counter clockwise
(CCW) if the ring is in the left position. However, the direction does not change if the direction ring is
moved while the tool is running.
With the parameter P240 Tool tightening direction the default tightening direction of the tool is selected.
This means that the tool tightens the joint clockwise (right-hand threaded joints) if “CW” is selected and
the direction ring is in the right position. Select “CCW” for counter clockwise tightenings.
The direction ring adjusts the rotation direction of the tool socket, while parameter P240
Tool tightening direction decides whether it is a right- or left handed threaded joint.
If different tightening directions are used on the same tool, there is a risk that the
operator will use the wrong direction for a specific screw. This could lead to unexpected
reaction forces in the tool that could be dangerous for the operator.
With regard to reverse angle or rotate spindle reverse, the “active” direction is the opposite from the
P240 Tool tightening direction. For instance, if “CW” is to be selected turn the direction ring to the left
position. For safety reasons, it is not possible to loosen the joint with these strategies.
The remote start input is connected in parallel with the tool trigger and has the same functionality. If
9836 3123 01 105 (428)

Pset
remote start input is used the tool trigger is disabled.

If a digital input is used as start signal input, the direction ring and trigger on the tool are bypassed and
the tool starts tightening in the direction programmed in the parameter P240 Tool tightening direction.
The fieldbus tool start input works in the same way as the tool start from digital input. The 4-pin
connector must be wired correctly.
The 4-pin connector on Power Focus back panel must be wired correctly.
Do not use tool start from digital input via an I/O Expander on a Synchronized tool
group. Use only the four internal digital inputs.
For information on setting of P245 DS torque tuning factor, see section DS con.
7.8.6 Gradient monitoring

In the Pset
Programming +
branch, select
Gradient monitoring
to find additional
parameters for
monitoring joint
hardness.
With P250 Gradient monitoring selected, monitoring starts when P254 Start torque and P255 Angle offset are
reached.
The gradient is defined as the mean torque difference between each interval as defined by the parameter
P253 Joint hardness. A lower value indicates a hard joint and a higher value a soft joint. The calculated
gradient is evaluated against P251 Gradient torque min and P252 Gradient torque max.
106 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
Torque
When this function is activated, a
gradient is calculated for each new
torque and angle sample available.
Tightening is aborted and a gradient
high or low result is displayed if the
4.
gradient exceeds the limits.
4.
3. 3.
1.
2.
Angle
1. P254 Start torque 3. Intervals set as P253 Joint hardness

2. P255 Angle offset 4. Gradient
7.8.7 Yield control

Yield control is activated by selecting the P100 Control strategy to Yield or Yield/Tq con (OR). The P101
Tightening strategy can be set to One stage, Two stage or Quickstep. Yield control starts at P260 Start torque.
In the Pset
Programming +
branch, select
Yield control.
The spindle runs in the chosen direction until the yield point is detected. Search for the yield point starts
when the torque has reached the threshold P260 Start torque. The average torque over the measurement
window P262 Window angle is calculated [1].
[1] Tn  T Mes
TMes : Measured torque value in sample.
NoSamples
The sample frequency in Power Focus is 2 kHz. If the number of samples in the window is too low for a
calculation of a torque average, the tightening is aborted and an event code is displayed. The procedure of
9836 3123 01 107 (428)

Pset
average torque calculation is repeated after Step Angle degrees and the difference between every second
value is calculated (TDIFF in the illustration below):
[2] TDIFF  Tn  Tn2
Each value of difference in torque is compared and the maximal difference (Tmax) is stored. The yield
point is considered reached when a calculated difference in torque is less than Yield slope ratio (expressed
as a percentage) of the current Tmax:
[3] TDIFF  Yield .slope.ratio  Tmax  YIELD
If the parameter P264 Extra angle step is set, then the tightening is continued for the stated angle after the
yield point is reached. The figure below illustrates the steps of the yield control.
Prerequisites and limitations for Yield control;

- Gold or ETX RBU
- PF4000
- Fixtured application, parameter T101 Usage set to fixtured
For the STwrench tool interfacing with the PF, the yield strategy is programmed in a
different way. Only parameter P264 Extra angle step needs to be set together with the
torque target and limits, and the angle limits. Check with your local Atlas Copco
representative how to setup your specific application.
108 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
Torque
7.
6.
3. 5.
2.
4.
4. 3.
2.
3.
4.
2.
3.
4. 2.
3.
2.
1.
3.
Angle
1. P260 Start Torque 5. P264 Extra angle step

2. P261 Step angle 6. P262 Yield slope ratio, example 100%
3. P262 Window angle 7. P262 Yield slope ratio, example 70%
4. Torque difference (TDIFF)
7.8.8 Post view torque

select Post view torque.
9836 3123 01 109 (428)

Pset
Some joints have a torque

peak prior of P116 Rundown Torque
complete. Post view torque
function makes it possible 7.
to monitor torque values
during two specified
angular intervals. The
interval start is defined as 1.
angle prior to P116 Rundown
complete. Torque is then
monitored for a specified 2.
angular interval. Evaluation
(OK/NOK) is done when
rundown complete is
reached.
Angle
Click Store to save the 3. 4.
settings. 6.
5.
1. P281 Post view min torque

2. P284 Post view max torque
3. P283 Post view min monitor interval
4. P286 Post view max monitor interval
5. P282 Post view min monitor start
6. P285 Post view max monitor star
7. P116 Rundown complete
When reviewing a trace in TTPF, for a tightening made using the post view torque strategy, the limits (two
boxes according to P281-P285) are only shown if the trace is in Torque over Angle mode, not in Torque over
time mode.
7.9 Pset setup

Expand the Pset setup branch to access parameters handling
administration, Pset results and comments.
110 (428) 9836 3123 01

Pset
Add a name for the Pset

(optional).
This section also contains
options for View existing Pset,
Create new Pset, Copy Pset and
Delete Pset.
Click Delete Pset result to

select the Pset result to remove
from the Power Focus memory.
When clicking Delete all results
a confirmation window
appears. Select Yes to accept or
No to abort operation.
The Pset specific comments are

shown here.
When parameter C600 is set to
Pset comments, a comment can
be entered each time a Pset is
changed and stored.
The Comment dialog box
appears after a change, when
pressing Store.
9836 3123 01 111 (428)

Pset
7.10 Statistic programming

Expand the Statistic programming branch.
In this branch it is possible to define conditions to be included in the
statistical calculations for the tightenings (Psets).
7.11 Running a Pset

To run (activate) the Pset, select the Pset in the Selection panel or via any configured Pset control source.
This must correspond with the selected source in C200 Pset, see information in section Controller
Configuration and parameter list Configuration.
112 (428) 9836 3123 01

Multistage
8 Multistage
The Multistage feature offers a dynamic link to up to eight Psets in several steps for
performing a sequence of operations.
A typical application scenario such as joint conditioning, where the fastener is run to a torque level of 10
Nm then backed off by 180 degrees and then fastened to a final torque level of 14 Nm. This operation
would be regarded as a three step Multistage. This is performed by the operator when in a hand held
configuration by depressing the trigger in the normal way until the end of the operation, or alternatively
when used in a fixed operation where the start signal is either latched or externally triggered.
When running a Multistage the ring button must always be in the CW direction, even if
the first Pset is in the CCW direction.
The Multistage tightening results and statistics are a combination of all the results from the different Psets
within the Multistage. The default setting is all results from the last Pset in the Multistage.
Individual Pset min and max limits function in all stages and the tool shuts off when a max limit is
exceeded (or for any reason if the min limit is not reached) as per normal operation. The result displayed
is then taken from the stage where the shut off occurred.
See parameter list section Multistage for a description of all available Multistage options.
9836 3123 01 113 (428)

Multistage
8.1 Create new Multistage/Open Multistage

In the PF Map, mark Multistage,
right-click and select Create New
Multistage. Alternatively, double-
click on an existing Multistage to
open the configuration window.
Select New Multistage ID, enter

the New Multistage name
(optional) and click OK to open
the Multistage window.
Click Add to select Psets to be included in the Multistage.

In the left upper window part, make selections for Options, Results and Statistics (mark to activate).
Click Store to save the settings for the Multistage.
The selection of a Multistage (via PC, Selector, Digital input etc.) is handled in the same
way as a Pset.
114 (428) 9836 3123 01

Multistage
The Multistage strategy is not supported

by Power Focus with wireless tools.
9836 3123 01 115 (428)

Controller
9 Job
The Job function is advantageous when an object has bolts or screws that require different
torque and angle values for tightening. A Job is useful when an object needs different
Psets and Multistages. Instead of manually selecting each Pset or Multistage, the Job
functionality keeps Psets and Multistages in a predefined order.
Power Focus allows 50 Psets/Multistages in a Job, and the storage of 99 Jobs (with the
memory setup it is possible to store up to 400 Jobs, see section Memory).
The Job function is RBU-dependent.
A Job is normally pre-programmed (static). A static job is created and stored in the Power Focus or
from ToolsTalk PF. A dynamic job is created externally and sent to PF via Open Protocol for
immediate execution. The lifetime of a dynamic Job is the time for the Job to be executed.
For more information on Open Protocol, see section MID 140 Execute dynamic Job request in the
Power Focus Open Protocol User Guide.
See parameter list section Job for a description of all available Job options.
9.1 Job concepts

The Job function in Power Focus can be defined by two categories, Standalone Job and Cell Job.
Standalone Job is when just one PF is involved in the Job, and Cell Job is a Job in which several PF units
are involved. The Psets/Multistage included in a Job can be selected from a stand-alone PF or from several
PF units in a Cell.
All PF units that perform a Cell Job must belong to the same Job group. A Job group consists of a
maximum of 20 controllers within the same Cell (see section Controller for more information).
A single PF can only belong to one Job group, but it is possible to create several Job groups in the same
Cell.
In a Job group, all included controllers are Job members. One of the Job members acts as a Job reference,
the others act as Job clients (see figure on next page). The Job reference retains a list of all Psets and
Multistages available for all Job members. The Job reference is the main controller and remote controls
the Job clients.
9836 3123 01 117 (428)

Controller
Job example
The figure to the right shows an example of an object
with bolts that require different torque values:
Four bolts that require a torque of: 39 Nm
Three bolts that require a torque of: 70 Nm
One bolt that requires a torque of: 88 Nm
For this example three different Psets have to be
created:
 Pset1: final target 39 Nm
By combining the Psets in the above example, the following Job list is created (see table below).
PF Pset Pset Batch Max cohered NOK
name size
1 1 Pset1 4 3
1 2 Pset2 3 -
1 3 Pset3 1 -
The Job in this example is performed by one single PF. “Batch size” means the number of times the
tightening should be repeated with the same Pset. JOB OK is signaled when all tightenings within the
Job have been performed correctly.
If P153 or M208 Max coherent NOK’s, or P151 or M203 Batch size are used for the Psets or Multistages
included in the Job, these settings are ignored by the Job setting. The same is true for other Job
settings.
If the torque controller is powered off before the completion of the Job,
the Job is lost.
118 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
9.2 Job configuration
9.2.1 Creating a Job group

The PF units in a Job group must be working in the same Cell. Therefore, before creating Job groups a
Cell has to be configured (see section Controller for more information).
After cell configuration, the next step is to create a Job group including Job reference and Job client.
In the PF Map, select Controller > Network.

To define a Job reference, set the parameter C316 Job reference IP address equal to the parameter C300 IP
address of the same controller.
To define a Job client, set the C316 Job reference IP to the C300 IP address of the Job reference controller.
Click Store to save the settings and reboot PF.
Job reference settings Job member

settings
9836 3123 01 119 (428)

Controller
9.2.2 Creating a new Job

With the configuration setup it is possible to store up to 400 Jobs (see section Memory for
more information).
When creating a Cell Job the programming has to be done in the Job reference controller.
Right-click Job in the PF Map

and select Create new Job.
Alternatively, double-click on an
existing Job to open the Job
Every Job has a unique ID
number.
Select New Job ID in the drop list,

give the Job a name (optional)
and click OK to open the Job
window.
The upper part of the Job window shows the available Psets and Multistages and Job list, see J300 Job list
in parameter list section Job for a description.
Select Psets or Multistages and add them to the Job list by clicking on either Manual select or Auto select.
With manual select the Pset is selected by the setting in C200 Pset, with Auto select the Pset is
automatically selected. A precondition for Auto select is that J301 Job type is set to Forced. It is possible
to change between manual and auto select by clicking in the table in the auto select column.
To change Batch size for a Pset/ Multistage, click in the column in the Job list table and enter a value.
To specify Max coherent NOK’s, click in the column in the Job list table and enter a value.
120 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
Auto select is not allowed for free order Jobs, with two or more Psets/Multistages selected
from the same Power Focus.
The batch size defined in Job overrides the batch size defined for a specific Pset/Multistage
(see parameters P150 Batch count and M202 Batch count. It is not recommended to use the
batch count function in Job and Pset/Multistage settings simultaneously.
Continue and make settings for the options in Configuration, Batch,

Timers, Line control, Result and View. See parameter list section Job for a
description of the parameters.
J330 Use line controlmust be set to Yes before the digital inputs and relay
settings for line control can be activated.
9836 3123 01 121 (428)

Controller
9.2.3 Select Job

Power Focus allows two different possibilities for Job selection; C201 Job and C202 Job override. To be
able to select a Job at least one of the two parameters has to be set. The parameters are set from
PF Map>Controller>Configuration>Select source. The system remembers the most recently selected source
until the Job is either completed or aborted. After a Job has been started, it is not possible to select a new
Job until Job done or Job aborted.
has a higher priority than C201 Job. If a Job is selected from C202 Job override, then it
C202 Job override
always terminates a present Job and is selected instead.
If a Job is selected from the select source in C201 Job, then it is only possible to select a new Job from
the same source before the first tightening in the Job has been done (or after the Job has been ended).
During the Job, it is only possible to select a new Job from the select source in C202 Job override.
If a Job is selected from the select source in C202 Job override, it is only possible to select a new Job from
the same source after the selection and during the Job.
If a Job has been 'overridden' it will be aborted before the new Job is selected.
To be able to select/abort a Job from the PF Graph display, C201 Job or C202 Job override
must be set to “PF keyboard”.
A Cell Job can only be selected or aborted from the Job reference.
To be able to select a Cell Job the Job reference needs to communicate with the Job
clients that form the selected Job. Otherwise the Job reference will not start the Job. All
the Job clients detect communication failure with the Job reference and vice versa. If the
Job reference loses communication with a Job client it will try to re-establish the
communication.
122 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
Two cases when the Job reference loses the communication with a Job client during a running Job:
 If the disconnected Job client has tightenings left to perform, the Job reference will abort the running
Job immediately.
 If the disconnected Job client did not have any tightenings left to perform, or had no part in the
running Job, the Job continues.
If a Job client loses communication with its Job reference, the Job client immediately stops running the
Job and locks the tool.
To select the Job from ToolsTalk PF, set

parameter C201 Job to Ethernet/Serial.
Select the Job to

run in the Selection
panel.
If selecting an empty Job, without any Pset/Multistage included, Power Focus will
send a Job OK signal.
9836 3123 01 123 (428)

Controller
In ToolsTalk PF, click on the arrow to the right of the Monitor icon and
select Job Monitor.
Job monitor displays the selected Job and provides a management
function.
For description of Job off, Restart Job, Decrement, Increment, Bypass
and Abort Job, see section Functions in the Job monitor.
9.3 Functions in the Job monitor

Restart Job This function allows the user to restart the running Job without needing to reselect the Job. All batch counters
in the running Job are reset and the Job timer restarts.
Decrement Batch decrement makes it possible to redo the last tightening/increment in a Job. The batch counter of the Pset
or Multistage is decreased by one step. It is not possible to go back one step after the Job has been completed.
The Job batch decrement function is accessible only from the Job reference controller.
Increment Batch increment makes it possible to increment the batch counter value of a Pset/Multistage without
performing a tightening. It is possible to complete a Job by using the batch increment function.
After performing batch increment in a Job, the Job status will be NOK (not OK) when J311 Batch status at
increment/bypass is configured to NOK, If set to OK, the Job status can be OK.
In a Job with free order, only the Job client with the active Pset/Multistage is able to utilize batch increment.
In Jobs with forced order, the Job client with the active Pset/Multistage and the Job reference are able to utilize
batch increment.
124 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
Bypass Bypass skips a specific Pset/Multistage in a running Job, independently of batch size.
The batch counter will be set equal to the batch size value and the Pset will be considered as completed when a
Pset/Multistage is bypassed. The Job status will be OK/NOK depending on the parameter J311 Batch status at
Increment/bypass.
In a Job with free order, only the Job client with the active Pset/Multistage is able to use the bypass function.
In a Job with forced order, the Job client with the active Pset/Multistage and the Job reference are able to use
bypass the function.
Abort Job Abort Job is only accessible via the Job reference controller. Abort can be an external signal as well as an
internal order (see J320 Max time to start Job and J321 Max time to complete Job).
When a Job abort request is received the Job functionality will wait for completion of the ongoing tightening
result before aborting the Job.
Job off This function offers the possibility to turn off the Job function and unlock all involved tools.
Running Job: When selecting Job off for a running Job the tool/tools will always be enabled. The Job reference
will order all Job members to select the latest Pset from the digital input, fieldbus or selector (in case one of
these is C200 Pset) otherwise the latest selected Pset in the Power Focus will remain.
No running Job: The Job reference will unlock the tools of all Job members. The Job reference will also order
Job members to select the latest Pset, which was selected from the digital input, fieldbus or selector (in case
one of these is the C200 Pset). Otherwise the latest selected Pset in the Power Focus will remain.
When a PF is in Job off mode it is possible to perform tightening with any existing Pset or Multistage. As long
as the Job reference is in Job off mode the user cannot select a new Job, the Job off mode must first be
inverted.
The only occasion when the Job off function affects the Job clients is when they have lost communication with
their Job reference. In this case there is the possibility to unlock the Job clients locally by using the Job off
function.
Only the Job reference will remember the Job mode after a
reboot.
Job status Job OK: Received if all Psets/Multistages included in the Job have been correctly performed, alternatively if
(information) batch increment/bypass has been used (presupposed that batch increment/bypass is configured as an OK
event).
Job NOK: Received if any Pset/Multistage included in the Job has not been correctly performed and if J310
Increase batch at tightening is configured OK+NOK. Alternatively it is considered as NOK (Not OK) if batch
increment/bypass has been used (presupposed that Batch Increment/Bypass is configured as an NOK event).
Job aborted: Received if a Job is considered aborted.
9.4 Unlock the tool

Unlock the tool by selecting a new Job, deleting all existing Jobs or select Job off.
It is only possible to unlock the tool from the Job reference.
It is not possible to unlock the tool by rebooting PF.
9836 3123 01 125 (428)

Controller
10 Controller
The Controller section contains configurations common to all tightenings and is unique to each
PF.
See parameter list section Controller for a description of all available Controller options.
10.1 Information
Expand the Controller branch in the PF Map.
Double-click Information.
126 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
This window contains information

about the ToolsTalk PF Software and
the Power Focus Hardware.
9836 3123 01 127 (428)

Controller
10.2 Configuration
In the PF Map Controller branch, double-click on
Configuration.
Make settings for Select source.

Selector: A selector configured on the I/O bus.
Digin: A digital input can be a device on the I/O bus, an
internal digital input, an ST GPIO device or a Logic
configurator.
Ethernet/Serial: ToolsTalk, Open protocol, or a customer specific protocol.

Identifier: A scanner configured. See section Identifier.
Fieldbus and Fieldbus selector: See section Select Pset from fieldbus and set batch size.
PF keyboard: The Pset is selected from directly from the PF Graph (Pset + or -), or Compact (F-buttons).
ST selector: An ST selector attached to the tool configured in Mode 2.
128 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
Make settings for Tightening, Loosening and

Positioning.
The parameter C230 OE positioning type defines

how the open-end position is reached. In all
C230 strategies the tools rotates slowly the first
30° to detect that the tool is not in contact with
the nut. Thereafter the tool rotates faster; the tool
is stopped if the P171 Limit value is exceeded.
The C230 parameter can be set to:
Forward - The tool rotates forward to open end
position
Reverse - The tool rotates reverse to open end
position
For these two options, if the P171 Limit value is
exceeded, the event E122 Open end positioning
failure is triggered.
To avoid that a nut is incorrectly loosened when the Forward / Reverse strategy is used,
set P171 Limit as low as possible as long as the inner friction in the tool is exceeded.
Reverse Torque Based - Open end position is

found via a slow reverse rotation. However, if
the P171 Limit value is exceeded before the
open end position is found, the home position
relay is set, but the event E122 Open end
positioning failure is not triggered.
9836 3123 01 129 (428)

Controller
Make settings for Batch and

Startup.
Click Set under Date and Time to

store computer and user time to
PF.
Note!
If using Toolsnet, Toolsnet will
act as the Date and Time master
synchronizing the time in the PF
to the time in Toolsnet.
Click Events to configure which

events to log and show.
Click Store to save settings.
10.3 Network
Power Focus uses both Ethernet and serial communication, and works together with ToolsTalk PF and
database applications such as ToolsNet, etc.
The Cell and Net concept allows all PF units on an assembly station to communicate and work together.
See also sections Cell and Net, Job and Sync.
130 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
In the PF Map Controller branch, double-click on Network.
Make settings for Ethernet and Cell.
9836 3123 01 131 (428)

Controller
If used, activate and setup Multicast.
Make settings for Open Protocol, Tools

Talk and the Acta port.
If used, activate and setup ToolsNet.

10.3.1 Cell and Net configuration

The Power Focus software offers extended networking possibilities. The Cell and Net concepts are part
of the RBU Gold and RBU Silver types.
Ethernet TCP/IP networking makes it simple to program and overview all PF units in the network from
a PC with ToolsTalk PF software installed. All data traffic from Power Focus could also be collected
and compiled by ToolsNet.
Via the Cell concept, it is possible to arrange all PF units at an assembly station in a group, giving extra
functionality to the work station. The Net concept enables functionality to group all cells on the
assembly line into one net.
The figure below illustrates a cell consisting of four PF Graph controllers and a switch.
132 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
A cell consists of one Cell reference, a maximum of 19 Cell members, thus a total of 20 PF units. Cells
can then be grouped into Nets; the maximum number of cells in a net is 1000. Each net has a Net
reference. One PF can function as both Cell reference and Net reference.
Every cell has a Cell identification number (Cell ID) unique to the network. Within a cell, every PF has
its own unique channel identification number (Channel ID). With the PF Graph, the user can browse
through the different channels and program and view the result from any other controller in the same
cell.
The Cell reference and Cell members can be configured through a PF Graph user interface or ToolsTalk
PF.
All PF units in a Cell must have the same software version and the same RBU-type
installed.
When configuring a remote PF, make sure it is not in use by anyone else. Otherwise it
might lead to the damaging of the tool or a joint. It might also lead to personal injury.
The RBU Gold also enables Sync functionality (see section Sync) and running Cell Jobs (see section
Job).
The figure below illustrates an example of a factory network configuration, a Net with three Cells. Each
Cell has a Cell reference and three Cell members. One Cell reference also functions as the Net
reference.
9836 3123 01 133 (428)

Controller
Net with three Cells
1. Cell
2. ToolsNet
3. ToolsTalk
4. Router
5. Switch
6. Cell master
7. Net master
Network setup
To set up a network, PF must have an IP-address. See section Connecting a PF.
134 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
Open PF Map>Controller>Network.
Set the C300 IP address, C301 Subnet mask and C302
Default router.
Set the C312 Cell reference IP to the IP address of the

Cell reference.
Set the C315 Net reference IP to the IP address of the
Net reference.
To define a Cell reference or Net

reference, set the Cell reference IP /Net
reference IP the same as its own IP
address.
Set C310 Channel ID to a number unique within the

Cell (1-20).
C311 Channel name is optional.
Set C313 Cell ID number to a number unique within the network (1-1000). Only available when the controller
is the Cell reference.
C314 Cell name is optional. Click Store to save the settings.
After all the settings have been made, restart all Power Focus units.
Power Focus connection

When connecting to a controller, Cell reference or Net reference make sure that the following settings are
correct.
On the Menu list, open Option>Settings.
Set the Controller IP address of the Power Focus to connect.
Under Ethernet setup, check whether the connected Power Focus is a controller, Cell reference or a Net
reference.
To connect PF, Cell reference or Net reference, click the Connect symbol.
When a Cell reference or Net reference is connected, clicking the corresponding line in the PF Map
expands the Cell tree or Net tree.
9836 3123 01 135 (428)

Controller
If the C315 Net reference IP address has not been entered in a PF

when adding it to the network, the added PF will be shown as a
controller in the PF Map list of the Netmaster anyhow.
10.4 COM ports

In the PF Map Controller branch, double-click on COM
ports.
Make settings for Serial 1 and Serial 2.

136 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
10.5 Display
In the PF Map Controller branch, double-click on Display
to make settings for the controller display.
9836 3123 01 137 (428)

Controller
Make settings for Presentation, Result

view, Keyboard and Power save.
Note that there are more selections

available on the controller display.
See parameter list section Display.
Make settings for screen colors:

Color theme
Background color for OK result
Foreground (text) color for OK result
Background color for NOK result
Foreground (text) color for NOK
result
10.6 Memory
All data stored in PF, except parameters C300 IP address, C301 Subnet mask and C302 Default
router, will be erased when changing memory setup. Therefore, use the ToolsTalk PF function
“Store PF to file” to save the existing data configuration (including Psets, Multistages, and
Jobs). The data can later be retrieved via function “Read PF from file”.
When changing the memory setup PF must be rebooted for the changes to take effect. It is
necessary to “Read PF from file” twice and reboot PF one extra time.
It is recommended to reboot immediately.
Configurable memory is only available for RBU Gold and RBU Silver.
138 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
Besides the 'default configuration' and 'totally configurable' (which gives the
possibility to manually configure the Power Focus memory freely), Power Focus provides seven
more configurable memory options; More Psets, More Jobs, More Results, More Events, More Identifiers,
QDAS, and Pset comments.
Selection Psets Jobs Results Events Identifiers Statistical Identifier Traces

events result parts
Default configuration 250 99 5000 100 100 100 1 8
More Psets 300 100 4000 100 100 100 1 8
More Jobs 100 400 4000 100 100 100 1 8
More results 100 100 6000 100 100 100 1 8
More events 200 100 5000 500 100 100 1 8
More identifiers 200 100 5000 100 400 100 1 8
Totally configurable 1-600 1-700 1-9000 1-800 400 1-500 1-4 1-100
QDAS 250 99 4000 100 100 100 1 8
Pset comments 200 100 5000 100 100 100 1 8
Number of identifiers is the maximum number of significant identifier strings available for identifier Type 1
(Identifier Type 1 is used to trigger Psets, Multistages or Jobs). Number of identifier result parts is the
amount of Identifier strings to be stored together with the tightening result. For more information, see
section Identifier.
When increasing database elements, a decreasing of other elements might be necessary. For instance, if
6000 results are required it is not possible to have more than 100 Psets (option more results).
Memory setup
Store existing data, see Store PF to file, including Psets, Multistages, and Jobs before changing the
memory setup. The data can later be retrieved, see Read PF from file.
9836 3123 01 139 (428)

Controller
In the PF Map, select Controller>Memory.

Make a selection for C600 Type. To manually configure the
memory, select Totally configurable.
Click OK to continue.
Select number of Psets, Jobs, Results,

Identifier result parts, Events, Statistical
events and Traces.
Indicator estimated memory

usage is automatically updated
in percent (a maximum of 100
percent is allowed).
Ensure that all data is stored before saving the settings.
When changing the memory setup, PF must be rebooted for the changes to take effect. It is
recommended to reboot immediately.
After reboot, make a restore of the previous settings through function Read PF from file, see section Read
PF from file.
140 (428) 9836 3123 01

Controller
Memory reset
Store important data, see Store PF to file, including Psets, Multistages, and Jobs before resetting the
memory. The data can later be retrieved, see Read PF from file.
In the PF Map, select

Controller>Memory.
To reset the memory or parts

thereof, click the corresponding
button.
10.7 Accessibility
In the PF Map Controller branch, double-click on
Accessibility.
9836 3123 01 141 (428)

Controller
Make settings for Password.

Passwords should have between 1 and 8 characters (letters
or numbers) and are case sensitive. There are separate
passwords for communication and setup parameters. An
identical password can be set for both. In this case only
one password will be prompted in TTPF, but still both in
PF graph. The password handling is configured with the
two parameters C800 Use and C801 Entry. Change to
C800 resets unused passwords. There is no prompting for
empty passwords, both in PF graph and TTPF. When
password Use is activated (other than: 'No') and Entry
scope is set to Tools Talk, access to all parameters from
PF keyboard is restricted even with empty passwords.
When uploading/downloading PF
configuration to/from a file, password strings
will not be stored and restored. Software
update performed by Software Loader will
clear passwords in the unit but not C800 and
C801.
PF Compact units have access to password

protected parameters only via TTPF, due to
simplified keyboard functionality.
FieldBus configuration is accessible only from

TTPF and is not protected by any type of
password.
Total memory reset defaults all password

settings.
142 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
11 Tool
The Tool section contains information for Tensor tools connected to Power Focus. The
information available through PF includes for example general tool information and service
status, as well as hardware- and software configuration.
See parameter list section Tool for a description of all available Tool options. See tool
specific information for more information about the options for each tool.
The tool parameters are visible depending on which tool is connected. For STB, most parameters are
invisible when the tool is offline.
11.1 Tool information

Expand the Tool branch in the PF Map.
Double-click on Information.
9836 3123 01 143 (428)

Tool
The Model and Motor sections contain

information about the Tensor tool
connected to PF.
The Software section contains information

about the application- and boot-code
version for the tool.
144 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
11.2 Tool configuration

In the PF Map Tool branch, double-click on
Configuration.
The following submenus are available:
11.2.1 Tool start and Accessory bus

Make settings for Tool
start and Accessory
bus.
The main purpose of

T200 Tool start select
source option “Safety
trigger” is to ensure
that both hands are
placed on the tool
while it is running, and
that the tool stops as
soon as one hand is
released.
The safety trigger is suitable for applications where a high level of safety is desired.
The safety trigger function requires the start trigger and safety trigger buttons to be pushed
simultaneously in order to start the tool. The second button must be pushed within 0.5 seconds from
pushing the first button, the order is arbitrary. If the safety trigger button or the start trigger is released
9836 3123 01 145 (428)

Tool
while the tool is running, the tool stops immediately.

Once the tool has been started, the safety trigger function requires both buttons to be released before the
tool can be started again.
A safety trigger button is mounted on the ST tool and connected to GPIO 4. The parameter is only
accessible when GPIO 4 is set to “Off”.
The main purpose of the T201 Timer enable tool function is to prevent unintentional starting of the tool. It
is immune to tape, i.e., it is not possible to override the function by putting tape on the “enable button”.
The timer enable tool is suitable for applications where a reasonable level of safety is required and
applications where both hands cannot remain on the tool during tightening (one hand must be used to
hold the working piece during tightening etc.).
When the T201 Timer enable tool is activated, the tool is disabled by default. In order to enable the tool, the
user must enable the tool using the digital input function Timer enable tool.
Once enabled, the tool will remain enabled for the configured period of time (timer enable tool time). As
soon as the time period expires, the tool will be disabled again.
If the tool is started during the period it is enabled, it remains enabled while it is being run. When the
tool is stopped, it remains enabled for an additional period of time (according to release and
configuration). This behavior is comparable to key lock functionality on cellular phones; once unlocked,
the keys are locked when a given period of time has passed since the last key press.
The “Timer enable tool” function was previously called “safety trigger”.
Digital input Timer enable tool must be changed from status “low” to “high” in order to
enable the tool (the tool will not remain enabled when the time period has expired, even if
input to the digital input Timer enable tool remains high ).
With T203 Direction alert and T204 Alert type parameters, a sound or an indicator can be configured to notify
the operator of the direction of the tool.
Parameter T210 Mode defines the function of the Tool accessory bus.
146 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
11.2.2 Sound and buzzer

In the Sound window, the settings include the type of sound and the event that should trigger the sound.
Make settings for Sound.

Enable/disable sound and adjust the volume.
Two types of sound files can be stored in the Power Focus memory, buzzer and sound (stream) waves. A
Buzzer wave is a frequency-based sound generated by the tool. The buzzer wave can be programmed by
the user (as default one buzzer is included in Power Focus). A Sound (stream) wave is a pre-programmed
“wav file” that can be downloaded from disk (hard drive/ file). It is possible to use a microphone to
record wav files and download them to Power Focus.
To select an existing buzzer wave, select an ID number from the drop down menu (as default one buzzer
wave is included).
To create a new buzzer wave, click Add buzzer. It is possible to store up to 10 buzzer waves in Power
Focus.
9836 3123 01 147 (428)

Tool
The BuzzerWave window appears.

Give the Buzzer wave an E100 Name
(recommended).
Select E101 Frequency, E102 Time On, E103 Time
Off, E104 Repetition and E105 Volume.
The volume is a relative (in percent) of parameter

T221 Volume, which could be set to high, medium
or low. T221 Volume can be found in the sound
setup window.
After every change in setup, click Store to save
settings into the tool memory.
Click Play sound to listen to the buzzer sound in the tool (if not working, try to click Store).
Click Delete buzzer wave to remove the selected buzzer. Click Store to save settings.
To create a sound (stream) wave, select Add sound in the Sound window. To select an existing Sound
wave, select an ID number from the drop down menu.
It is possible to store up to 10 stream waves in Power Focus.
The Create new sound window appears.

Select a New sound ID and type new sound name (recommended). Click OK.
The Wave window appears.

Click Open wave file and search for the wave
file to use on disk (hard drive/file).
The wav file can use up to 8 bits and

a frequency of up to 8000 Hz. It
provides only mono playing and has
an interval of maximum 3 seconds.
Click Play sound to listen to a sound file. The

sound is played in the tool.
Click Delete sound to remove a sound file.
Click Store to save settings. Close window.
148 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
To connect a
configured buzzer or
sound to an event,
click Add in the Sound
window.
Select a digital output
(relay) in the Event
list.
Select a sound or buzzer wave (created earlier) in the Sound Type list to connect to the event.
Select a priority from the Sound Prio list connected to the specific sound event.
The Sound Prio setting controls which sound event that has the advantage in the case
of a collision between more than one sound file during tool operations.
Click Remove to remove an event from the list.

Click Store to save changes in the Window.
11.2.3 Tool function buttons

Make settings for Function buttons.
The T230 – T235 function button settings are
available for ST and SL tools. There are three
possible user interaction types for this button;
single push, double-push and pressed. (For
available relay functions, see section Digital
I/O and fieldbus items.)
The parameter T236 Push detection interval states
the maximum time (in milliseconds) between
the button pressed and the button being
released, for push to be detected. Parameter
T237 Next push interval states the maximum time
(in milliseconds) between the button being
released after the first push and the button
pressed again, to detect double pushed.
9836 3123 01 149 (428)

Tool
Single push
Timeout
Buttonpressed
Buttonreleased
Time
Pushdetectioninterval
Nextpushinterval
Single push - the button is pressed down and released before the T236 Push detection interval expires. The
T237 Next push interval expires before the button is pressed again.
Doublepush
Buttonpressed
Buttonpressed
Buttonreleased Buttonreleased
Time
Pushdetectioninterval Pushdetectioninterval
Nextpushinterval
Double push - the button is pressed down and released before the T236 Push detection interval expires.
Then the button is pressed down before the T237 Next push interval expires and is released before the T236
Push detection interval expires.
Pressed Released
Timeout
Buttonpressed
Buttonreleased
Time
Pushdetectioninterval
Pressed - the button is pressed down and is kept down for a longer time than the T236 Push detection
interval. When the Push detection interval expires, the button function is considered to be pressed until it is
released. Notice that if no function is configured for single push or double push in the current tool
direction, the Push detection interval is ignored and the button function is considered to be pressed as soon
as it is pressed down.
It is possible to configure a digital input function, similar to the digital inputs on PF, for each user
interaction type and tool direction. Tool direction is shown by the direction ring on ST tools and by the
direction LED on SL tools.
150 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
From the digital input functions point of view, single push and double push user interaction types do
generate pulses. This means that they do not have duration where input to the digital input function
remains high. Single push and Double push user interaction types are therefore not suitable for digital
input functions that are intended to “follow” the status of the button. The pressed user interaction type
provides duration; i.e. input to the digital input function remains high as long as the function button is
pressed and goes low when it is released. It can therefore be used with digital input functions intended to
follow the button status.
Feedback is provided to the user to indicate which user interaction type was detected. If a Single push is
detected, the tool LED’s flash once and if a Double push is detected, the tool LED’s flash twice.
Feedback is only given when there is a function configured for the currently performed user interaction
type and current direction. For example, if a Double push is performed while operating in CCW mode,
but T235 CCW double push is set to ”Off”, no response is given.
For SL tools, the function button normally is configured to change tool direction in some way (“toggle
CW/CCW”, “toggle CW/CCW for next run” and “set CCW”).
11.2.4 Blue LED

Make settings for Blue LED (if applicable). The Blue LED indicates when a predefined event occurs. The
events are relays connected from Power Focus to the tool.
To configure the T240 Events click Add and select type of Event, Duration and Time (if applicable).
9836 3123 01 151 (428)

Tool
11.2.5 Tool illuminator and lights

Make settings for Illuminator and Lights.
The illuminator, which is a group of LEDs in the
front of SL and ST pistol tools, provides light for
the operator during tool operations.
The parameter T250 Illuminator mode can be set to:
 Off - illuminator is constantly off.
 On - illuminator is constantly on.
 Tracking event - illuminator follows status of
specified T251 On event.
 Event controlled - illuminator is turned on when
specified T251 On event occurs and is turned off
when specified T252 Off event occurs. If T252 Off
event is set to ”Off”, the expiration of T253 On
time turns off the illuminator.
The parameters T251 On event, T252 Off event and T253 On time are related to the input from T250
Illuminator mode.
T253 On time sets the maximum time for the illuminator to remain on since the last occurrence of T251
On event, if T250 Illuminator mode is set to Tracking event or Event controlled.
The parameter T260 Control type is used to define the control source for the Tool LED light. The T260
parameter can be set to:
 PF-controlled 1 - Light is controlled via specified limits for torque and/or angle
 PF-controlled 2 - Customer specific option
 PF-controlled 3 - Tool LED’s used to acknowledge Event Code Tightening NOK / Tightening OK
 Light off - Tool LED’s functionality disabled.
The parameters T261 Use ON time and T262 ON time is used to specify that the tool LED's should light
for a specified period of time (on) or continuously (off) after a tightening.
T263 Indicator, used to show selected Pset (Pset 1-8) on the tool LED's. Applicable only if an ST tool is
connected.
152 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
11.2.6 Radio and Connection

Make settings for
Radio and
Connection.
Some of the settings

are explained in
detail below. All of
the tool configuration
parameters are listed
in tool parameter
section
Configuration.
The radio section is accessible when Primary tool is other than Cable.
IRC turns off after this time, if tool is inactive. To reconnect, press trigger once
T270 Power save timeout:
and Blue LED on tool lights up after approximately 10 seconds.
T271 Start condition: The
start condition if using IRC connection for tool. None: Up to 20 tightenings can
be performed if IRC connection is lost (Blue LED off). Connected: IRC connection must be established
(Blue LED on) to run tool. Start request: IRC connection must be established (Blue LED on) and link
time out must not have started.
T272 Link timeout: If the tool loses IRC connection it is considered offline and the connection LED (blue)
on the tool turns off after the link timeout time.
T277 Torque and angle trace: Switch on/off tracing of torque and angle. (Up to 10 traces can be stored in
the tool if connection is lost.)
T290 Primary tool. Note that PF needs to be restarted after changing primary tool setting. Click Store to
save settings.
9836 3123 01 153 (428)

Tool
11.3 Tool diagnostic

In the PF Map Tool branch, double-click on Diagnostic.
Click Sensor tracking to introduce torque

and angle readings in real time.
Click Peripherals to diagnose tool LED's
and buttons.
Temperature parameters are for

information only.
Click Active response time under Radio to

diagnose the wireless connection.
154 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
11.3.1 Sensor tracking
To monitor Torque/Angle readings from the

tool press Start. To set reference point for Angle
value during monitoring press Reset.
For S, DS tools it is even possible to read value

of the transducer offset shown in percentage of
the nominal torque range.
For other tool families this parameter is not

accessible (always set to 0.00%).
11.3.1 Transducer calibration
When tool is triggered, a check of transducer and transducer electronics is carried out. Results
(offset and gain) are sensitive to temperature, material wear and even proper handling of tool
during calibration. Don’t manually rotate gear when tool is triggered to obtain most accurate
transducer readings. If program discovers offset or gain values being out of correction limits or
that these parameters have changed too much since last calibration, the corresponding event
(E544) will be displayed and rundown will be aborted. Following table shows these limits for
different type of tools.
As long offset and gain change is not caused by fast, manual rotation of the gear during
triggering of the tool, even relatively big offset and gain changes are completely
compensated in the system, not having influence on specified measurement accuracy.
Tool family Event

Parameter
S,ETX ST SL21 STP1 STP2 ST2 STB if failed
Offset range (% nominal torque) 36% 16% 16% 16% 16% 16% 28% E537
Offset change (+-% nominal torque) 4% 2% 2% 2% 2% 2% 7% E539
Gain* range (% nominal gain) 23% 21% 21% 51% 34% 42% - E538
Gain* change (+-% nominal gain) 10% 3% 4% 4% 3% 3% - E540
Nominal torque 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
Nominal gain* (% nominal tq) 114% 126% 125% 99% 148% 151% -
9836 3123 01 155 (428)

Tool
* There are different definitions of gain (shunt calibration) parameter for each tool depending on
HW/SW solution implemented. STB uses no shunt calibration.
156 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
11.4 Tool maintenance

In the PF Map Tool branch, double-click on Maintenance.
The following submenus

are available:
9836 3123 01 157 (428)

Tool
11.4.1 Calibration and Service

Make settings for
Calibrations and Service.
Click Store to save the

settings.
11.4.2 Open-end tuning

Before using an open-end tool, make sure that the tool head and tool body have been assembled and
configured correctly. If not, the tool can run in the wrong direction and the mechanical stop in the open-
end head may be damaged.
If performing an OK tightening (green tool LED’s are on) with C230 OE forward positioning set to “No”
and pressing the tool trigger button, then the LED’s turn OFF and ON again. This behavior can only be
seen on S and DS tools (not on ST and SL tools) and is normal.
The “Reverse angle” and “Rotate spindle forward/reverse” strategies are not applicable for open-end
tools.
It is not possible to use open-end tools in a Multistage configuration.
158 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
For S, ST and DS tools, use

parameter T420 Use open end to
activate the open-end
functionality.
For SL and STB tools it is not
possible to change the open-end
parameters in Tools Talk or
Graph. Use Tools Talk Service
to modify open-end settings.
T421 Inverted motor rotation should be checked if an open-end head is used which changes the rotation
direction of the spindle.
If the T421 Inverted motor rotation is set in the wrong way the tool may not operate in a
correct manner and the mechanical stop may be damaged if a tightening is done.
Set T422 Tightening direction to the direction that fits the application and open-end head. “CW” is selected
for right hand threaded fasteners and “CCW” for left hand threaded. This setting is valid for all
programmed Psets.
Parameter P240 Tool tightening direction has no effect when running an open-end tool.
When finished with parameter settings, press Store.
Click open-end tune key in the open-

end parameters section.
Make sure the open-end head can rotate
freely and press the tool trigger.
Open-end tuning measures the gear
ratio and gear play and stores it to the
tool memory.
The old T103 Gear ratio value

will be overwritten.
A confirmation message is displayed if open-end tuning succeeded.
9836 3123 01 159 (428)

Tool
11.4.3 Wear indicator

Wear indicator provides a
mechanism to inform tool users
with an event code when it is
time for tool service. It is also
possible to configure a
controller to lock the tool with
parameter T416 Lock tool on
alarm.
The amount of wear before an alarm is issued is set in T433 Alarm factor.
If wear indicator is on it will be reset to initial state after a tool service when a Service
counter reset is performed.
11.4.4 ACTA
The ACTA section contains a tool calibration
session.
The calibration does not work with

Tensor DS tools.
A tool calibration session is started by connecting

the ACTA 4000 to the Power Focus and fitting the
QRTT device to the spindle. One Multistage with
three Psets is used when the calibration is run, one
torque tightening (for torque calibration) and two
different spindle rotations (for loosening and angle
calibration) Psets.
160 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
Click Create QRTT to create the Psets and

Multistages needed. The target torque and
angle is then set by the ACTA 4000 before
the start of each calibration.
The tool calibration is started by a command
from the ACTA 4000 or by pressing the tool
trigger depending on if the tool is configured
for remote start or not. The result of a
calibration is displayed as a normal
tightening. When a calibration batch is
completed, event code E710 ACTA/QRTT
calibration is displayed and stored in the event
log of the Power Focus.
It is necessary for the Power Focus to have enough memory space available to store the Multistages and
Psets needed. If the calibration shows an unsatisfactory result the operator is assumed to take the
appropriate action. No calibration value (calibration- or normalization value etc.) is changed
automatically.
11.4.5 Motor tuning

Motor tuning adjusts the tool and motor control unit. Sync motor tuning feature is only available from the
Sync reference of a configured Sync group with between two and ten Sync members. The Sync motor
tuning process starts simultaneously for all Sync members when pressing the tool trigger of the Sync
reference. For information about the Sync functionality, see section Sync.
It is important that no torque is applied to the socket of the tool when it is subject to any
kind of motor tuning. Make sure that the socket is able to rotate freely.
9836 3123 01 161 (428)

Tool
Standalone motor tuning

Click Perform motor tuning.
Press Tool trigger and keep it pushed

during the motor tuning process (the
status is displayed).
Release Tool trigger or click Abort to
cancel.
When finished the result of the motor
tuning is displayed.
Sync motor tuning

Click Sync motor tuning.
Push Tool trigger and keep
it pushed during the motor
tuning process.
Release Tool trigger or
click Abort to cancel.
Accessing Sync motor tuning is only allowed on a Sync reference.
Channel ID and motor tuning status for Sync reference and all Sync members are displayed.
When finished, the result of the motor tuning is displayed.
11.4.6 Disconnect tool

Click Disconnect tool and click
OK to logically disconnect the
tool.
162 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
Do not disconnect a tool during

tightening, loosening, positioning, motor
tuning, open-end tuning or tracking.
Logical disconnection is not necessary for
ST and SL tools (this tool types allows hot
swap functionality).
If the operation succeeded, the green OK LED flashes continuously (on the Power Focus) and the
message “Command accepted” is displayed. Click OK to continue.
If disconnection of the tool was not allowed, the red NOK LED flashes continuously for 3 seconds and
the text “Operation failed” is displayed. Click OK to continue.
When a tool is connected again, E131 Tool disconnected is displayed and then acknowledged automatically.
In order to be able to use digital I/O to disconnect the tool, one digital input must be configured as
Disconnect tool and optionally one relay can be configured as Safe to disconnect tool.
Once configured, proceed as following to logically disconnect the tool using digital I/O:
 Set voltage level on the digital input (configured as Disconnect tool) to high in order to logically
disconnect the tool
 If the operation succeeded, the relay configured as Safe to disconnect tool switches and the green OK
LED (on PF) will flash continuously. If disconnection of the tool was not allowed, the relay
configured as Safe to disconnect tool does not switch and the red NOK LED flashes continuously for 3
seconds
 Disconnect the tool
 When a tool is inserted again, E131 Tool disconnected is displayed and then acknowledged
automatically
Do not physically disconnect an S or DS tool, unless it has first been successfully logically
disconnected. This can damage the tool memory. If the user physically disconnects a non-
ST tool, without a successfully logically disconnection, PF has to be rebooted before
connecting the tool again.
9836 3123 01 163 (428)

Tool
11.4.7 Hot swap

It is possible to replace an individual tool with another tool, just by disconnecting the tool from the tool
cable and attach the new tool. Hot swap is only available for S and ST type tools.
When hot swapping a tool, the new tool must be of the same type to ensure that all
parameter settings in the Power Focus will be interpreted correctly.
Even if all settings are accepted by a new tool of another tool type, some parameters can cause the new
tool to behave differently than the original tool.
An example is the speed setting parameters (P130-P138). If P139 is set to "Percent", these parameters are
stored in the PF database as percentage of max tool speed for the particular tool type, the value for the new
tool type might differ from the original tool type. On the other side using absolute speed values (P139 set
to "RPM") can generate strategy configuration errors for slower than swapped tools.
11.5 Tool lock functionality

The tool can be locked either by an internal state that does not allow the tool to be used, or intentionally by
configurable functions in the Power Focus or by external sources.
11.5.1 Locking of tools from an external source in time critical

applications
When production is arranged into line assembly, the tightening process is often planned in great detail. To
assure that tightenings are performed on the correct joints, the user might wish to disable the tool in
between operations on the same vehicle within a work station. In addition, there can be a timing
requirement, meaning that the tightenings have to be made within a certain time period.
If in these cases an external source (for example fieldbus) is used to disable and enable the tools, it is
important to thoroughly analyze the risks. Otherwise reduced productivity or bad ergonomics can be the
result.
There is a small delay between the moments when the triggering event occurs, for example a ready signal
from a positioning system, and when the tool is actually enabled or disabled. During a delay, the operator
can unintentionally disturb the counting in the process by pressing the trigger several times.
Therefore, the use of external sources for regularly locking and unlocking the tool in time critical
applications is not recommended. In order to enable and disable the tool quickly enough in these cases,
only Power Focus internal sources should be applied (only 1-2 ms reaction time).
In time critical applications, the following general strategy could be used:
164 (428) 9836 3123 01

Tool
 For enabling the tool, use the external source for selecting the Pset in Power Focus when the conditions
for “start tightening” are fulfilled
 For disabling the tool, use functions P152 Lock at batch ok or J302 Lock at Job done, which are internal
tool locking sources within Power Focus
11.5.2 Intentional locking of tools

By locking and unlocking the tool in certain situations, it is possible to prevent unintended usage of it. In
this way it is possible to avoid some of the mistakes that could normally be made during assembly.
11.5.3 Definition of a locked tool

When the tool is locked, one or several services are disabled. Services are normally tightening and
loosening, but do in some cases include positioning, motor tuning, open-end tuning and tracking.
11.5.4 Tool locking event codes

In case the tool is locked while a user attempts to start a service (normally tightening or loosening), the
Power Focus shows an event code to explain why or by which functionality the tool is locked. In case the
tool is locked while a service is being performed, the service is aborted and an event code explaining why,
or by which function, the tool was locked is displayed.
For more information, see section Event codes.
Combinations and tool locking

Different conditions, functions and external sources may simultaneously cause the tool to be locked.
For example, the tool can be locked both by the digital input function Disable tool n o and by the “Lock on
reject” function. For the tool to be unlocked, the digital input Disable tool n o must be altered and the “Lock
on reject” lock must be unlocked using the digital inputs Unlock tool / Master unlock tool or the CW/CCW
ring (depending on configuration).
When event codes are generated while the tool is locked for multiple reasons, only one of the possible
event codes is generated. It is not specified which of the possible event code messages that will be
generated.
9836 3123 01 165 (428)

Accessories
12 Accessories
In the Accessories branch, the digital inputs and outputs of PF are configured and diagnosed.
The branch also includes information about the devices connected to the I/O bus and tool bus,
and how to configure these devices.
See parameter list section Accessories for a description of all available Accessories
options.
12.1 Digital I/O

Power Focus has extensive I/O capabilities. Apart from the
internal I/O ports it is also possible to connect up to 15
external I/O devices to the Power Focus I/O bus, such as a
Pset selector, I/O Expander or Stacklight.
In the PF Map, open Accessories>Digital I/O and double-click

Configuration, or right-click Configuration and select Open I/O
set.
9836 3123 01 167 (428)

Accessories
The I/O set dialog box appears.

Select Device type.
Select Digital inputs and Relays (with relay timer). For more information, see section Digital I/O and
fieldbus items.
Note that J330 Use line control must be set to Yes before the digital inputs and relay settings for line
control can be activated.
168 (428) 9836 3123 01

Accessories
In the PF Map, open Accessories>Digital I/O and double-click

Diagnostic, or right-click Diagnostic and select Open I/O
Diagnostic.
The I/O Diagnostic window appears.

Here the status of all internal and external I/O devices can be viewed.
It is possible to set the status of relays. All configured I/O devices appear on the list of available devices.
This function enables testing of the interaction between PF and different external devices. For instance, it
could be useful when trouble shooting complex systems with one or several PLC units connected to the
controller.
The Read key shows the status of the selected I/O device. The read status key has to be clicked in order
to update this view to reflect changes.
Output test function activates and de-activates relays on a selected I/O device when Set is clicked.
The Restore key restores the relays to reflect the current status of the PF. Click Read to update this view
to reflect changes triggered by other events.
9836 3123 01 169 (428)

Accessories
12.2 I/O bus

Power Focus has extensive I/O capabilities. Apart from the
internal I/O ports it is also possible to connect up to 15
external I/O devices to the Power Focus I/O bus.
In the PF Map, open Accessories>I/O bus and double-click

Information.
170 (428) 9836 3123 01

Accessories
Information for each device on the I/O bus is displayed.

Click Config to configure the selected device.
Click Diagnostic to diagnose the selected device.
In the PF Map, open Accessories>I/O bus. Right-

click Configuration and select Create new I/O Device.
Alternatively, double-click on an existing I/O

Device to open the configuration window.
9836 3123 01 171 (428)

Accessories
Select New I/O Device ID and

Device type.
Click OK to open the

Make settings for the device by clicking on the positions (the example below shows an Operator panel).
See the user guides for each accessory device for more information.
Click Store and Close when finished with configuration.
172 (428) 9836 3123 01

Accessories
9836 3123 01 173 (428)

Accessories
In the PF Map, open Accessories>I/O bus and double-

click Options.
Make settings for Options.

Click Store and Close window when finished.
174 (428) 9836 3123 01

Accessories
12.3 Tool bus

In the PF Map, open Accessories>Tool bus and double-click
Information.
Select Device type and click

Device information.
The Device information window

appears with information about
the connected device.
9836 3123 01 175 (428)

Accessories
In the PF Map, open Accessories>Tool bus and double-click

Configuration.
In the Tool bus Configuration window, click General

purpose I/O.
Make settings for the digital inputs and outputs (see

section Digital I/O and fieldbus items for descriptions of
available selections).
176 (428) 9836 3123 01

Accessories
In the Tool bus Configuration

window, click ST selector.
Make settings for the ST
selector.
The same settings are available
for Internal ST selector.

window, click ST scanner.
Make settings for the ST
scanner.
See section Identifier for
information on identifier
settings.
Click Set Scan Engine Default
Values to delete all custom scan
engine settings and revert back
to the Atlas Copco production
defaults.
Click Set Highest Security Level

to set the scan engine Linear
code type security setting to its
highest level (4) and turn the
Bidirectional redundancy on.
9836 3123 01 177 (428)

Accessories

window, click TLS ST Tag.
Make settings for the ST Tag.
12.4 Printer
In the PF Map, open Accessories>Printer.
178 (428) 9836 3123 01

Accessories
The connected A400 Brand and A401

Paper size are setup here. If A402
Continuous print is activated, then it is
possible to also select A404 New page at
Job done.
Push the Print button on the Power

Focus Graph front panel to view a list of
available reports to print.
Click Store to save configuration.
9836 3123 01 179 (428)

Sync
13 Sync
Sync allows a group of spindles to perform the same task simultaneously. Examples where a
Sync solution could be applicable are the tightening of car wheels and the tightening of
cylinder head bolts. The Sync function is RBU-dependent.
See parameter list section Sync for a description of all available Sync options.
A Sync group consists of PF units working in

the same Cell.
One of the controllers is defined as Sync
reference. The other controllers are Sync
members.
The Sync reference handles the

Synchronization between the tools, the
selection of Psets and the result reporting for
the Sync. A Sync group can be viewed as one
PF with more than one tool.
A Sync group can be part of a Job (see
chapter Job). Note that it is the Job reference,
and not the Sync reference, that counts the
batch in a Job with Sync.
The status information on each controller and
tool shows the individual result for that
spindle. The overall Sync OK/NOK can be
given on the fieldbus, RE-Alarm or relays
controlled by the Sync reference. The results
from every spindle are registered separately.
The status from individual Sync members
can be viewed on the Sync reference
controller.
Sync is performed in steps or SynchroTork (PF4000 only). In step Sync, all Synchronized spindles wait
for each other at a number of checkpoints before they continue with the next step. A typical two stage
tightening has checkpoints at P111 First target and P113 Final target. SynchroTork allows continuous
9836 3123 01 181 (428)

Sync
Synchronization during the final tightening.
13.1 Sync prerequisites and limitations

A Sync group consists of two to ten PF units. The SynchroTork option is limited to six tools.
All Sync members must be part of the same cell, but a cell can consist of more than one Sync group. The
cell reference does not have to be a member of the Sync group. For creating a cell, see section Controller.
All Sync members must have the same Sync reference.
All Sync members must be connected via the internal I/O-bus, which is used for time critical
Synchronization communication. Do not connect two Sync groups via the I/O-bus.
The Sync reference can control external I/O bus units, such as RE-Alarm, Socket Selector and I/O
Expander.
All Psets must be configured from the Sync reference.
Do not configure any external I/O devices (device 1-15) on the Sync members.
No I/O bus cable connection is allowed from any of the sync group members to a non-sync group member
PF unit.
Ethernet communication is used for non-time critical communication such as start-up time,
creating/updating Psets and Multistages and transferring result data between the Sync reference and the
Sync members.
To be able to use Sync start, the 4-pin remote start connector on the Power Focus back panel must be
configured for remote start.
If a sync group is used for loosening the entire group will be classified as OK when at least one sync
member performs a successful loosening.
In a Synchronized application, the Sync communication has top priority on the I/O bus
when the tools are running. For that reason tool start, tool disable and other safety critical
functions must not be connected to the I/O bus via I/O Expander.
For a description of how to do Sync motor tuning, see section Tool.
182 (428) 9836 3123 01

Sync
13.2 Hardware configuration

Connect all PF units in the Sync group via the I/O-bus on the back panel.
Set the 4-pin remote start connector to remote start on each of the Sync members, and to the selected
start source on the Sync reference.
If applicable, connect external I/O devices (for example alarms or start source) to the Sync reference, but
never to the Sync members.
Sync reference Sync member Sync member Last Sync member
I/O-bus connection 1 is I/O-bus connection 2 is

terminated or external I/O always terminated.
devices are connected.
9836 3123 01 183 (428)

Sync
13.3 Sync configuration

To set up a Sync group, configurations are made in Network,
Tool and Sync windows.
13.3.1 Sync members configuration

Connect the Sync reference.
In the PF Map, open Controller>Network.
184 (428) 9836 3123 01

Sync
Ensure that all PF units in the Synchronized

group are part of the same Cell. Parameter C312
Cell reference IP must be the same.
In this example, PF is a Sync member, and the

Sync reference is the same as the cell reference.
In the PF Map, open Tool>Configuration>Tool start, and set T200 Tool start select source to Sync start.
Click Store to save settings and restart PF.
Repeat the procedure for all Sync members.
13.3.2 Sync reference configuration

Connect the Sync reference.
In the PF Map, open Controller>Network. Ensure that the Sync reference is part of the same cell as the
Sync members.
Set C317 Sync reference IP equal to C300 IP address.
Restart the Sync reference controller and connect ToolsTalk PF to it again.
In the PF Map, open Sync.

Select controllers in the Available Power Focus list and click Add to create a Sync group list.
Note: The Sync reference (SR) must always be at the top of Sync group list.
Make settings in the Options field. Store and close the window.
9836 3123 01 185 (428)

Sync
186 (428) 9836 3123 01

Sync
13.4 Troubleshooting
Follow the procedure in this section. For more information, see section Event codes.
Symptom Reason/Action
Tools in a Sync group do not Programming errors:
start or do not tighten 1. Check that all Psets are configured from the Sync reference.
correctly 2. Check that all Sync members have T200 Tool start select source set to Sync start.
3. Check that all Sync members have C317 Sync reference IP set to the IP-address of the
Sync reference.
4. Reboot any reprogrammed Sync member or Sync reference.
Hardware-related errors:
1. Check that the I/O Bus cables between the Sync members is correctly connected and
without faults.
2. Check that the remote start connector in the Sync members is correctly wired for
remote start.
Error elimination:
1. Select a new Pset from the Sync reference. If all Sync members change to the same
Pset, the Sync group programming is correct. If not, check the programming and the
Ethernet cables and connections.
2. Select normal loosening and start a loosening from the Sync reference. If not all Sync
members start, check the tool trigger configuration in the Sync members and the
wiring of the remote start input. Check also the I/O Bus connection and the I/O Bus
cabling.
3. If a single spindle does not start, the tool, tool-cable or controller might be broken. If
all spindles in the group start loosening but not tightening, check that all Psets are
configured in the same way. If not, restore them again from the Sync reference (all
Psets must be configured from the Sync reference).
An event code is displayed. See section Event codes.
9836 3123 01 187 (428)

Identifier
14 Identifier
The Identifier section describes the identifier concept, functions and settings.
An identifier, or barcode string, can be used for example to select Psets or Jobs, identify motor
vehicles (VIN) and other work pieces, variants, and operators. The tightening result can then be
saved together with this information.
See parameter list section Identifier for a description of all available Identifier options.
14.1 Identifier concepts

There are three ways to use the identifier function, all possible to use independently of each other:
 To select a Pset/Multistage or Job through scanning a barcode string (only Type 1).
 To create a work order for identification of, for example, work pieces connected to a tightening.
 To store additional information to the tightening result.
An identifier (barcode) string can have different standards and lengths. It can be scanned and stored as it
is, but PF can also be configured to identify parts of the string. These parts are called significant strings.
The Type 1 identifier can be configured for selection of Pset/Multistage or Job in addition to being stored
as additional information to the tightening result or being selected in a work order.
The Type 2, Type 3 and Type 4 identifiers can be stored as additional information to the tightening result or
be selected in a work order. These multiple identifiers are RBU-dependent.
A significant string is a set of characters within a barcode string that can be defined.
The significant positions are the positions where the significant strings are located.
A wildcard character is represented by a ¤ symbol and means that a certain position in the significant
string can have any character value.
A work order consists of different types of identifiers (Type 1 is mandatory). It is configured when Power
Focus should receive identifiers in a predefined order. An identifier not included in the work order is
called Optional identifier. An optional identifier must not be identical to an identifier included in the work
order.
9836 3123 01 189 (428)

Identifier
The Result part is additional information stored together with each tightening result in the Power Focus
database. This information can come from one or more of the defined identifier types independently.
Multiple identifiers provide storage of up to four result parts (RBU-dependent) after memory
reconfiguration. The additional information from the result parts is displayed in the Identifier monitor, and
the result of the tightening is displayed in the Result Monitor.
The result part additional information is stored with the tightening result in the Power Focus database.
Example:
An airbag is mounted in a car.

Type 1 represents the airbag which can be of different
variants that need different Psets. Type 2 represents
the car (VIN) and Type 3 identifies the work station.
A work order is configured where Type 2 (VIN) and
Type 3 (work station) have to be scanned before Type
1 (airbag).
Each tightening result from the Psets listed under Type 1 is stored with the VIN, the airbag ID, and the
work station ID.
The Identifier monitor shows the Work order and the Result monitor shows the tightening result. The
tightening result with all the additional information can be retrieved via command Get all results or via
Tools Net.
Part Id scan: This concept offers the opportunity to scan a variant of a part and select a specific Pset in
the Job. (The job itself may have been selected by another identifier). The significant numbers and part
id identifier length do not necessarily have to have a full match to select a specific Pset. This is achieved
by means of wildcards.
14.2 Identifier prerequisites and details

Prerequisites for significant strings:
 400 significant strings can be set for Type 1
 A string can only be added once in Type 1
 A Pset, Multistage or Job ID can be added to any string of Type 1
 Wildcards can be used in Type 1 strings if the significant positions are different and outside the length
of some Type 1 strings
190 (428) 9836 3123 01

Identifier
 The number of characters in the significant string (for example 10) must be the same as the number of
significant positions
 The length can be max 100 characters
 Standard alphanumeric characters are accepted. Apostrophe (’) and colon (:) are not accepted
 Standard alphanumeric ASCII characters (33-126) are accepted
Max scanned Max significant Max significant Max stored

characters positions strings characters
Type 1 100 50 400 25
Type 2 100 50 1 25
Type 3 100 50 1 25
Type 4 100 50 1 25
Prerequisites for incoming data:

 Identifiers can be sent to the Power Focus via a scanner (connected to the serial port), fieldbus,
Ethernet, an ST scanner, or an STwrench Tag (connected to the ST tool). Input source must be correct
(accepted).
 The incoming identifier string must have the following barcode reader standard syntax:
STX<data>ETX. (STX=02H ETX=03H).
 Scanner or similar device must not respond to unrecognized commands or send other data than the
identifier string
 An incoming identifier that goes directly to a Job or Sync member erases the received identifier that is
sent to the member from the Job or Sync reference.
Prerequisites for result parts:
 If using more than one result part, the memory configuration C604 No. of identifier result parts must be
updated (RBU-dependent).
 If the system is set up in a Cell Job or Sync configuration, the parameter C604 No. of identifier result parts
must be configured with identical values (1-4) for all PF units included in the Job/Sync group.
 The information from the identifier types can be displayed in the result parts independently of result
part number. For example, all result parts can display information from Type 1 (or even depending on
the subtype of the Type 1).
 A work order has to be completed before the Power Focus stores the accepted identifiers in the result
database and selects a next Pset/Multistage or Job.
 Autoselected Psets in a Job will inherit the result parts (if any) from the previous Pset.
Identifier reset can be done if any of the following actions are taken:
 Restoring of identifier configuration is made
 A Reset all identifier command is issued from the identifier monitor or digital input
9836 3123 01 191 (428)

Identifier
 The parameters J342 Reset all identifier at Job done and I183 Reset all identifiers at Pset batch done are
activated
After a reset, the following occur:
 All identifiers are reset
 Work order is (cleared) aborted
 Tool is unlocked if I181 Tool locked during work order is activated
14.3 Configuration of identifier functions

The identifier functions are related to a number of parameters
and views.
Identifier includes settings for configuration of identifiers, result
parts and work order. A command to send an identifier to PF
directly is also located here.
Configuration; Identifier can be set as the source to select Pset,
Job, or Job override.
Memory includes settings for Result parts. Note that memory
reconfiguration requires saving of PF to file and reboot of PF. If
a memory reconfiguration is needed, it is recommended to start
the procedure here. See section Memory.
Identifier Monitordisplays the result parts. The following
functions are also available here:
 Bypass identifier
 Reset latest identifier
 Reset all identifiers
192 (428) 9836 3123 01

Identifier
14.3.1 Configuring identifiers

The procedure to set identifiers differs between identifier types 1 and types 2-4. Always start with Type 1.
To set up identifiers, do the following:
In the PF Map, double-click Identifier to open the Type setup window. The figure below shows a
completely configured identifier setup.
Select Input source for identifier Type 1.

State Length of the incoming identifier. – (hyphen) means no length check.
Click Set to open the pop up window Identifier significant position setup.
Mark the significant positions for the identifier. The positions can be selected freely. Click OK.
To define the significant string for identifier Type 1, click Set strings for Type 1 to open the Identifier
Type 1 string setup window.
9836 3123 01 193 (428)

Identifier
Note: To define the significant string for identifier Type 2-4, click the box and type the string directly.
Write string name in field Add identifier string and click Add
Wildcards can be used in Type 1 strings if the significant positions are different and outside the length of
some Type 1 strings.
Double-click a box to select Pset, Multistage or Job to each string. When finished, click OK.
Click Store to save the settings, or continue with
 Configuring a new type of identifier
 Configuring a work order
 Configuring Result parts.
The STwrench TAG must be programmed in a special way in ToolsTalk in order to work
properly, when using Identifier Input source STwrench tag.. The length must be 3 with 3
significant characters. For example, if the tag number is 1 the configured string must be
"001".
194 (428) 9836 3123 01

Identifier
14.3.2 Configuring a work order

To configure a work order, do the following:
Open PF Map > Identifier > Options.

Add identifier types to the work order, and arrange the correct order using the arrow buttons.
Note: Identifier Type 1 must always be included in the work order.
If applicable, select Tool locked during work order and I183 Reset all identifiers at Pset batch done.
When activating I183 Reset all identifiers at Pset batch done:
 All identifiers are reset
 Work order is (cleared) aborted
 Tool is unlocked if I181 Tool locked during work order is activated
To avoid re-selecting an ongoing Job, Pset or Mset by a work order (and override selected), check the
I184 Ignore identical work orders option.

Note: The Send Identifier button is described in Additional Identifier functions.
9836 3123 01 195 (428)

Identifier
14.3.3 Configuring result parts

To configure more than one result part, the parameter C604 No of Identifier result parts must be set to the
correct number of result parts. If a memory reconfiguration is made, the PF data must be stored to file and
PF rebooted. See section Memory for instructions. It is possible to configure up to 4 separate result parts.
The results are displayed in the Identifier Monitor. See section Additional identifier functions.
To configure result parts, do the following:
Open PF Map > Identifier > Type setup.

Select the identifier type to correspond with Result part 1 (2, 3 and 4) from the drop-down list.
Click Set to open the pop up window Identifier significant position setup.
Set Significant positions by marking character positions that should be added to the result part.
Click Store when finished.
In the example below, six positions from Type 4 are copied to result part 1 and stored together with the
tightening result. Eight positions for Type 1 (any subtype) are copied to result part 2, and so on.
For Type 1, it is possible to specify any of the subtypes Pset/Mset/Job in any of the Result parts. For
example, result part 2 can have Type 1 subtype Job and result part 3 can have Type 1 subtype Pset.
196 (428) 9836 3123 01

Identifier
14.3.4 Additional identifier functions

The following functions are available in the Identifier Monitor window:
Bypass identifier Skips a specified identifier type in a work order.
It is not possible to bypass the first type in the work order if it simultaneously exist types outside
the work order.
Reset latest identifier The latest accepted identifier string is cleared with the command (or digital input) Reset latest
identifier.
It is not possible to perform Reset latest identifier for the last type in a work order.
Reset all identifier All accepted identifier strings are cleared with the command (or digital input) Reset all identifiers.
The following function is available in the Send Identifier window in the Identifier menu (see figure in
section Configuring a work order).
Send Identifier Sends an identifier string from ToolsTalk PF to PF manually. The result is displayed in the
Identifier Monitor.
To select Pset/Multistage or Job from an identifier string, parameters C200 Pset, C201 Job or
C202 Job override have to be set to Identifier.
9836 3123 01 197 (428)

Fieldbus
15 Fieldbus
Fieldbus communication can be used for data communication between Power Focus and a
PLC (programmable logic controllers). It is an effective and fast way for the data transfer of
short data packages. Fieldbus is normally used to send discrete I/O data instead of using a
large number of cables that have to be hard wired to relays and digital inputs.
There are many different fieldbus standards on the market and they all have different hardware and
software protocols. To be able to communicate on the fieldbus, Power Focus must be equipped with a
specific card for the preferred type of fieldbus.
Power Focus acts as a client in a fieldbus system. A PLC or similar acts as the reference
(master).
See section Digital I/O and fieldbus items for a description of all available fieldbus options.
With ToolsTalk PF, the fieldbus functionality in PF can be configured to fit the user-specific bitmap. It
also makes configuration or modification of a bitmap very easy. When the configuration is done, it can
be downloaded to Power Focus or saved as a file for later use.
9836 3123 01 199 (428)

Fieldbus
15.1 General setup

In the PF Map, double-click Fieldbus.
Select F100 Fieldbus type

from the drop down menu.
All fieldbus parameters are

reset to default and data
items cleared.
Confirm by clicking OK.
200 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
The screenshot below displays available parameters for fieldbus type DeviceNet. Click Store to save the
settings.
15.1.1 Parameters in General setup

The table below shows parameters available for all fieldbus types. For an explanation of the parameters,
see parameter list section Fieldbus.
ModBus Plus
ProfiBus-DP
Control-Net
Ethernet/IP
Device-Net
Profinet-IO
Inter-Bus
Inter-Bus
ModBus/
CC-link
FL-Net
2MB
TCP
Parameter
F100 Fieldbus type X X X X X X X X X X X
F102 From PF data length X X X X X X X X X X X
F103 To PF data length X X X X X X X X X X X
F104 From PF global data length X
F105 To PF global data length X
F106 From PF Data Offset X
F107 To PF Data Offset X
F110 Set node address and baud rate from X X
F111 FB node address X
F112 Baud rate X X
9836 3123 01 201 (428)

Fieldbus
ModBus Plus
ProfiBus-DP
Control-Net
Ethernet/IP
Device-Net
Profinet-IO
Inter-Bus
Inter-Bus
ModBus/
CC-link
FL-Net
2MB
TCP
Parameter
F113 Connection mode X
F120 Set node address from X X X X X X
F121 FB address from X X X
F130 PCP length X X
F131 Process data length X X
F140 Set source address from X
F141 Source address X
F150 IP address X X X X
F151 Subnet Mask X X X
F152 Gateway X X X
F155 Device Name X
F157 Assembly instance X
F160 Virtual fieldbus X
F161 Virtual from PF data length X
F162 Virtual to PF data length X
F163 Virtual from PF data offset X
F164 Virtual to PF data offset X
F170 X
F171 X
F200 FB update interval X X X X X X X X X X X
F210 Tool stop at offline X X X X X X X X X X X
F220 Read result handshake X X X X X X X X X X X
F300 Bitmap select X X X X X X X X X X X
202 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
15.1.2 View fieldbus information

Select General setup.
Click Get fieldbus info to display fieldbus
module type, module software version,
module serial number and status of the LED’s.
Select General setup.

Click Get fieldbus info to display fieldbus
module type, module software version,
module serial number and status of the LED’s.
9836 3123 01 203 (428)

Fieldbus
15.2 From PF setup and to PF setup

Select From PF setup or To PF setup.
Via From PF Setup the bitmap (defined in F102 From PF Data Length) sent out from the Power Focus can
be configured.
Via To PF setup the bitmap (defined in F103 To PF Data Length) sent in to the Power Focus can be
configured.
Click Add item… to activate a selection list. On the right side of the item list, see information about
highlighted item.
Highlight the item and double-click on it or click Add. The item is then entered to the item list on the first
available line.
204 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
In the list, the start word, start byte, start bit, and length for the selected item are visible. It is easy to
change the position in the bitmap by changing the start position in the item list and pressing Enter on the
keyboard after each line is changed. If the length of an item is variable, it can also be changed here.
It is also possible to drag and drop directly in the bitmap. In this case, the start positions in the item list
are updated automatically. If the bitmap is changed, and a conflict occurs, this part is marked with red.
To delete an item, highlight it in the item list and click Delete item.
The max number of selected items is 60 in From PF setup and 60 in to PF setup.
For detailed information of the available selections, see section Digital I/O and fieldbus items.
15.2.1 Fieldbus modes

The normal mode is when neither Diagnostic mode nor Monitor mode is selected. In normal mode, the
operator can change position of a bit in a word (in a byte) for a selected item (not the content of the bit).
For instance, the operator can change the Job off from bit position 7 to bit position 3 just by drag and drop,
or by writing it into the Bit column and pressing Enter on the keyboard.
Diagnostic mode
In Diagnostic mode, it is possible to set fieldbus data in ToolsTalk PF and send the data to PF by clicking
Set value. If Diagnostic mode From PF Setup is used, then the Power Focus passes data from ToolsTalk PF
to the PLC and ignores the data from Power Focus. If Diagnostic mode To PF Setup is used, then the
Power Focus activates functions, which are set in ToolsTalk PF and ignores PLC data.
In Diagnostic mode the operator can only change a small part of the fieldbus setting data
(only the content of a bit from zero <--> one).
Monitor mode
Monitor modeis used to monitor fieldbus data communication for testing purpose. This function works
only when ToolsTalk PF is online (connected to PF).
When Monitor mode is active, the data from Power Focus to PLC is visible in the From PF Setup
window bitmap. Likewise the data from PLC to Power Focus is visible in the To PF Setup window
bitmap. It is not possible to change and store fieldbus configurations in monitor mode. Data can be
displayed in two formats, defined data type format and binary format. The data in the monitor windows
is updated at a rate of three messages per second.
9836 3123 01 205 (428)

Fieldbus
15.3 Storing fieldbus configuration

To store or read fieldbus data, first activate the fieldbus window. On the Menu bar, use command
File>Read Fieldbus, or File>Save Fieldbus. The fieldbus file extension is “*.pff”.
15.4 Disable fieldbus carried signals

It is possible to run PLC-selected Jobs over the fieldbus in automatic mode (i.e. “fieldbus” is selected for
parameter C201 Job), and select Jobs with a digital input in emergency mode (i.e. “DigIn” is selected for
parameter C202 Job override). When emergency mode is activated, the fieldbus signals could still disturb
the communication. To avoid this type of problem it is recommended to use digital input Disable fieldbus
carried signals. When this digital input goes high the following events occur:
 Fieldbus communication is disabled

 Relay Fieldbus carried signals disabled goes high
 In ToolsTalk PF monitoring mode on fieldbus “To PF” side, it is possible to display changes in
signals sent to PF over the fieldbus. (Note that the signals have no effect on the Power Focus, since
all fieldbus communication is disabled).
 On the fieldbus side “From PF”, bits are reset to zero (0)
 The traffic of “keep alive” signals continues on the fieldbus. In this way no event codes (i.e. No
connection on fieldbus) are displayed
 All tools are enabled (presupposed that the tools were disabled from a source over the fieldbus before
then)
 If there is a running Job, which has been selected via the fieldbus, the Job is aborted
206 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
15.5 Fieldbus data format

This section describes the different data types that are used in the fieldbus configuration.
15.5.1 Bitmap select (Endian mode)

Big endian (Motorola mode) is default setting for ProfiBus-DP, Profinet IO, InterBus, Interbus 2Mb, CC-
link, ModBusPlus and ModBus TCP.
Little endian (Intel mode) is default setting for DeviceNet, ControlNet, Ethernet/IP and FL-net.
Big endian (Motorola mode)
Byte 0 (send 1 st) Byte 1 (send 2 nd)
MS Byte (PF) LS Byte (PF)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Little endian (Intel mode)

Byte 1 (send 2 nd) Byte 0 (send 1 st)
MS Byte (PF) LS Byte (PF)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
15.5.2 Fieldbus data types

The Power Focus uses position format in all encoding and decoding data types. In PF position format the
most significant bit (MSB) is the bit furthest to the left and the least significant bit (LSB) is the bit furthest
to the right.
If a data type is less than one word, the MSB is the bit furthest to the left. If data type is longer than one
word, the MSB is the bit furthest top-left. If a fieldbus type uses Intel Endian, byte numbers are swapped
before encoding or decoding to a specific data type.
The data field in the fieldbus is from the beginning a blank data field without structure. In order to file
Power Focus item data types into fieldbus we define fieldbus data type, which holds the information about
placement and structure of a certain application data type mapped into the fieldbus data field.
The table below shows the different data types used in fieldbus data. The section items from/to PF shows
the data type available for different items.
9836 3123 01 207 (428)

Fieldbus
Data type Description

Bit One bit. Normally used for discrete I/O-data.
BitField (BF) Length is 1-16 bits. All bits must be in the same byte. The left bit is the most significant bit and
the right bit is the least significant bit, i.e. 0001=1, 1000= 8.
Character (Char) One byte ASCII code.
CharacterStringChange (CSC) Character string. Each character uses one byte ASCII code. Range: 2 - 25 bytes.
CharacterStringInput (CSI) Character string with an extra “counter” byte in front. The extra byte is an integer counter and
must increase each time when the character string is entered to be able to detect a new input. To
enter the same value again (e.g. the same Job number), just change the counter.
FixedPointNumber (Fixed Two-byte integer part and two-byte decimal part. The first two bytes hold the integer part and
point) the last two bytes hold the decimal part. Used to represent torque value.
Unsigned16 (U16) 16-bit unsigned integer. Decimal 0 – 65 535.
Unsigned32 (U32) 32-bit unsigned integer. Decimal 0 – 4 294 967 295.
U32_HNW 32-bit unsigned integer. MSW is the higher number word. Only shown in Intel Endian
CharStringChangeIntel (CSCI) Character string. Each character uses one byte ASCII code. Range: 2 - 25 bytes. This type
makes Intel Endian character string follows byte order; the first character is the lowest byte in
the string. Only shown in Intel Endian
CharStringInputIntel (CSII) Character string with an extra “counter” byte in front. The extra byte is an integer counter and
must increase each time when the character string is entered to be able to detect a new input. To
enter the same value again (e.g. the same Job number), just change the counter. This type
makes Intel Endian character string follows the byte order; the integer counter is the lowest
byte in the String. Only shown in Intel Endian
OctetArray (OA) It contains several octet data in the byte order.
LongCharStringChange It contains max 100 bytes character.
(LCSC)
LongCharStrChIntel (LCSCI) In Intel mode, only allows whole word, up to 100 bytes. Only shown in Intel Endian.
Common for all data types is that a change must occur in PLC output area (To PF) to get
Power Focus to detect a new data entry. For example, if selecting JOB number 3 two times in
a row please select 0 in between.
Character string
Character String is in a reading order, i.e. from left to right, from top to bottom, regardless of the byte
order. The difference between CharStringChange and CharStringInput is a counter byte added before
character string in CharStringInput. A new input is considered when the counter changes.
208 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Convert to PF Convert to FB
Data type Word Byte 0 Byte 1
data (hex) data (hex)
CharStringChange 0 P S
1 E T
2 2 PSET2(00) PSET2(00)
CharStringInput 3 1 (counter) P
4 S E
5 T 2 (01)PSET2 (01)PSET2
Data type Word Byte 1 Byte 0 Convert to PF Convert to FB

data data (hex)
CharStringChange 0 P S
1 E T
2 2 PSET2(00) SPTE(00)2
CharStringInput 3 1 (counter) P
4 S E
9836 3123 01 209 (428)

Fieldbus
5 T 2 (01)PSET2 P(01)ES2T
CharStringChangeIntelF 6 S P
7 T E
8 2 PSET2(00) PSET2(00)
CharStringInputIntelF 9 P 1 (counter)
10 E S
11 2 T (01)PSET2 (01)PSET2
Fixed point number

Fixed point number integer part is in low number word, and decimal part is in high number word. The
table below shows the conditions valid for the integer and decimal parts (i.e. if integer part is 1 digit or 2
digits, decimal part is 2 digits):
Integer part Decimal part
(in digits) (in digits)
1 or 2 2
3 1
4 0

data data (hex)
FixedPointNumber 0 0 12
1 0 15 12.15 (00 0B 00 0F)
data data (hex)
FixedPointNumber 0 0 12
1 0 4 12.04 (0B 00 04 00)
210 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Integer
Unsigned16 is a 16-bit integer and unsigned32 is a 32-bit integer. U32_HMW is a special case of
unsigned32, which is used in Intel Endian.

data data (hex)
Unsigned16 0 1 0 256 (01 00)
Unsigned32 1 0 (MSB) 1
2 0 0 (LSB) 65536 (00 01 00 00)
data data (hex)
Unsigned16 0 1 0 256 (00 01)
Unsigned32 1 0 (MSB) 1
2 0 0 (LSB) 65536 (01 00 00 00)
U32_HNW 3 0 1 (LSB)
4 0 (MSB) 0 1 (01 00 00 00)
9836 3123 01 211 (428)

Fieldbus
15.6 Fieldbus selector configuration

The Fieldbus selector function makes it possible for an external source (PLC) to control the selection of
Psets on selectors via fieldbus.
The intended type of working stations where the proposed software is to be installed are rework stations
and similar, without fixed workflows. The tightenings are often unique for each work piece depending on
the previously performed failed tightenings on that work piece. The external source (PLC) is responsible
for setting the green LED’s on the selector(s) and for selecting the Psets in the Power Focus.
To use this function the parameter C200 Pset must be set to Fieldbus selector. The fieldbus
selector function can not be combined with the Job function.
The selector is set up in Accessories>I/O bus>Configuration.
Set selector LED

Light on/flash/turn off for Selector green Led on positions where Pset is configured. Two bits for one
position: 00 – off , 01 – flash, 10 – solid.
In an eight-socket selector, the first four positions are for Selector LED 1-4, and the last four positions are
for Selector LED 5-8. If a four-socket selector is used, only selector LED 1-4 is mapped.

Byte 0 Byte 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Device ID Not used
LED 4 LED 3 LED 2 LED 1 LED 8 LED 7 LED 6 LED 5

Byte 1 Byte 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Not used Device ID
Selector information
Byte 0 Byte 1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Device ID Bit 0-7 Socket 1-8 information
(1- lifted, 0- not or not configured, FF-
212 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
all ones – more then one socket lifted)


Byte 1 Byte 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bit 0-7 Socket 1-8 information Device ID
(1-lifted, 0- not or not configured, FF-
all ones – more than one socket lifted)
Selector Control Green (Red) Light
For selector external controlled function A232. Set selector green (red) light. Two bits for one position: 00
– off , 01 – flash, 10 – solid. Bitmaps are as in chapter Set Selector Led.
To use this function the parameter A232 must be set.
The A232 is set up in Accessories>I/O bus>Options.
15.7 Select Pset from fieldbus and set batch size

In order to set batch size and select Pset from fieldbus, parameter C200 Pset must be Fieldbus or Fieldbus
selector. Also, parameter P150 Batch count must be set to Fieldbus.
Byte 0 Byte 1
Pset ID Batch size

Byte 1 Byte 0
Batch size Pset ID
Function (C200 Pset is set to Fieldbus)

0 < Batch size < 99 Batch size = 0, Batch size > 99
Pset ID = 0 No Pset selected No Pset selected
9836 3123 01 213 (428)

Fieldbus
0 < Pset ID < max Select Pset and set batch size No Pset selected
number of Pset
Function (C200 Pset is set to Fieldbus selector)

0 < Batch size < 99 Batch size = 0, Batch size > 99
Pset ID = 0 Selector socket No Pset selected No Pset selected

lifted correctly
Selector socket Display event code E475 Fieldbus Display event code E475 Fieldbus
lifted incorrectly PsetID mismatch selector lifted PsetID mismatch selector lifted
socket socket
No Pset selected No Pset selected
0 < Pset ID < max Selector socket Select Pset, set batch size and Display event code E475 Fieldbus
number of Pset lifted correctly unlock tool PsetID mismatch selector lifted
socket
No Pset selected
Selector socket Display event code E475 Fieldbus Display event code E475 Fieldbus
lifted incorrectly PsetID mismatch selector lifted PsetID mismatch selector lifted
socket socket
No Pset selected No Pset selected
15.8 Fieldbus information

This section lists the fieldbus types.
15.8.1 ProfiBus-DP
ProfiBus-DP is a fieldbus normally used in industrial automation, to transfer fast data for motor controllers,
MMI, I/O units and other industrial equipment. ProfiBus has an international user organization called
ProfiBus International, PI, and other local and national organizations. General technical questions
regarding the fieldbus should be addressed to the local ProfiBus User Group in the first instance.
A contact address list is available on the ProfiBus internet site: http://www.ProfiBus.com.
For general help on ProfiBus, contact ProfiBus International on:
[email protected].
214 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Physical interface
Interface Description
Fieldbus type PROFIBUS DP EN 50 170 (DIN 19245)
Protocol version 1.10
Protocol stack supplier SIEMENS
Auto baud rate detection (supported baud rate range) 9.6 kbit - 12Mbit
Transmission media ProfiBus bus line, type A or B specified in EN50170
Topology Server-Client communication
Fieldbus connectors 9 pin female D-sub (standard)
Cable Shielded copper cable, twisted pair
Isolation The bus is galvanically separated from the other electronics with an on
board DC/DC converter. Bus signals (A-line and B-line) are isolated via
optic couplers.
ProfiBus DP communication ASIC SPC3 chip from Siemens
ProfiBus-DP module
Variable Limits Information
Node Address 1 – 124 Set Switches to 00 to enable the node
(1-99 with HW setting) address from SW (ToolsTalk PF).
Number of nodes in a ProfiBus-DP Max 126
network
Baud rate Automatic (9.6 kbaud - 12 Mbaud) Automatically set from PLC at
connection.
Data to PF length 0 - 200 bytes Must be the same in PF and PLC.
The string length in PF is limited to 200
bytes. ProfiBus-DP standard allows 244
bytes.
Data from PF length 0 - 200 bytes Must be the same in PF and PLC.
The string length in PF is limited to 200
bytes. ProfiBus-DP standard allows 244
bytes.
The module only supports cyclic I/O
data transmission
9836 3123 01 215 (428)

Fieldbus
Hardware
Fieldbus connectors
The ProfiBus-DP standard EN 50170 (DIN 19245) recommends the use of a 9 pin female D-sub
connector. Depending on the protection class and type of application, other connector designs are also
allowed.
Connector 9-pin female D-sub

Pin Name Function
Housing Shield Connected to PE
1 Not connected
2 Not connected
3 B-Line Positive RxD/TxD according to RS485 specification
4 RTS Request to send
+5V BUS and GND BUS are used for bus termination. Some devices, such as optical transceivers
(RS485 to fiber optics) may require an external power supply from these pins.
5 GND BUS Isolated GND from RS484 side
+5V BUS and GND BUS are used for bus termination. Some devices, like optical transceivers
6 +5V BUS Isolated +5V from RS484 side
+5V BUS and GND BUS are used for bus termination. Some devices, like optical transceivers
7 Not connected
8 A-Line Negative RxD/TxD according to RS485 specification
9 Not connected
Node address
Node address is set with the two rotary switches on the fieldbus module; this enables address settings from
1-99 in decimal form.
Switch 1 x10 / Switch 2 x1. (See switches on the top drawing)
Example: Address = (Left Switch Setting x 10) + (Right Switch Setting x 1)
216 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Left switch is set to 5 and right switch is set to 2. This gives a node address of 52.
If enable node address configuration from ToolsTalk PF the switches must be set to 00.
Node address cannot be changed when the power is switched on.
Baud rate
The ProfiBus DP network baud rate is set during configuration of the master and only one baud rate is
possible in a ProfiBus DP installation. As the Power Focus ProfiBus DP module has an auto baud rate
detection function, do not configure the baud rate on the module.
Supported baud rates: 9.6 kbit/s; 19.2 kbit/s; 93.75 kbit/s; 187.5 kbit/s; 500 kbit/s; 1.5 Mbit/s; 3 Mbit/s; 6
Mbit/s; 12 Mbit/s.
Functionality of the indication LED’s

The module is equipped with four colored LED’s, used for debugging purposes. The function of the
LED’s is described in the table and figure below.
Name Color Function
Fieldbus diagnostics Red Indicates certain faults on the fieldbus side.
(LED 4) Flashing Red 1 Hz - Error in configuration: IN and/or OUT length set during initialization of
the module is not equal to the length set during configuration of the network.
Flashing Red 2 Hz - Error in user parameter data: The length/contents of the user parameter
data set during initialization of the module are not equal to the length/contents set during
configuration of the network.
Flashing red 4 Hz– Error in initialization of the ProfiBus communication ASIC.
Turned off - No diagnostics present
On-Line Green Indicates that the module is On-Line on the fieldbus.
(LED 2) Green - Module is On-Line and data exchange is possible.
Turned Off - Module is not On-Line
Off-Line Red Indicates that the module is Off-Line on the fieldbus.
(LED 3) Red – Module is Off-Line and no data exchange is possible.
Turned Off - Module is not Off-Line
Bus termination
The end nodes in a ProfiBus DP network have to be terminated to avoid reflections on the bus line. Use
cable connectors with built-in termination.
GSD file
Each device on a ProfiBus DP network is associated with a GSD file, containing all necessary information
about the device. The network configuration program during configuration of the network uses this file.
9836 3123 01 217 (428)

Fieldbus
Contact the local Atlas Copco service representative for a copy of the GSD file.
File name: pf3profb.gsd
Icon file
Contact the local Atlas Copco service representative to get a copy of the icon file for Power Focus. This
file can be used to have a Power Focus Icon in PLC configuration SW. The file is a bitmap.
File name: pf3profb.bmp
15.8.2 DeviceNet
DeviceNet is used for industrial automation, normally for the control of valves, sensors and I/O units and
other automation equipment. The DeviceNet communication link is based on a broadcast-oriented
communications protocol, Controller Area Network (CAN). This protocol has I/O response and high
reliability even for demanding applications, e.g., brake control.
DeviceNet has a user organization, the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA) that assists
members in matters concerning DeviceNet. Website: http://www.ODVA.org
The media for the fieldbus is a shielded copper cable composed of one twisted pair and two cables for the
external power supply. The baud rate can be changed between 125k, 250k and 500kbit/s. This can be done
in two different ways. The first is simply by using the DIP switch, second is via SW configuration. There
are several different DeviceNet scanners available on the market, both for PLC systems and for PCs.
DeviceNet module
Node Address (Mac ID) 0-63
Number of nodes in a DeviceNet network Max 63
Connection modes supported Polled I/O Use same as in PLC
Bit strobe I/O
Change of status/ cyclic I/O
Baud rate 125kbit/sec (Default)
250kbit/sec
500kbit/sec
Data to PF length 0 – 200 bytes Must be the same in Power Focus and
The data string is in PF limited to 200 PLC
bytes. DeviceNet standard allows 255
bytes.
218 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus

Data from PF length 0 – 200 bytes Must be the same in Power Focus and
The data string is in PF limited to 200 PLC
bytes. DeviceNet standard allows 255
bytes.
Configuration
In a DeviceNet network, each node has a Mac ID (the address in the network). The Mac ID is a number
between 0 and 63. Each node’s Mac ID has to be unique, since it is used to identify the node. In a
DeviceNet network it is also possible to set baud rate, with the following baud rates being available: 125,
250 and 500 Kbit/s. All nodes in the network have to communicate at the same baud rate.
On the Power Focus DeviceNet module it is possible to set the Mac ID and baud rate using DIP switches
mounted on the module or from SW using ToolsTalk PF. Dip 1 and 2 are used to set the baud rate and
dips 3 to 8 are used to configure the node address (Mac ID). Dip 1 is the most significant bit on the DIP
switch. See table on the next page.
The Power Focus DeviceNet module is implemented in compliance with the ODVA specification for a
Communication adapter (profile no 12). It acts as a “group two only server” on the DeviceNet network.
Hardware
LED 1: Not used
LED 2: Network status
LED 3: Module status
LED 4: Not used
On = 1
Off = 0
9836 3123 01 219 (428)

Fieldbus
Function Dip switch

#
AD0 8
AD1 7
AD2 6
AD3 5
AD4 4
AD5 3
BD2 2
BD1 1
Baud rate (bit/sec) Dip 1 - 2
125k 00
250k 01
500k 10
Reserve (SW-setting) 11
Address Dip 3 – 8
0 000 000
1 000 001
2 000 010
3 000 011
… …
62 111 110
63 111 111
Mac ID (node address)

To set the Mac ID from ToolsTalk PF all DIP switches must be set to “On” (11 111 111).
The Mac ID cannot be changed when the power is switched on.
220 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Fieldbus connector
Connector 5-pin 5.08mm detachable screw terminal.
Pin Color Description
code
1 Black V-
2 Blue CAN-L
3 Bare Shield
4 White CAN-H
5 Red V+
V- and V+ must come from a fully isolated power supply. That means that the voltage cannot
have any reference to ground. This is to prevent the bus from interference caused by ground
loop problems. If V- and V+ are connected from a Power Focus internal 24VDC (screw
terminal) the same connection shall only power one DeviceNet module. This means that the
DeviceNet cable connected to PF must not include voltage wires. Normally there is a central
power supply that feeds all nodes in the network.
Power consumption
Current consumption at 24 VDC (V- to V+) is max 70 mA at power up and 25-30 mA continuously.
9836 3123 01 221 (428)

Fieldbus

The module is equipped with four colors LED’s, used for debugging purposes.
LED number Function Information Condition
1 Not in use
2 Network status Not powered / Not online Off
2 Network status Link OK online. Connected Steady green
2 Network status Critical link failure Steady red
2 Network status Online not connected Flashing green
2 Network status Connection time out Flashing red
3 Module status No Power Off
3 Module status Unrecoverable fault Steady red
3 Module status Minor fault Flashing red
3 Module status Device operational Steady green
4 Not in use
Bus termination
The termination of the fieldbus requires a terminating resistor at each end. These resistors should have a
value of 121 Ohm.
EDS file
Each device on a DeviceNet network is associated with an EDS file, containing all necessary information
about the device. The network configuration program during configuration of the network uses this file.
Contact the local Atlas Copco service representative for a copy of the EDS file.
File name: pf3devn.eds
Icon file
Contact the local Atlas Copco service representative to get a copy of the icon file for Power Focus. This
file can be used to have a Power Focus Icon in PLC configuration SW.
File name: pf3devn.ico
222 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
15.8.3 InterBus/InterBus2MB
InterBus is normally used for industrial automation applications, such as valve, sensor and I/O unit control.
InterBus is used in many different types of industry, including: automobile industry, food industry,
building automation, plant construction, paper converting, wood processing and process engineering.
InterBus has a user organization called the InterBus Club. The organization assists members on a wide
variety of matters concerning InterBus. For more information, contact the InterBus Club:
http://www.interbusclub.com
The media used by InterBus is a shielded copper cable consisting of three twisted pairs. Two of these pairs
are used for the bus connection and in the last pair only one cable is used. This cable is used to earth the
bus. The baud rate for the bus is 500 Kbit/s with a total amount of data of 4096 I/O points.
The Power Focus InterBus module is to be used on InterBus remote bus networks. In applications where it
is necessary to exchange large amounts of data and where a parallel application interface is required,
InterBus is the preferred option.
InterBus has two ways of exchanging data. The first way is a fast cyclical I/O data, called process data.
The other is a somewhat slower protocol called PCP, which is mainly used for configuring and setting the
parameters of a device. The Power Focus InterBus module supports up to 10 words on the bus, out of
which none, one, two or four words may be selected to act as the PCP –channel, necessary if the PCP-
protocol required.
The PCP version supported by the module is version 2.0, which is fully backwards compatible.
When using InterBus master boards where the PCP channel is not supported, the maximum
input and output is 20 Bytes in and 20 Bytes out.
Physical interface
Transmission media InterBus two differential lines.
Topology Ring Structure.
Fieldbus connectors 9 pin male D-sub.
Cable Shielded copper cable, Three Twisted pair.
Isolation The bus is galvanically separated from the other electronics with two DC/DC converters. Bus signals are
isolated via optic couplers.
ASICs and circuits Module is based on SUPI 3 and SRE1 chip from Phoenix contact.
9836 3123 01 223 (428)

Fieldbus
InterBus module
Variable Limits
Node Address Auto select
Number of nodes in an InterBus network
Baud rate 500 Kbit/sec, 2Mbit/sec
Process string length <= 20 bytes
Parameter string length (send with PCP) 200 byte – Process string length
The string length in the Power Focus is limited to 200 bytes. InterBus standard
allows 512 bytes.
PCP length 0, 1, 2, 4 Words
Parameter data index 0x6000 R/W + I (I = 0, 1, …)
0x6040 RO + I (I = 0, 1, …)
ID code (in PLC side) PCP 0 = 3
PCP 1 = 0xF3
PCP 2 = 0xF0
PCP 4 = 0xF1
224 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
The following figure shows typical Data Map To/From PF for Interbus protocol.
Due to Interbus standard specification it is necessary to cycle power on PF to validate

changes in Fieldbus configuration.
Hardware
LED 1 = RBDA (Remote Bus Disable)
LED 2 = TR (Transmit/Receive)
LED 3 = CC (Cable Check)
LED 4 = BA (Bus Active)
9836 3123 01 225 (428)

Fieldbus
BUS-IN (9-pin D-sub male)

Pin Name
Housing PE
1 DO1
2 DI1
3 GND
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 /DO1
7 /DI1
8 Not used
9 Not used
BUS-OUT (9-pin D-sub female)

Pin Name
Housing PE
1 DO2
2 DI2
3 GND
4 Not used
5 GND
6 /DO2
7 /DI2
8 Not used
9 RBST
Always connect RBST to GND if it is not the last module on the bus. If the RBST is not
connected to GND on the output connector, the Power Focus InterBus module will terminate
the outgoing bus.
Functionality of the indicator LED’s

LED number Name Description
1. RBDA Remote bus disable Active RED when outgoing remote bus is switched off.
2. TR Transmit/Receive Active GREEN when PCP communication is carried out over the InterBus (0.6 s hold
time to be visual).
3. CC Cable check Active GREEN if the cable connection is good and the InterBus Master is not in RESET.
4. BA Bus active Active GREEN. Is monitoring Layer 2.
226 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Icon file
Contact the local Atlas Copco service representative to get a copy of the Icon file for Power Focus. This
file can be used to have a Power Focus Icon in the PLC configuration SW. File name: pf3intb.ico
15.8.4 ModBusPlus
ModBusPlus is a local area network system designed for industrial control and monitoring applications,
developed by Modicon, Inc. The network enables programmable controllers, host computers and other
devices to communicate throughout plants and substations. ModBusPlus transfers fast data for motor
controllers, MMI, I/O units and other industrial equipment. ModBusPlus has an international user
organization called Modicon Inc.
General technical questions regarding the fieldbus should be addressed to the local ModBusPlus User
Group in the first instance.
A contact address list is available from the ModBusPlus Internet site http://www.modicon.com.
Physical interface
Transmission media ModBusPlus uses one differential line (RS-485 twisted pair) and shield.
Topology Token Bus Structure, virtual token ring.
Fieldbus connectors 9 pin female D-sub.
Cable Shielded copper cable, one twisted pair.
Isolation The bus signals are separated from the other electronics with a transformer according to ModBusPlus
interface description.
ASIC’s and circuits Module is based on chip-set and software from Modicon Inc.
Mechanical overview
ModBusPlus module is a host device. This host device can be read and written to from another
ModBusPlus host device or controller. ModBusPlus module does not initiate any point-to-point
communication to other nodes, it only responds to incoming commands. It can although broadcast global
data to all nodes on the network.
Protocol and supported functions

ModBusPlus has two ways of exchanging data. One through fast cyclic I/O data called global data and one
through a somewhat slower ModBusPlus protocol for point-to-point parameter data transfer. The
9836 3123 01 227 (428)

Fieldbus
maximum global data is 32 words on the bus. The point-to-point data transfer is handled by using one of
the following ModBus functions read holding registers, preset single register and preset multiple registers
all 40000 registers.
ModBusPlus module information

Node Address 1 - 64 The node address cannot be
changed during operation.
Source Address 1 - 64 The source address cannot be
changed during operation.
Number of nodes in a ModBusPlus Max 32 (with repeaters 64)
network
Bus length Max 2000 m with repeaters
Bus cable length Max 500 m
Data address 40001 + I (I = 0, 1, …) From PF This address is based on words.
41025 + I (I = 0, 1, …) To PF
(Global data from PF data in the module starts
from address 40001 and point-to-point data starts
immediately thereafter. Global data to PF data in
the module starts from address 41025 and point-
to-point data starts immediately thereafter. For
example, if to PF string length is 8 bytes and to
PF global string length is 4 bytes, the global data
are mapped to address 41025 and 41026; the
point-to-point data are mapped to address 41027
and 41028.)
Baud rate Automatic (1Mbit/s) Automatically set from PLC at
connection.
Data to PF total length 0 - 200 bytes Must be the same in PF and PLC.
(The string length is in Power Focus limited to
200 bytes. ModBusPlus standard allows 64 bytes
global data and 250 bytes point-to-point data.)
Data from PF total length 0 - 200 bytes Must be the same in PF and PLC.
(The string length is in Power Focus limited to
200 bytes. ModBusPlus standard allows 64 bytes
global data and 250 bytes point-to-point data.)
Global string length (To/From PF ) 0 - 64 bytes Must be the same in PF and PLC.
Host Firmware Rev. 77
228 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Hardware
LED 1: Not used
LED 2: Error
LED 3: MBP Active
LED 4: MBP Init

The module is equipped with four colored LED’s used for debugging purposes (LED 1 not used). The
function of the LED’s is described in the table and figure below.
Name Color Function
Error Red Indicates that the communication is not OK.
(LED 2) Turned Off – communication OK
MBP Active Green Indicates different Node Status:
(LED 3) Flashing every 160 ms – This node works normally, receiving and passing token.
Flashing every 1 s - This node is in monitor offline status.
2 Flashing, off 2 s - This node is in MAC IDLE never receiving-token status.
3 Flashing, off 1.7 s - This node is not hearing any other nodes.
4 flashing, off 1.4 s - This node has heard a valid packet that has a duplicated-node address sent from
another node on the network, using the same Node ID.
MBP Init Green Indicates that the peer interface is initialized
(LED 4) Turned Off - peer interface is not initialized
Fieldbus connectors
ModBusPlus recommends the use of a 9 pin female D-sub connector. Depending on the protection class
and type of application, other connector designs may also be used.
Connector 9-pin female D-sub

Pin Name
1 Cable shielding
2 Line-B
3 Line-A
4 PE
9836 3123 01 229 (428)

Fieldbus
Node address
Node address is set with the first DIP switch on the fieldbus module, allowing address settings from 1-64
in binary format. If the set node address is from SW1, ModBusPlus takes SW node address regardless of
hardware switch position.
1 (MSB) 2 3 4 5 6 (LSB) Function
ON ON ON ON ON ON Node address set to 1
ON ON ON ON ON OFF Node address set to 2
ON ON ON ON OFF ON Node address set to 3
- - - - - - -
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Node address set to 63
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Node address set to 64
The Node address cannot be changed during operation.
Source address
Source address is set using the second dip switch (the one close to LED) on the fieldbus module; this
enables address settings from 1-64 in binary format. If the set source address is from SW2, ModBusPlus
takes SW source address regardless of hardware switch position.
1 (MSB) 2 3 4 5 6 (LSB) Function
ON ON ON ON ON ON Source address set to 1
ON ON ON ON ON OFF Source address set to 2
ON ON ON ON OFF ON Source address set to 3
- - - - - - -
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Source address set to 63
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Source address set to 64
The source address cannot be changed during operation.
Icon file
It is not necessary for ModBusPlus to install a special file to recognize our product and it does not support
icon files.
230 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
15.8.5 Ethernet/IP
Ethernet is one of the most popular network technologies in use today. The major reasons for the
popularity are a suitable mix of speed, cost and ease of installation. The technology benefits, the market
acceptance, and the possibility to support, more or less, any non-real-time critical protocol, makes the
Ethernet an ideal networking technology for most systems.
More information, as well as links can be found at the web site http://www.iaona-eu.com.
Hardware
The module is based on a high performance CPU operating at 66 MHz. It features 8MB RAM and 2 MB
FLASH. Both EthernetIP and ModbusTCP use the same interface card from HMS.
LED #
1. Link
2. Module Status
3. Network Status
4. Activity
All dipswitches have to be set in OFF position and parameter F120 (Set node address from)
must be set to Hardware if DHCP server is to be used.
Supported fieldbus protocols

ModBus/TCP
The module supports the ModBus/TCP protocol and is conform to the ModBus/TCP specification 1.0.
More information about the ModBus/TCP protocol can be found at
http://www.modicon.com/openmbus/index.html
Ethernet/IP
The module supports the Ethernet protocol.
Ethernet/IP is based on the control and information protocol, CIP, which is also the framework for both
DeviceNet and ControlNet, to carry and exchange data between nodes. To be consistent with the other
fieldbus modules that is based on the CIP, i.e., DeviceNet and ControlNet, the same vendor specific
objects are implemented, together with new objects for servicing and monitoring the IT functionality.
9836 3123 01 231 (428)

Fieldbus
Ethernet/IP module
IP address Do not configure the module to use any of them Devices on an Ethernet network are not
0.x.x.x allowed to be configured to the IP
127.x.x.x addresses listed in left column
x.x.x.0
x.x.x.255
ModBus/TCP data address 000h + I (I = 0, 1, …) From PF* This address is based on words.
400h + I (I = 0, 1, …) To PF*
0000h + I (I = 0, 1, …) From PF* This address is based on bits
4000h + I (I = 0, 1, …) To PF*
EtherNetIP Assembly Instance Input (Producing Instance): 100 (64h), This is used to configure and transfer
0 Output (Consuming Instance): 150 (96h), data to/from EtherNetIP module
Configuration Data Instance /size = 0/: 197 (C5h), For Anybus FW >1.32 (For FW > 2.00
Input-Only (Heartbeat): 198 (C6h), and TTPF SW > 10.8 when Assembly
instance parameter F157 is 0)
Listen-Only (Heartbeat): 199 (C7h)
EtherNetIP Assembly Instance Input (Producing Instance): 100 (64h), This is used to configure and transfer
1 Output (Consuming Instance): 150 (96h), data to/from EtherNetIP module
Configuration Data Instance /size = 0/: 5 (05h), For Anybus FW <1.33 (For FW > 2.00
Input-Only (Heartbeat): 3 (03h), and TTPF SW > 10.8 when Assembly
instance parameter F157 is 1)
Listen-Only (Heartbeat): 4 (04h)
Data to PF total length 0 - 200 bytes* Must be the same in PF and PLC.
Data from PF total length 0 - 200 bytes* Must be the same in PF and PLC.
* The data length is in PF limited to 200 bytes. ModBus/TCP and Ethernet/IP standard allows 1024 bytes data
Fieldbus connectors
The module uses standard Ethernet connector RJ45.
The module uses twisted-pair cables, and no external termination is required.
RJ45 (Standard)
Pin Signal
1 TD+
2 TD-
3 RD+
4 Termination
5 Termination
6 RD-
7 Termination
8 Termination
232 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Status indicators
The module has four status LED’s.
LED State Summary Description

LED 1 - Link Steady Off Not connected Module is not connected to Ethernet
Steady Green Connected Module is connected to Ethernet
LED 2 - Module Status Steady Off No power No power applied to the module
Steady Green Device operational Module is operating correctly
Flashing Green Standby The module has not been configured
Flashing Red Minor fault A minor recoverable fault has been detected
Steady Red Major fault A major internal error has been detected
Flashing Green/Red Self-test The module is performing a power on self test
LED 3 - Network Status Steady Off No power or no IP Module has no power or no IP address
address
Steady Green Connected Module has at least one Ethernet/IP connection
Flashing Green No connections There are no Ethernet/IP connections established
Flashing Red Connection timeout One or more of the connections in which this module
is the target has timed out. This state is only left if all
timed out connections are re-established or if the
module is reset
Steady Red Duplicate IP Module has detected that its IP address is already in
use.
Flashing Green/Red Self-test Module performing a power on self-test.
LED 4 - Activity Flashing Green Active Flashes each time a packet is received or transmitted
15.8.6 Modbus/TCP
Modbus TCP is developed by Modicon, Inc. For more information visit http://www.modbus.org.
Modbus/TCP uses the same hardware as Ethernet/IP. See section Ethernet/IP. The status indicators for
Modbus/TCP are listed in the table below.
LED 1 - Link Steady Off Not connected Module is not connected to Ethernet
Steady green Connected Module is connected to Ethernet
LED 2 - Module Status Flashing green 1 Hz Connected IP address is not set using the configuration switch
Flashing red 1 Hz Major fault Invalid MAC address
Flashing red 2 Hz Major fault Failed to load Ethernet configuration from Flash
memory.
Flashing red 4 Hz Major fault Fatal internal error.
Steady red Minor fault Duplicate IP address detected
9836 3123 01 233 (428)

Fieldbus

LED 3 - Network Status Flashing green Number of The number of flashes on this LED indicates the
connections number of established Modbus/TCP connections to
the module.
LED 4 - Activity Flashing green Package received Each time a packet is received or transmitted.
15.8.7 ControlNet
ControlNetis based on the Control and Information Protocol (CIP), which is also the application layer for
DeviceNet and Ethernet/IP.
The ControlNet module is classified as a ControlNet adapter, i.e., it cannot originate connections on its
own, but a scanner node can open a connection towards it. The module is implemented according to the
ControlNet International specification for a Communication adapter.
ControlNet module is accessible by other nodes via UCMM (unscheduled) messages. Unscheduled
messages are usually used for information such as configuration data.
The module is also equipped with a NAP (Network Access Port) for temporary connection of
configuration tools, e.g., a PC card.
Features
The ControlNet module includes the following features:
 ControlNet adapter
 Network access port (NAP)
 Media redundancy support
 Conforms to communication adapter, profile 12
 MAC ID can be set via onboard switches or application interface
 Up to 450 bytes of I/O data in each direction
 UCMM Client/Server support
 Galvanically isolated bus electronics
 UL & CUL conformance
EDS file
Each device in a ControlNet network is associated with an EDS file, containing information needed for
network configuration. The network configuration tool uses this file during network configuration.
234 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Network Access Port (NAP)

The NAP (Network Access Port) provides temporary access to the ControlNet network for diagnostic and
configuration. (RJ45)
ControlNet channels A & B

The module is equipped with two BNC contacts for connection to ControlNet. If redundant operation is
desired both connectors are used, otherwise connector A or B is used. (BNC)
Mac ID switches (x10 and x1)

On a ControlNet network, each node must be assigned its own unique node address. The module features
on board switches for Mac ID configuration, providing an address range of 1 – 99.
In the example below the Mac ID is set to 42 (4 x 10 + 2 x 1).
Indicators
ControlNet status indicators indicate run time status and errors to the user.
LED Indication State Description
1 Module status Green Connection in run state
Green Flashing Connecting connection idle
Red Major fault
Red Flashing Minor fault
2 and 3 Channel A and Channel B Off Module not initialized
Red Major fault
Alternating red/green Self test
Red Flashing Node configuration error, duplicate Mac ID etc.
2 or 3 Channel A or Channel B Off Channel disabled
Green Normal operation of channel
Green Flashing Temporary error (node will self correct) or not configured
Red Flashing No other nodes, or media fault
Red & Green Flashing Network configuration error
4 Module owned Off No connection has been opened
Green A connection has been opened towards the module
9836 3123 01 235 (428)

Fieldbus
15.8.8 Profinet
The embedded Profinet interface is a complete Profinet solution for a Profinet IO device. All analogue and
digital components that are needed for a complete Profinet IO interface with soft-real time (RT) are
mounted on the module. The module is based on the Siemens Profinet I/O software technology.
The Profinet module works as an I/O-Device on the Profinet network. The module supports up to 512
bytes of IO for both Input and Output data. The module baud rate is 100Mbit/s (full duplex). The IP-
address can be configured either via DHCP (BootP) or DCP. Three diagnostic LEDs continuously indicate
the actual Profinet status and eventually error messages. The module also supports the normal Profinet
Alarm functionality. In the standard version the module uses a normal RJ45 connector for the bus
connection.
Features
 Up to 64 slots / 1 sub slot
 Up to 1024 bytes cyclical I/O (512 input & 512 output)
 2 ms cycle time
236 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Indicators
Led Indication State Description
1 Link/Activity Green Link established
Green flashing Receiving/Transmitting data
Off No link or power off
2 Communication Status Green Online, Run
Connection with IO Controller established
IO Controller is in Run state
Green, 1 flash Online, Stop
Connection with IO Controller established
IO Controller in Stop state
Off Offline
- No connection with IO Controller
3 Module Status Green Initialized, no error
Green, 1 flash Diagnostic data available
Green, 2 flashes Blink, Used by an engineering tool to identify the fieldbus module
Red, 1 flash Configuration Error
Too many modules/sub modules
I/O size derived from IO controller configuration is too large
Configuration mismatch (no module, wrong module)
Red, 3 flashes No device name or no IP address assigned
Red, 4 flashes Internal error
Off No power or not initialized
4 - - -
GSD
On Profinet, the characteristic of a device is stored in an XML data file. This file, referred to as the “GSD”
– file is used by Profibus configuration tool when setting up the network.
Connector
Connector RJ45 standard Ethernet connector is used.
9836 3123 01 237 (428)

Fieldbus
15.8.9 FL-Net
FL-Net is a control network, primarily used for interconnection of devices like PLCs, Robot controllers,
and Numerical Control Devices. FL-NET has both cyclic data and message data. There is no master on a
FL-Net network; a token communication method is used for data transmission.
The FL-Net network is based on IP/UDP broadcast messages.
The module is classified as a “Class 1” FL-Net node as it can both send and receive cyclic data.
PF only transfer cyclic data and only use area 2.
Cyclic transfer
FL-Net has two areas for cyclic data, Area 1 and Area 2. These two memory areas are shared by all nodes
on the network. And every node configures the part of the area it updates.
 Area 1 is 512 words.
 Area 2 is 8192 words.
The cyclic data is mapped to the module I/O area, which maximizes the size of I/O data to 512 bytes in
each direction-for the module.
The time from reception of a token until transmission should not exceed 1.56 ms.
Indicators
Led Indication state description
1 Ethernet Link Green Module is connected to Ethernet
Off No link
2 Error Red Indicates that the unit must be replaced (For example, invalid MAC ID) or Anybus
watchdog in was not updated.
Red, flash Parameter error
Off Normal state
3 Activity (COM) Green No activity
Off Flash green each time a packet is received or transferred
4 FL-Net Link Green Participates in FL-Net
Off No participation
238 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Connector
Connector RJ45 standard Ethernet connector is used.
Address dipswitch
A dipswitch with 8 positions is used to configure the low byte of the IP address.
IP configuration
The IP configuration can be set with DIP switch or mailbox message. Subnet mask is always
255.255.255.0, gateway is not used.
The different IP configuration options (see table below).
Method Description Restriction
Software setting Configure via ToolsTalk PF Software setting overrides the DIP switch.
DIP switch Use 192.168.250.X where X is set with the DIP switch. See Must be set before power on.
RFC 1918.
This is the preferred method for FL-NET.
15.8.10 CC-Link
CC-Link is an open-architecture network managed by the CC-Link Partner Association (CLPA). For more
information visit http://www.cc-link.org
In brief:
 Baud rate can be selected among 156k, 625k, 2.5M, 5M and 10 M.
 Based on RS485 with networks up to 1.2 km, or extended to 13.2 km with repeaters
 64 stations per network
 Refresh time of <3.9mSecs for 65 I/O stations (distance dependent)
 Master/Slave network with Floating Masters and hot swap of stations
Hardware
 Transmission media: shielded 3 line copper wire
 Topology: trunk line, multi drop
 FieldBus connectors: M12, CLPA, D-Sub9
 PF connector: 5 pin DeviceNet/CANopen Open Style Connector
9836 3123 01 239 (428)

Fieldbus
LED #
1. Run
2. Error
3. Receive Data
4. Send Data
Connectors
The PF standard connector is a 5 pin pluggable screw connector (same as for DeviceNet).
Pin Color Code Signal
1 Blue DA Communication line A
2 White DB Communication line B
3 Yellow DG Digital GND
4 SLD Shield
5 FG/PE Frame Ground
Bus termination
When repeater or CC-Link dedicated, high performance 130 Ohm cables are not used connect terminal
resistor (110 Ohm 5% 0,5W) between DA and DB on each edge of the trunk line (CC-Link dedicated 110
Ohm impedance cables should be used).
240 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus

The module is equipped with four bicolour LED’s used for debugging purposes. The function of the
LED’s is described in the table and figure below.
LED Indication State Description

1 Run Off Network non-participating or time out status
Green Normal operation
2 Error Off Normal operation
Red CRC error, wrong station number or wrong baud rate
3 RD Off No data reception
Green Data being received
4 SD Off No data transmission
Green Data being transmitted
Station Number
Station Number is set with the two rotary switches on the FieldBus module; this enables address settings
from 1-64 in decimal form (see switches on the top drawing):
Switch 1 (SW1) digit x10

Switch 2 (SW2) digit x1
9836 3123 01 241 (428)

Fieldbus
Example:
Address = (Left Switch Setting x 10) + (Right Switch Setting x 1)
Left switch is set to 5 and right switch is set to 2. This gives a node address of 52.
If you want to set the node address from TT the switches must be set to 99.
The node address can not be changed when the power is switched on.
The SW1 and SW2 are 2 most right placed!
Baud rate
The baud rate on a CC-Link network is set during configuration of the master and only one baud rate is
possible in a CC-Link installation.
Baud Rate Switch (SW3).This rotary switch is used to specify the baudrate of the module. This can also be
specified by software (TTPF), in this case the switch must be set to ‘9’.
The SW3 is placed to the left of SW1 and SW2!
Pos Bauds rates supported by PF

0 156 kbit/s
1 625 kbit/s
2 2.5 Mbit/s
3 5 Mbit/s
4 10 Mbit/s
9 SW set
CC-Link Configuration
Set node address and baud rate from

If set from “Software” backplane switches SW1 to SW3 should be set all to 9 (9-9-9). When “Hardware”
is selected refer to information in APPENDIX B about configuring switches.
Note: PF reboot is needed after change!
Baud Rate
Baud rate can be selected among 156k, 625k, 2.5M, 5M and 10 M.
242 (428) 9836 3123 01

Fieldbus
Station Number
Station Number can be set from 1 to 64.
CC-Link Version
In CC-Link data is transferred via virtual memory on the network. Each device has deterministic
area in this memory. The minimum area is the 1 station area. One device occupy up to 4 station
memory area for own slave communication. Following diagram shows typical data one station
long:
PF, classified as Remote Device Station can use both RY (bit data) and RWw (word data) for
transfer of To/From PF Data.
Max data size in CC-Link version 1 is 48 bytes, which include 128 bit points (16 bytes) and 16
words (32 bytes) – when taking 4 station memory area.
Max data size in CC-Link version 2 is 368 bytes, which include 896 bit points and 128 words.
But PF limited the max data length to 200 for all the Fieldbus types. The length is depending not
only on number station areas taken but also on number of extension cycles. Max occupied station
is 4 and extension cycles are 8.
Data representation with CC-Link version 1

The module will use the data length defined in TTPF F102 and F103 to determine the number of
occupied stations, actual IO data size used on CC-Link as follow:
Data length Occupied Bit data Word data Description

(in bytes) stations (in bytes) (in bytes)
0 < length ≤ 4 1 s 0 No word data

4 < length ≤ 12 4 length - 4 Word data range 1-8 bytes
9836 3123 01 243 (428)

Fieldbus
12 < length ≤ 24 2 8 length - 8 Word data range 5-16 bytes

48 < length ≤ 200 16 32 Data after 48 bytes not accessible from the bus
Data representation with CC-Link version 2

When using version 2, the module can optionally use an extended number of bus cycles to
exchange larger data size. Note that this feature requires a CC-Link v.2 capable master. The
relation between the occupied stations and the number of extension cycles are defined in the
following table. The PF supported combinations are marked with yellow color.
Occupied 1 Extension Cycles 2 Extension Cycles 4 Extension Cycles 8 Extension Cycles

stations
Points Bytes Data Points Bytes Data Points Bytes Data Points Bytes Data
length length length length
bytes bytes bytes bytes
1 32 bits 4 12 32 bits 4 20 64 bits 8 40 128 bits 16 80
4 words 8 8 words 16 16 32 32 words 64
words
8 words 16 16 32 32 64 64 words 128
words words
12 24 24 48 48 96 96 words 192
words words words
16 32 32 64 64 128 128 256

words words words words
When running version 2, the data length defined in TTPF for F102 or F103 must match the
corresponding data sizes in the table above, otherwise, the module will indicate an error. In this
position data length is selected from drop-down list.
244 (428) 9836 3123 01

Logic Configurator
16 Logic Configurator
The Logic Configurator is a tool to combine and configure process signals coming from the
screw tightening process or from an external device. It is available in the Power Focus 4000
hardware only and is programmed over the ToolsTalk PF interface.
The Logic Configurator consists of up to 8 different so called “Configurator sheets”, each denoted with a
number (1 to 8, automatically chosen) and a name (25 positions, editable).
Each Configurator sheet consists of;
 inputs, i.e., selectable events from the Relay status array and the DigIn status arrays
 instruction list, i.e., logic gate information
 output configuration
Every Logic Configurator circuit instruction list is evaluated every 100 ms which corresponds to a tick or
every time an input status changed.
If one digital input is configured several times, on two IO expanders for instance, the DigIn
function status is the OR result of both digital inputs.
The logical events used for input to the Logic Configurator are of the type tracking or
pulse. The pulse type signals are reset after one tick.
Example 1: OK relay is pulsed after an OK tightening and goes low after 100 ms.
Example 2: Reset batch input is pulsed when activated and goes low after 100 ms.
9836 3123 01 245 (428)

Logic Configurator
16.1 Process description (an example)

When a work piece is positioned, a proximity
switch in the fixture detects its presence. The
work piece is held in position by an air cylinder.
The position work piece fixtured is detected by a
second proximity switch.
When the two proximity switches work piece in
place and work piece fixtured are active, the
tightening operation can begin. After finalizing
the tightening operation, a green lamp lights and
stays lit to indicate the OK result to the operator.
246 (428) 9836 3123 01

Logic Configurator
16.2 Logic operators and function blocks
16.2.1 Logic gates

Symbol Description Input Output
The output signal is HIGH only if both inputs to the gate are HIGH. A B A AND B
If neither or only one of the inputs is HIGH, the output is LOW.
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
The output signal is HIGH if one or both inputs to the gate are HIGH. A B A OR B
If neither of the input is HIGH, the output signal is LOW.
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
The output signal is HIGH if one, and only one of the inputs to the gate is HIGH. A B A XOR B
If both inputs are LOW or both are HIGH, the outputs signal is LOW.
0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
The outputs signal is LOW only if both the inputs to the gate are HIGH. A B A NAND B
If one or both inputs are LOW, the output signal is HIGH.
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
The output signal is HIGH output results if both the inputs to the gate are LOW. A B A NOR B
If one or both input is HIGH, the outputs signal is LOW
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
The outputs signal is HIGH if both inputs to the gate are the same. A B A XNOR B
If one but not both inputs are HIGH, the outputs signal is LOW.
0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
9836 3123 01 247 (428)

Logic Configurator
16.2.2 Function blocks

Symbol Name Description
Flip Flop Reset The Flip Flop gate is also called latch or bi-stable relay
Dominant and acts like a memory. R and S stand for Reset and Set.
(Flip Flop RS) The stored bit is present on the output marked Q1.
If S receives a positive flank (transition low to high) while
R1 is low, then the Q1 output goes high, and stays high
when S returns low.
If R1 goes high while S is low, then the Q1 output goes
low, and stays low when R1 goes inactive.
If S goes high while R1 is high, then the output Q1
remains low since priority is given to the R1 input.
S R1 Q1
0 0 Keep state (memory)
1 0 1
0 1 0
1 1 0 (Reset dominant)
Flip Flop Set Dominant If S1 receives a positive flank while R is low, then the Q1
(Flip Flop SR) output goes high, and stays high when S1 returns low.
If R goes high while S1 is low, then the Q1 output goes
low, and stays low when R returns low.
If R goes high while S1 also is high, then the Q1 output
remains high since priority is given to the S1 input.
S R Q1
1
0 0 Keep state (memory)
1 0 1
0 1 0
1 1 1 (Set dominant)
Delay The Delay is implemented as a shift register. It has a
preset timer (delay time) multiple with the PLC tick.
PT stands for Preset Time and is configurable.
248 (428) 9836 3123 01

Logic Configurator
Timer ON (TON) The output Q is triggered only if the input IN is held high
during at least Present Time (PT). The output Q goes low
when the input IN goes low.
Timer OFF (TOF) Q is triggered every time the input IN receives a positive
flank The output is high during Present Time (PT) after
the input IN has gone low.
Pulse Present Time (PT) corresponds to the pulse ON and OFF

time.
The pulse frequency is equal to f = 1 / (2 * PT) Hz
The output Q is active while the input IN is high.
Timer Pulse (TP) Q is triggered for Present Time (PT) after a positive flank.
Note that if the new input up flanked takes place while Q
is high it will be ignored.
9836 3123 01 249 (428)

Logic Configurator
Timer Pulse Reset (TPR) Q is triggered for Present Time (PT) after a positive flank.
Note that if a new positive flank is received while Q is
high, the “on” timer will be reset and the output will be
held high for a new PT time.
Counter Up (CTU) The CTU has one output Q.

PV is the preset value of the counter i.e. the counter value
to reach for the output to be forced high.
The counter up has a current counter value CV. When CV
is equal to PV the output Q goes high.
CV is incremented after every positive flank of the CU
input
Note that if CV = PV, then CV is not incremented.
CV is reset after a positive flank on the input R.
The output Q is kept high while CV = PV and until R
receives a positive flank
Counter Down (CTD) The CTD has one output Q.

PV is the preset value of the counter i.e. the start value of
the counter.
The counter down has a current counter value CV. When
CV is equal to zero the output Q goes high.
CV is decremented after every positive flank of the CD
input
Note that if CV = 0, CV is not decremented.
CV is reloaded (CV is set equal to PV) after a positive
flank on the input LD.
The output Q is kept high while CV = 0 and until LD
receives a positive flank.
250 (428) 9836 3123 01

Logic Configurator
16.3 Logic Configurator setup

The first step to program the
Logic Configurator is to open
a Configurator sheet.
Right-click Logic
Configurator in the PF Map
and select Create new Logic
Configurator.
ToolsTalk proposes an ID no.

for the new Configurator sheet,
but this can also be chosen by
the user.
Select a name that relates to the
function the Configurator sheet
should have.
Click OK to confirm.
A warning appears.
Click OK.
9836 3123 01 251 (428)

Logic Configurator
A new window appears where the next step is to define the number of inputs for the Configurator sheet.
Click the Set number of inputs key.
252 (428) 9836 3123 01

Logic Configurator
Move the slide bar (or type in the number

directly) to set an input count.
Click OK. A new window appears that shows the
layout of the Configurator sheet with the
selected number of inputs.
Click OK again to reach the setup window.
Now it is time to configure the inputs, outputs
and logical gates.
Let’s start with the inputs. Click on the Input key to select the input event. By selecting Digital input
from the first drop-down menu, the events tied to the inputs of the Power Focus can be reached.
If choosing Digital outputs, the list of events will contain the signals generated in the Power Focus.
9836 3123 01 253 (428)

Logic Configurator
Next, let’s define what the output signal of the Configurator sheet should be used for.
If the output signal should be used as input to another Configurator sheet, or be put out directly on a
physical Relay, no action is required in this window. The output signal from the Configurator sheet is
automatically labeled “Logic Relay #”, where “#” is the number of the Configurator sheet. The signal
“Logic Relay #” is available in the drop-down menu of e.g. the Relay setup window under “Accessories”
in the PF Map.
If the output of the Configurator sheet should be used for other purposes, click on the Output. Then select
up to four events under Trigger digital inputs, or one of the three quick choices (Select Job, Select Pset
and Use text).
Click OK when finished.
254 (428) 9836 3123 01

Logic Configurator
Now the logical grid remains to be set up.

By clicking on the keys in the gate symbol, a drop-down menu showing the logic functions appear.
See table in section Logic gates for a description of the available gates (AND, OR, XOR,
NAND, NOR, XNOR).
See table in section Function blocks for a description of the available functions (Pass, NOT,
Timer, Delay, Flip Flop, Counter).
Select the gate and where applicable, the timer or counter value.
If the depth of the grid (right-to-left) needs to be increased for your functionality, click on the Plus icon to
insert a new level. To reduce the depth of the grid, click the corresponding Minus sign.
9836 3123 01 255 (428)

Logic Configurator
16.3.1 Simulation
The Logic Configurator features an off-line simulator that helps verifying the logical grid. The line at the
lower part of the window is blue and low as long as the input settings and logic gates result in a LOW
output signal. When the inputs and the grid result in a HIGH output signal, the line turns green and alters
to the high position. The transitions up and down of the simulator will shift to the right in the window
due to the time factor.
Correspondingly, the colors of the connections in the logical grid changes color – blue when inactive and
green when active.
Manipulate the simulator input signals by clicking on the switch symbol in the input blocks. One click
will toggle the status of the signal between HIGH and LOW.
Click the Restart simulation key to clear (set zero) all signals.
Click Store to save all settings.
256 (428) 9836 3123 01

Logic Configurator
9836 3123 01 257 (428)

Monitors
17 Monitors
ToolsTalk PF offers various monitors to present real-time information about the processes
that Power Focus is involved in (see the table below).
Result monitor Result monitor displays tightening results and statistics.
Job monitor Job monitor displays Jobs and provides functionality for managing Jobs.
Operator monitor Operator monitor displays tightening result information, also containing graphic representation such as
charts and status indicators.
Picture monitor Picture monitor displays a visual description of the tightening process, suitable for training purposes.
Get all results Get all results displays result information stored in the Power Focus and export possibilities.
Trace Trace displays detailed chart information from the latest tightening.
To open monitors:
 In the main Menu list, select Window > Activate > Result.
 In the PF Map, expand the Monitors branch and double-click on the monitors.
 On the Toolbar, use the drop menu to the right of the Monitor icon.
9836 3123 01 259 (428)

Monitors
17.1 Result Monitor

In the PF Map Monitor branch, double-click on Result Monitor.
The Result Monitor presents the latest tightening results from the Power Focus and the used Pset.
The tightening result includes the Final torque, Final angle, Overall status, Torque chart and Angle chart.
Select between Torque Chart, Angle Chart or Torque/Angle Plot to display results for a unique Pset.
It is possible to display several windows with different views, with a maximum limit of four.
260 (428) 9836 3123 01

Monitors
9836 3123 01 261 (428)

Monitors
17.2 Job Monitor

In the PF Map Monitor branch, double-click on Job Monitor.
Job Monitor displays Jobs and provides functionality for managing
Jobs.
For a function description (Restart Job, Decrement, Increment,
Bypass, Abort Job and Job off) see section Job.
262 (428) 9836 3123 01

Monitors
17.3 Operator Monitor

In the PF Map Monitor branch, double-click on Operator Monitor.
Select Operator Monitor.

Click OK and the monitor appears (see figure and table
below).
9836 3123 01 263 (428)

Monitors
Part Description
PF name Name of PF
Pset Pset used to perform the tightening
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
Overall status Indicator for the overall status of the tightening
Final torque Final torque of the tightening
Final torque status Status-indicator for final torque.
(yellow-low/ green-OK/red-high)
Final angle The final angle of the tightening
Final angle status Status-indicator for the final angle.
(yellow-low/ green-OK/red-high)
Batch The order of the current operation in the batch
Batch order The overall status of the respective operation in the batch
Plot chart Displays the final torque and final angle, relative to the acceptance window
Torque chart Displays the torque as a function of time
Events Warnings and events
264 (428) 9836 3123 01

Monitors
Right-click anywhere in the window to open the Options menu.
Option Description
Activate presentation User preferences for the content of the operator
monitor
Set background Color The option to set the background color of the operator
monitor
Toggle window Maximize or minimize the window
Toggle mouse cursor The mouse is visible or invisible
Set label color Option of setting the label color for the operator
monitor
Choosing Activate Presentation the user customizes the

information shown in the Operator Monitor by checking the
boxes.
Click OK.
9836 3123 01 265 (428)

Monitors
17.3.1 Picture Monitor

The Picture Monitor is a feature that gives the user visual guidance throughout the Job sequence. The next
tightening (Pset) in a running Job can be presented graphically with an image, e.g., a picture of the area
where a bolt is placed.
To open the picture monitor, select Picture Monitor and

click OK.
To edit Picture Monitoring, click Picture Setup.
Click Set Picture and select an image-file using the file
selector window.
The user has the possibility to associate an

image-file with a Pset (available format;
*.jpg”, *.bmp”, *.ico, *.emf and *.wmf).
Select a Pset from the list.
To import saved settings for the picture monitor, click Read from file.
To save the settings click on Store to file. A save as-window appears and the user can choose where to
store the file containing the settings. When finished click OK.
266 (428) 9836 3123 01

Monitors
17.4 Identifier Monitor

In the PF Map Monitor branch, double-click on Identifier Monitor.
Identifier monitor displays the status (accepted/not accepted) of
the identifier included in the Work order and Optional identifier
(not included in work order). For more information, see section
Identifier.
In the example below, all Identifier input sources are

set to “Ethernet/serial”.
9836 3123 01 267 (428)

Monitors
Bypass identifier Skips a specified identifier type in a work order.
If a type is not included in the work order, bypassing the first type in the work order is not possible.
Reset latest identifier The latest accepted identifier string is cleared with the command (or digital input) Reset latest identifier.
It is not possible to perform Reset latest identifier for the last type in a work order.
Reset all identifier All accepted identifier strings are cleared with the command (or digital input) Reset all identifiers.
17.5 Get all results

Power Focus can store up to 5000 individual tightening results. With the Get all results option, the user is
able to retrieve and view these. The user also has the choice of saving them to a text file or an Excel file.
In the Toolbar, select Get all results.
268 (428) 9836 3123 01

Monitors
Choose a specific Pset or

Multistage and click OK.
The tightening results from that Pset/Multistage appear. Picking up data takes some time depending on
the type of connection and the number of results.
By choosing Save to file the results are saved into a text file.
The user can also choose to open and view the results in Microsoft Excel by selecting Open in Excel.
This, of course, requires a properly installed version of Microsoft Excel.
9836 3123 01 269 (428)

Monitors
270 (428) 9836 3123 01

Trace
18 Trace
ToolsTalk PF provides a Trace function designed to present extensive information about the
tightenings.
There are three different ways to open the Trace monitor:

 In the PF Map, and double-click Trace.
 In the main Menu list, select Window > Activate > Trace.
 Click the Trace icon on the Toolbar.
18.1 The trace window

Select which type of chart to view; Torque over time, Angle over time, Speed over time, Torque and angle
over time, Torque over angle, Torque and Speed over time.
Press Scale limits to configure the axis according to preference.

With Angle offset selected, Trace shows graph from the P120 Start final angle torque value i.e. the Angle
axis is set to zero according to the P120 value. Traces that are below this value are shown in grey color. If
deselected, Trace shows graph from P110 Cycle start torque value.
With Envelop selected, the sample spread between traces is shown. Envelop is made of two traces; one
made of the maximum sample values and one with the minimum sample values taken from all displayed
traces.
9836 3123 01 271 (428)

Trace
With Auto update selected, the charts are automatically updated as new tightening data arrives. If
deselected, the user can choose which trace to view.
The Limits function allows the user to customize the limits in the chart.
History settingsmake it possible to view previous OK/ NOK traces. To view History set the Index
according to the number of the trace that should be displayed and press Get. E.g. Index 2 results in that the
second last OK/ NOK trace is displayed. The number of stored traces is limited by C607 No. of Traces.
There are two alternatives for saving traces from this window; saving the active trace or saving all traces.
Note that from the File menu it is also possible to print the latest trace as it is shown in the window, or
print all types of charts for the latest trace.
Zooming in to a smaller part of the chart is done by selecting an area (i.e. clicking the mouse button
somewhere in the chart, moving the cursor down and to the right, and releasing the mouse button).
Unzooming is done by clicking the mouse button and moving it up to the left before releasing it.
272 (428) 9836 3123 01

Trace
9836 3123 01 273 (428)

Statistic
19 Statistics
Power Focus has extensive statistics functionality. The values are updated after each tightening, and can
be shown on the display in real time, or sent to a PC. It is also possible to send statistical reports to a
printer. On the front panel of PF there is a LED for statistical alarms.
Settings are made in PF Map>Pset>Statistic Programming. Statistics are calculated based on the following
result parameters:
Result Unit Description
Torque Nm* Final torque in selected tq presentation unit.
Angle Deg Final angle in degrees.
* = Other units can be used.

The following statistical results are calculated and displayed for torque and angle parameters:
Results Description
# Results Total number of results that the stat calculations are based on for the analyzed Pset.
Min Lowest result in analyzed Pset
Max Highest result in analyzed Pset
R Range (Max - Min)
Low % low tightenings in analyzed Pset
OK % OK tightenings in analyzed Pset
High % high tightenings in analyzed Pset
The mean value for the selected Pset
X
σ Sigma. Shows the calculated standard deviation. σ
Mean - 3 sigma
X -3 σ
Mean + 3 sigma
X +3 σ
6σ 6 sigma
Cr Cr is a calculated viability number (capability). The lower the value, the better the process.
Cp Cp is a viability factor. The higher the value the better process.
Cpk Cpk is a viability factor. The higher the value the better process.
Cam Viability factor. The higher the value the better the process.
Sub-group Description
results
Min Lowest result in the latest completed subgroup
Max Highest result in the latest completed subgroup
R Range for the latest completed subgroup
9836 3123 01 275 (428)

Statistic
Sub-group Description
results
Mean value for the latest completed subgroup
x
σ Sigma for the latest completed subgroup
Other definitions Description
Mean of subgroup range (number of subgroups)
R
Mean of subgroup mean (number of subgroups)
X
In order to rapidly detect changes in the process, Power Focus is equipped with a number of statistical
alarm limits based on the x and R calculations for torque and angle.
Statistical Process Control (SPC) functions are used on torque and angle.
All calculations are performed on the Pset that the tool is currently running with.
If any of the following criteria are true, then the stat alarm is lit and a relay (if used) is activated. The tool
may still run even if an alarm is issued. The alarm is only a warning. The alarm signals remain active until
the process falls within all limits again or the result memory is cleared. This means that the alarm does not
switch off during tightening.
19.1 Statistic alarm

x > UCL
x < LCL
R > UCL
R < LCL
Cp < 2.0
Cpk < 1.33
SPC x and R compared with LCL / UCL alarms cannot function until the LCL and UCL have been
programmed.
276 (428) 9836 3123 01

Statistic
19.2 Trend deviation alarm

Trend deviation check and alarm are measured and compared against X-bar and the range for the currently
used Pset.
7 points consecutively increasing
7 points consecutively decreasing
7 points consecutively above average ( X and / or R )
7 points consecutively below average ( X and / or R )
1 point outside X or R  2 sigma (sigma for the whole population)

Point = subgroup
The mean is the average of x and r X and R ). This means that the SPC trend alarms cannot function until
the number of tightenings in the memory corresponds with the user-specified number of subgroup
parameters.
19.3 Calculation of UCL and LCL

Power Focus calculates recommended values for UCL and LCL. The operator can then choose if he wants
to use these values or enter another value.
Subgroup size, Subgroup frequency and number of subgroups parameters are used in the calculations.
19.4 Calculation of mean values

Power Focus calculates the mean values X and R . The operator can then choose if he wants to use these
values or enter another value. Sub group size, subgroup frequency and number of subgroups parameters
are used in the calculations.
9836 3123 01 277 (428)

Statistic
19.5 Calculation formulas

When a stat display is requested, the whole memory is calculated. This is also done when shifting Pset.
Power Focus controls the lowest and highest values. If some of these drop out from memory once it is full
(first in – first out), the entire memory is recalculated.
The formula for group range is calculated after each completed subgroup.
The formulas for the statistic parameters used by Power Focus:
 X i = value
 n = number of tightenings
 Min = minimum value from all the tightenings in the Power Focus memory
 Max = maximum value from all the tightenings in the Power Focus memory
 minl = minimum acceptable value
 maxl = maximum acceptable value
Range  R  Max  Min
1 n 
Mean  X    Xi 
n  i 1 
1  n 2  2
  s n 1    i
 X   nx 
n  1  i 1  
6* 
CR 
Maxl  Minl
Maxl  Minl
CP 
6* 
 Maxl  X X  Minl 
CPK  min 
3 *  
,
 3 *
Tightenings
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5
X6 X7 X8 X9 X 10
278 (428) 9836 3123 01

Statistic
Xi X i 1 X i  2 X i 3 X i  4
X i  5 X i  6 X i  7 X i 8 X i  9
X i 10 X i 11 X i 12 X i 13 X i 14
X i ...
A subgroup is a group of tightenings. Subgroup size is freely programmable and in the example above it is
set to 5, which means that all values in the same group range from i to i+4.
X-bar is the calculated average of the last completed subgroup.
Subgroup size = Group size = z
Grouprange  Wn  max[ X i 1 , X i  2 , , , , X i  z ]  min[ X i 1 , X i 1 , , , , X i  z ]

Wn1  max[ X i  z 1 , X i  z  2 , , , , X i  2 z ]  min[ X i  z 1 , X i  z  2 , , , , X i  2 z ]
n
W
j  n 5
j
W 
6
1.746(max l  min l )
CAM 
6 *W
The formula for CAM is calculated using the first 6 subgroups. After that, a new calculation is made using
each completed subgroup in conjunction with the last 6 subgroups.
1 n 
X   xi
n  i 1 
1 n 
R  ri
n  i 1 
XUCL  X   A2  R 
XLCL  X   A2  R 
RUCL  D4  R
RLCL  D3  R
9836 3123 01 279 (428)

Statistic
A2 , D3 and D4 are tabular constants and depend on the subgroup size.
19.6 Constants for calculation of SPC variables

Sub group Divisors for Factors for control limits
size estimation of
standard div.
N D2 C4 A2 D3 D4 A3 B3 B4
2 1.13 0.798 1.88 - 3.27 2.66 - 3.27
3 1.69 0.886 1.02 - 2.57 1.95 - 2.57
4 2.06 0.921 0.73 - 2.28 1.63 - 2.27
5 2.33 0.940 0.58 - 2.11 1.43 - 2.09
6 2.53 0.952 0.48 - 2.00 1.29 0.03 1.97
7 2.70 0.959 0.42 0.08 1.92 1.18 0.12 1.88
8 2.85 0.965 0.37 0.14 1.86 1.10 0.19 1.82
9 2.97 0.969 0.34 0.18 1.82 1.03 0.24 1.76
10 3.08 0.973 0.31 0.22 1.78 0.98 0.28 1.72
11 3.17 0.975 0.29 0.26 1.74 0.93 0.32 1.68
12 3.26 0.978 0.27 0.28 1.72 0.89 0.35 1.65
13 3.34 0.979 0.25 0.31 1.69 0.85 0.38 1.62
14 3.41 0.981 0.24 0.33 1.67 0.82 0.41 1.59
15 3.47 0.982 0.22 0.35 1.65 0.79 0.43 1.57
16 3.53 0.984 0.21 0.36 1.63 0.76 0.45 1.55
17 3.59 0.985 0.20 0.38 1.62 0.74 0.47 1.53
18 3.64 0.985 0.19 0.39 1.61 0.72 0.48 1.52
19 3.69 0.986 0.19 0.40 1.60 0.69 0.50 1.50
20 3.74 0.987 0.18 0.42 1.59 0.68 0.51 1.49
21 3.78 0.988 0.17 0.42 1.58 0.66 0.52 1.48
22 3.82 0.988 0.17 0.43 1.57 0.65 0.53 1.47
23 3.86 0.989 0.16 0.44 1.56 0.63 0.55 1.46
24 3.90 0.989 0.16 0.45 1.55 0.62 0.56 1.45
25 3.93 0.990 0.15 0.46 1.54 0.61 0.57 1.44
280 (428) 9836 3123 01

Quick reference guide
20 Quick reference guide

Use this appendix in conjunction with as a reference guide when programming the Power Focus. A more
general description of the tightening and control strategies available can be found in the previous chapters.
A joint is regarded as hard if α (clamping angle) is small, and soft if α is

large. There is no limit, but test standards define α < 30 as hard. The
dynamic effects on tightening increase dramatically if angles go down
substantially (approximately 15).
On the following pages, different control and monitoring strategies are calculated. Study the graphs and
the parameters that need to be set. Note that the graphs are presented schematically, which means that
programming results may look different compared to the graph.
9836 3123 01 281 (428)

20.1 Tq con
20.1.1 One stage
282 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.1.2 Two stage
9836 3123 01 283 (428)

20.1.3 Quick step
284 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.1.4 Ergo ramp
9836 3123 01 285 (428)

20.2 Tq con/ang mon
20.2.1 One stage
286 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.2.2 Two stage
P120 Start final angle
9836 3123 01 287 (428)

20.2.3 Quick step
288 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.2.4 Ergo ramp
P137 Ergo ramp

9836 3123 01 289 (428)

20.3 Tq con/ang con (AND) and Tq con/ang con (OR)
20.3.1 One stage
290 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.3.2 Two stage
9836 3123 01 291 (428)

20.3.3 Quick step
292 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.3.4 Ergo ramp
P137 Ergo ramp

9836 3123 01 293 (428)

20.4 Ang con/tq mon
20.4.1 One stage
294 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.4.2 Two stage
9836 3123 01 295 (428)

20.4.3 Quick step
296 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.4.4 Ergo ramp
P137 Ergo ramp

9836 3123 01 297 (428)

20.5 Reverse ang
298 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.6 Rotate spindle forward and Rotate spindle reverse
9836 3123 01 299 (428)

20.7 Home position forward and reverse
300 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.8 DS con
20.8.1 One stage

This strategy is not available in DS control.
20.8.2 Two stage
P120 Start final

angle
9836 3123 01 301 (428)

20.8.3 Quick step
P120 Start final

angle
302 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.8.4 Ergo ramp
9836 3123 01 303 (428)

20.9 Snug gradient
20.9.1 One stage
304 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.9.2 Two stage
9836 3123 01 305 (428)

20.9.3 Quick step
306 (428) 9836 3123 01

Digital I/O and fieldbus items
21 Digital I/O and fieldbus items

The following sections list the digital inputs and outputs (relays) and the fieldbus items.
21.1 Digital output (relay) and fieldbus items from PF

In this section follows a description of the possible items to select when data menu from the Power Focus
is configured.
For fieldbus: Set signal = a signal to set a bit/byte/bytes in the PLC. Reset signal = a signal to reset a
bit/byte/bytes in the PLC.
Fieldbus items Duration Tensor ST/SL
TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Name Description String Set signal
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
length / Reset signal
To next
Time
Alarm Follow the Alarm 1 bit 0 = Off Alarm on X X X X
light on the PF 1 = On / Alarm off
front.
Angle Status Angle result. 1 byte O = OK Tightening result
status ASCII L = Low / Start new
character H = High tightening or new
Pset selected or
2 bits 00 = Not used
new Job selected
BF 01 = OK
10 = High
11 = Low
Angle Angle result is 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result
status above max limit. 1 = High / Start new
HIGH tightening or new
Pset selected or
new Job selected
status below min limit. 1 = Low / Start new
LOW tightening or new
Pset selected or
new Job selected
9836 3123 01 307 (428)

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
status OK within limits. 1 = OK / Start new
tightening or new
Pset selected or
new Job selected
Batch done Indicate batch 1 bit 0 = Not Batch finished / X X X X X X
finished. Batch completed Reset result
done OK or NOK. 1 = Done
Batch Batch OK (done) or 1 byte O = OK Tightening result
status NOK ASCII N = NOK / Start new
character tightening or new
2 bits 00 = Not used Pset selected or
new Job selected
BF 01 = OK
10 = NOK
Batch Batch is NOK. 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result
status NOK 1 = NOK / Start new
tightening or new
Pset selected or
new Job selected
Batch Batch is OK 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result
status OK (nxOK). 1 = OK / Start new
(nxOK) tightening or new
Pset selected or
new Job selected
Battery Indicates tool 1 bit 0 = Not used Tool battery empty X X X X
empty battery empty 1 = Battery / no signal
empty
Battery low Indicates tool 1 bit 0 = Not used Tool battery low / X X X X
battery low 1 = Battery low no signal
Calibration Calibration date 1 bit 0 = Off Calibration date X X X X
alarm expired. New date 1 = On expired / Reset or
to be entered. set a new
calibration date
Channel ID Gives the channel 2 - 8 bits in 0000 0001=CH PF ready and
ID number on the the same 1 channel ID
fieldbus Power byte 0001 0000=CH programmed in
Focus. BF 16 config / No signal
308 (428) 9836 3123 01

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
16 bits in 00….0001=CH
one word 1
U16 00….1000=CH
8
Channel Shows C311 16-200 bits Channel name
name Channel name CSC, CSCI stored in controller
set / No signal
Current Indicates tightening 2 – 8 bits Integer number Tighten result /
result final current BF Tighten started or
in percent (%). Pset Selected or
16 bits Integer number
Job selected
U16
Completed BF Batch Counter
batch U16 Changed / No
signal
Completed Display currently completed batch. X
batch bit
(0-6)
Cycle abort Display cycle 1 bit 0 = Not used Cycle Abort / Reset X X X
aborted by cycle 1 = Cycle abort result
abort timer expired
Cycle Indicates that a 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening done / X X X X X
complete tightening is 1 = Cycle Start new tightening
finished. Do not complete or new Pset
care about the selected or new Job
result. selected
Cycle start Indicate cycle 1 bit 0 = Not used Cycle start / Start X X
started. 1 = Cycle started new tightening
DigIn# # = Mimic the status on 1 bit 0 = Input Off DigIn # X On /
1-4 a DigIn in Power 1 = Input On DigIn # X Off
Focus or I/O
Expander. The
input must be
configured to
fieldbus DigIn # X.
There are four
different items.
DigIn Controlled by 1 bit 0 = DigIn bit DigIn control1Set / X X X X
controlled DigOut monitored 1 reset Reset
# 1-4 – 4 To PF 1 = DigIn bit set
9836 3123 01 309 (428)

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Dir switch Indicates tool 1 bit 0 = Ring CCW Ring CW / Ring X X X X
CW Switch is in CW 1 = Ring CW CCW
direction.
Dir switch Indicates tool 1 bit 0 = Ring CW Ring CCW / Ring X X X X
CCW Switch is in CCW 1 = Ring CCW CW
direction.
Direction Direction alert is active X
alert
Disabled Mimic the status on a 1 bit 0 = Enabled Disable FB Job
FB job digital input Disable Job status Status / Enable FB
status FB Job status in 1 = Disabled Job status
Power Focus or I/O Job status
Expander.
Dset Shows the tool 4 bytes See Item Dset data / No signal
calibration calibration value in fixed Final Torque.
value selected engineering point
units.
Effective Set when the Power Focus reaches the minimum loosening torque X X X X X
loosening (defined in % of tool max torque).
Enable The relay enable scanner is set when the tool trigger is pressed during tool X X X X X
scanner locked condition, and if no job is running.
Error code Shows event code. 2 bytes Binary Event occurs / Event X X
U16 representatio acknowledge or time
n out
(Decimal 0-
65535)
External Relay controlled by external source outside Power Focus. X
controlled
1-10
Fieldbus Indicates fieldbus signals disable. X
carried
signals
disabled
Fieldbus Indicates handshake 1 bit 0 = Not used Handshake set /
handshake from PLC received 1 = Handshake Handshake reset
ack by Power Focus.
Fieldbus When fieldbus goes offline the light on this bit turns off. X X X X
offline
Fieldbus Relays controlled from fieldbus. X X X X
relay 1-4
310 (428) 9836 3123 01

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Final angle Final angle result. 2 byte Binary Tightening done /
U16 representation Start new tightening
(Decimal 0-65 or new Pset
535) selected or new Job
selected
Final angle Indicate final angle bit Final Angle Start /
start started. Cycle Completed
Final Final torque result. 4 byte The value is 2 Tightening done /
torque digits if torque Start new tightening
value is less than or new Pset
100, one digit if selected or new Job
100 <= torque selected
value < 1000 and
0 if torque value
>= 1000. For
example, if
torque value is
25.64, the two
byte integer part
shows 25 and the
two byte decimal
part shows 64; if
torque value is
345.5, the integer
part shows 345
and decimal part
shows 5; if
torque value is
2431, the integer
part shows 2431
and decimal part
shows 0. The
value is
represented in
the selected
engineering units
in the Power
Focus.
Function Function button pressed. X X X X
button
Function Function button pressed acknowledge. X X X X X
button ack.
High Any result is above any of the programmed max limits. X X X X X
9836 3123 01 311 (428)

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
High angle Angle result is higher than max angle limit. X X X X X
High Current status is high. X X X X X
current
High PVT PVT monitoring is high X X X X X
monitoring
High PVT PVT selftap is high X X X X X
selftap
High Rundown angle is high X X X X X
rundown
angle
High Torque result is higher than max torque limit. X X X X X
torque
Home Indicates that the 1 bit 0 = Not used Socket in home X X X
position socket has reached 1 = Home position / Start new
the position set by position tightening
digital input Set
home position, or
an Open end head
in open position.
Identifier An identifier with 1 bit 0 = not used Identifier identified X X X X X
identified / Type 1, 2, 3, 4 has 1 = identified / Start new
Identifier been entered in tightening
recognized correct order and
has been accepted
by the system logic.
Identifier Shows an identifier, 16 – 800 Max 100 char in Multi identifier
multi Max length 100 bits a string selected / No signal
bytes. CC
16 – 800 Max 100 char
CSCI
Identifier Show identifier 16 – 200 Max 25 char Tighten result /
result part result part, witch in bits Start new tightening
A-D each tightening CSC
result.
Identifier An identifier with 1 bit Received identifier X X X X X
type # Type 1, 2, 3, 4 has type / Bypass
# = 1-4 been entered in identifier / Reset
Received correct order and latest Identifier /
has been accepted Reset all identifier
by the system logic.
312 (428) 9836 3123 01

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Identifier Becomes active X X X X X X
received when an identifier
is sent to the PF,
regardless of the
source of the
identifier (RS232,
field bus, keyboard
etc.)
Illuminator Echo tool 1 bit 0 = Led off Light on / light off X X X X
illuminator LED. 1 = Led on
Job done Job OK (done) or 1 byte O =OK Job done or reset /
status NOK (done) or ASCII N = NOK Start new tightening
aborted (reset). character A = Aborted or new Job selected

BF 01 = OK
10 = NOK
11 = Aborted
Job done Shows Job aborted. 1 bit 0 = Not used Job aborted / Start X X X X X
status job 1 = Job aborted new tightening or
aborted / new Job selected
Job aborted
Job done Job is NOK (Not all 1 bit 0 = Not used Job done / Start X X X X X
status NOK tightening OK). 1 = NOK new tightening or
/ Job NOK new Job selected
Job done Job is OK (nxOK) 1 bit 0 = Not used Job done / Star new X X X X X
status OK 1 = OK tightening or new
(nxOK) / Job selected
Job OK
Job off Job is in Off mode; 1 bit 0 = Job on Job off / Job on X X X X
1: Job Off; 0: Job 1= Job off
On.
Job running A Job is selected 1 bit 0 = Job done and Job selected / Job X X X X
and “running”. no Job selected done
1 = Job is
running
Keep alive Indicates fieldbus 2 - 8 bits 00000000 = 0 Keep alive value
ack communication in the 11111111 = 255 changed / No signal
alive, which sends same byte
back the save value BF
received from PLC.
9836 3123 01 313 (428)

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Lifted Indicates which 16 bits Byte 0=Device Socket lifted /
socket socket is lifted. OA ID socket back to
number Byte 1=lifted position
socket number, if
255=more than
one socket lifted
Line Indicates Line 1 bit 0 = Not used Line control alerted X X X X X X
control control alert 1 1 = Line control 1 / Start new
alerted 1 received by Power alerted 1 tightening
Focus.
Line Indicates Line 1 bit 0 = Not used Line control alerted X X X X X X
control control alert 2 1 = Line control 2 / Start new
alerted 2 received by Power alerted 2 tightening
Focus.
Line Indicates Job with 1 bit 0 = Not used Line control done / X X X X X
control line control finished 1 = Line control Start new tightening
done before line control done
alert2 input.
Line Indicates that 1 bit 0 = Line control Line control start X X X X
control Power Focus start reset bit set / Line control
start ack received Line 1 = Line control start bit reset
control start. start
Line Indicates line 1 bit 0 = Not used Line control started X X X X X
control control start set in 1 = Line control / Start new
started Power Focus. start tightening
Activate with J330
set to Yes.
Lock at Indicate tool locked 1 bit 0 = Not used Lock at batch done X X X X
batch done at batch done which 1 = Tool locked / Unlock tool
is activated by P152
Logic relay The result of a logic configuration with the corresponding number. X X X X
1-10 (PF4000 only.)
Loosening Loosening function currently disabled. X X X X
disabled
Low Any result is below any of the programmed min limits. X X X X X
Low angle Angle result is lower than min angle limit. X X X X X
Low Current status is low. X X X X X
current
314 (428) 9836 3123 01

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Low PVT PVT monitoring is low X X X X X
monitoring
Low PVT PVT selftap is low X X X X X
selftap
Low Rundown angle is low X X X X X
rundown
angle
Low torque Torque result is lower than min torque limit. X X X X X
Max Indicates Max 1 bit 0 = Not used Max NOK reached / X X X X X X
coherent coherent NOK 1 = Max NOK Reset NOK counter
NOK tightening counter reached
reached value is reached
Motor Motor tuning function currently disabled. X X X X
tuning
disabled
N x OK Batch OK. X X X X X
Only available in the Job function.
N x NOK Batch status NOK. X X X X X
Necking X X X X X
failure
New Job Indicates a new Job is 1 bit 0 = Not used New Job Selected / X X X X X
selected selected JobID>0 1 = New Job Start new tightening
New Pset Indicates a new Pset 1 bit 0 = Not used New Pset Selected / X X X X X
selected is selected PsetID>0 1 = New Pset Start new tightening
Next tight Indicates that PF started a new tightening. X X X X
No tool Indicates controller 1 bit 0 = Not used Controller has no X X
connected has no connection 1 = Tool connection with tool
with tool connected / no signal
NOK Any result is above or below any of the programmed max or min limits, or X X X X X
some other not approved result such as rehit.
Off Output is not used.
OK All results are within the specified limits. X X X X X
Open End Open End function currently disabled X X X X
tuning
disabled
9836 3123 01 315 (428)

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Open Set when the Open Protocol Commands DigIn has been activated. In this X X X X
protocol case all the commands that the Power Focus can receive via Open
commands Protocol are disabled.
disable
Open Indicates 1 bit 0=connected Open protocol X X X X
protocol connection with 1=disconnected disconnected /
conn lost open protocol lost. Open protocol
connected
PF ready No severe errors in 1 bit 0=Errors in PF PF ready (no errors) X X X X
PF. 1=No errors in / PF not ready
PF (errors)
PIN code A PIN code entered on the RFID card reader has been validated by the X
OK Power Focus.
Positioning Positioning function currently disabled. X X X X
disabled
Power ON Indicates that PF is power supplied. X
Pset final Shows Pset 2 bytes Binary New Pset selected
angle min / parameters from the U16 representation or updated / No
Pset final running Pset. Pset (Decimal 0- signal. On until
angle max / step1 speed / Pset 65535) new Pset is selected
Pset step1 step2 speed shown or current Pset
speed / Pset in percentage of updated
step2 max speed or rpm
speed/ Pset depending on P139
rundown Speed unit.
angle min/
Pset
rundown
angle max.
Pset final Shows Pset 4 bytes See Item New Pset selected
target / Pset parameters from the Fixed point Final Torque. or updated / No
final torque running Pset in signal. On until
min / Pset selected new Pset is selected
final torque engineering units. or current Pset
max / Pset updated
start final
angle
316 (428) 9836 3123 01

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Pset Target Show Pset 2 bytes New Pset selected
Angle parameter P123 U16 or updated / No
Target angle. signal. On until
new Pset is selected
or current Pset
updated
PVT Indicates PVT 4 bytes 2 bytes Tightening result /
compensate compensate Fixed point integer part Start new
and 2 bytes tightening or new
decimal part Pset selected or
new Job selected
PVT mon Status on one of the 1 byte ASCII O = OK Tightening result /
status / Run result parameters character L = Low Start new
down angle PVT mon, H = High tightening or new
status / Rundown angle, Pset selected or
PVT PVT selftap or 2 bits 00 = Not used new Job selected
selftap Current. BF 01 = OK
status / 10 = High
Current 11 = Low
status
PVT mon Result is above max 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result /
status limit. There are 1 = High Start new
HIGH / three different tightening or new
Run down variables in the Pset selected or
angle status setup. new Job selected
HIGH /
PVT
selftap
status
HIGH /
Current
status
HIGH
9836 3123 01 317 (428)

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
PVT mon Result is below min 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result /
status limit. There are 1 = Low Start new
LOW / Run three different items tightening or new
down angle in the setup. Pset selected or
status new Job selected
LOW /
PVT
selftap
status
LOW /
Current
status
LOW
PVT mon A result is within 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result /
status OK / limits. There are 1 = OK Start new
Run down three different tightening or new
angle status variables in the Pset selected or
OK / PVT setup. new Job selected
selftap
status OK /
Current
status OK
Read result Handles read result 1 byte 0 = Not used Result is in the
Handshake BF 1 = Read queue or Readresult
ack 2 = Skip Handshake is set in
4 = Flush To PF / No signal
8 = Result
data in queue
Received Indicates identifier 1 bit 0 = Not used Received identifier X X X X
identifier has been received 1 = Received / Start new
by PF. identifier tightening
Rehit Indicates tool is 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result / X X X X X
rehit 1 = Rehit Reset result
Remaining Display currently BF Batch Counter
batch remaining batch U16 Changed / No
signal
Remaining Display currently remaining Batch. Batch Counter 1 to 99 can be X
batch bit 0- displayed. “0” means that there is no remaining batch counter (batch is
6 completed).
318 (428) 9836 3123 01

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Result type Shows what type of 2 – 8 bits 1 to 13 is defined Tighten result /
result is, i.e. BF for the different Reset result
tightening result, result type
loosening result and
so on.
Ring button Ring button pressed 1 bit 0 = Not used Ring Button
ack acknowledge. 1 = New Pset Pressed / Start new
tightening
Rundown Show Result 2 bytes Tightening result /
Angle Rundown angle U16 Start new tightening
or new Pset
selected or new Job
selected
Running Running Job 2 - 8 bits 0000 0001 = Job Job selected / Job
job ID identification in the 1 done
number. same byte 0001 0000 = Job
BF 16
16 bits in 00….0001 = Job
one word 1
U16 00….1000 = Job
8
Running Shows selected Job. Bit pattern analogue to input Job select bits. X
Job bit 0-8 0 = no running Job.
Running Running Pset 2 - 8 bits in 0000 0001 = Pset selected / No
Pset ID identification the same Pset 1 signal. On until new
number. byte 0001 0000 = Pset is selected
BF Pset 16
16 bits in 00….0001 =
one word Pset 1
U16 00….1000 =
Pset 8
Running Shows selected Pset. Bit pattern analogue to input Pset select bits. X
Pset bit 0-9 0 = no Pset selected, tool locked.
Running Shows running Pset 2 - 8 bits 0000 0001=Pset2 Pset selected / No
Pset ID 0 is and Pset number is in the 0001 0000=Pset signal. On until new
1 bit field number +1, same byte 17 Pset is selected
i.e. 00 is Pset 1. BF
9836 3123 01 319 (428)

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Safe to 1 bit Ack for Disconnect tool X
disconnect disconnect tool allowed / Done
tool request from
fieldbus.
Sent Indicates which 2 bytes Integer value Result is sent to
tightening tightening result is U16 PLC / No signal
ID sent to PLC.
Selected Indicates selected 1 bit 0 = Not used Prompt selected X X X
channel in channel in a forced 1 = Selected channel / Cancel
Job order Cell Job. channel prompt channel
Selector Indicates the socket 16 bits Byte 0=Device Socket lifted /
socket info status on a selector OA ID socket back to
Byte 1=lifted position
socket position
Selector Indicates selector 32 bits Byte 0 = device Select Led or
info socket and LED OA ID socket changed /
information. Byte 1=lift sock No signal
no.
Byte 2, 3
=selector LED
Service Indicates that the 1 bit 0 = Alarm Off Service indicator X X X X
indicator number of 1 = Alarm On alarm on / Reset
alarm / tightenings in the counter
Service tool memory has
indicator reached the service
interval limit.
Start Used to let the tool trigger or the external tool start trigger control X X
trigger Illuminator. This relay function is available for Illuminator only.
active
Stat alarm Echo display stat 1 bit 0 = Off Stat alarm On / Stat X X X X X
LED. 1 = On alarm Off
Sync A result from a 1 bit 0 = Not used Sync tightening
channel# Sync channel. 1 = green / red / result / Start new
Green/Red/ Follow tool light. yellow tightening or new
Yellow There are 30 (3x10) Pset selected or
LED # = 1- different items in new Job selected
10 the setup.
320 (428) 9836 3123 01

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Sync ch1 Indicate Sync 2 bits 00 = Not used Sync tightening
status /..../ channel XX result BF 01 = Sync result / Start new
Sync ch10 status. Channel OK tightening or new
status 10 = Sync Pset selected or
Channel OK new Job selected
8 bits O = Sync
character Channel OK
N = Sync
Channel NOK
Sync ch1 Indicates Sync 1 bit 0 = Not used Sync tightening X X X X X
status NOK channel XX result 1 = Sync result / Start new
/.../ sync status NOK. Channel NOK tightening or new
ch10 status Pset selected or
NOK new Job selected
/ Sync
spindle (1-
10) NOK
Sync ch1 Indicates Sync 1 bit 0 = Not used Sync Tightening X X X X X
status OK channel XX result 1 = Sync result / Start new
/…/ Sync status OK. Channel OK tightening or new
ch10 status Pset selected or
OK new Job selected
/ Sync
spindle (1-
10) OK
Sync total Indicates Sync total 2 bits 00 = Not used Sync Tightening
status result status. BF 01 = Sync Total result / Start new
Status OK tightening or new
10 = Sync Total Pset selected or
Status NOK new Job selected
8 bits O = Sync Total

character Status OK
N = Sync Total
Status NOK
Sync total Indicates Sync total 1 bit 0 = Not used Sync tightening X X X X X
status NOK result status NOK. 1 = Sync Total result / Start new
/ Sync Status NOK tightening or new
NOK Pset selected or
new Job selected
9836 3123 01 321 (428)

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Sync total Indicates Sync total 1 bit 0 = Not used Sync tightening X X X X X
status OK / result status OK. 1 = Sync Total result / Start new
Sync OK Status OK tightening or new
Pset selected or
new Job selected
Tightening Tightening date 80 bit (10 I.e. 2000:05:07 Tightening result /
date taken from the most characters ( 10 ASCII Start new tightening
recent result. / bytes) characters) or new Pset
Format CSC selected or new Job
YYYY:MM:DD selected
80 bits I.e. 70:50:0002
CSCI ( from right to
left)
Tightening The tightening date 16 bit 1 – 31 Tightening result /
date day (day part only) (one Start new tightening
taken from the most word) or new Pset
recent result. U16 selected or new Job
selected
Tightening The tightening date 16 bit 1 – 12 Tightening result /
date month (month part only) (one Start new tightening
selected
Tightening The tightening date 16 bit Year number 4 Tightening result /
date year (year part only) (one digits Start new tightening
selected
Tightening Tightening function currently disabled. X X X X
disabled
Tightening Combined status for 1 byte OK = O Tightening result /
status all tightening result ASCII NOK = N Start new
parameters that are Character tightening or new
used. Pset selected or
new Job selected
BF 01 = OK
10 = NOK
Tightening Indicate tightening 1 bit 0 = Not used Tighten result /
status high result status is high. 1 = High Reset result
Tightening Indicate tightening 1 bit 0 = Not used Tighten result /
status low result status is low. 1 = Low Reset result
322 (428) 9836 3123 01

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Tightening The tightening time 64 bit (8 I.e. 08:15:08 Tightening result /
time taken from the most characters) (8 ASCII Start new
recent result. CSC characters) 24 tightening or new
Format HH:MM:SS hour Pset selected or
64 bits I.e. 80:51:80 ( new Job selected
CSCI from right to left)
Tightening The tightening time 16 bit (one 0 – 24 hour Tightening result /
time hour (hour part only) word) Start new
taken from the most U16 tightening or new
recent result. Pset selected or
new Job selected
Tightening The tightening time 16 bit (one 0 - 60 min Tightening result /
time min (minutes only) word) Start new
new Job selected
Tightening The tightening time 16 bit (one 0 - 60 sec Tightening result /
time sec (seconds only) word) Start new
new Job selected
Tightening Tightening result 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result /
status NOK has one or more 1 = NOK Start new
Not OK results. tightening or new
Pset selected or
new Job selected
Tightening All tightening result 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result /
status OK is OK. 1 = OK Start new
tightening or new
Pset selected or
new Job selected
Tool Indicates 1 bit 0 = Not used Tool is connected / X X X X
connected connection 1 = Tool no signal
established between connected
tool and controller
Tool Indicates if the tool 1 bit 0 = Tool enabled Tool disable / Tool
disabled is disabled or not. 1 = Tool disabled enable
Tool Indicates if the tool 1 bit 0 = Tool disabled Tool enable / Tool
enabled is enabled or not. 1 = Tool enabled disable
9836 3123 01 323 (428)

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Tool green This item follows 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result X
light the tool green light. 1 = Green or flash green light
/ Start new
tightening or
Reset LED
Tool in Tool is located in product space X X
product
space
Tool in Tool is located in work space X X
work space
Tool Tool is locked (tool not ready). X X X X
locked
Tool Indicates that the 1 bit 0 = Tool is not Tool is loosening / X
loosening tool is loosening. loosening Tool is stopped
1 = Tool is
loosening
Tool ready Indicates that the 1 bit 0 = Tool is not Tool is ready / X X X X
tool is ready for ready Tool is not ready
tightening. 1 = Tool is ready
Tool red This item follows 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result / X
light the tool red light. 1 = Red Start new
tightening
Tool Indicates that the 1 bit 0 = Tool is not Tool is running / X
running tool is rotating CW run Tool is stopped
or CCW. 1 = Tool is
running
Tool serial Show tool serial 32 bits Intel Endian 32 Tighten result /
no number after each U32 bits integer Start new
tightening tightening
32 bits Intel Endian 32
U32_HN bits integer
W
Tool start Indicates tool is 1 bit 0 = Not used Tool is rotating / X
switch switching. 1 = rotating Tool stopped
Tool 1 bit 0 = Tool is not Tool is Tightening X
tightening tighten / Tool is stopped
1 = Tool is
tightening
324 (428) 9836 3123 01

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
Tool This item follows 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result X
yellow the tool yellow 1 = Yellow or fatal error / Start
light light. new tightening or
(If ”PF_ control _3” error Ack
is selected yellow
LED shows the
fatal error and reset
when error
acknowledged)
Tools Net Indicates 1 bit 0 = connected Tools Net X X X X
conn lost connection with 1 = disconnected connection lost /
Tools Net lost. Connected
Torque Status torque result. 1 byte O = OK Tightening result /
status ASCII L = Low Start new
Character H = High tightening or new
Pset selected or
2 bits 00 = Not used new Job selected
BF 01 = OK
10 = High
11 = Low
Torque Torque result is 1 bit 0 = Not used Tightening result /
status above max limit. 1 = High Start new
HIGH tightening or new
Pset selected or
new Job selected
status below min limit. 1 = Low Start new
LOW tightening or new
Pset selected or
new Job selected
status OK within limits. 1 = OK Start new
tightening or new
Pset selected or
new Job selected
Tracking Tracking function currently disabled X X X X
disabled
9836 3123 01 325 (428)

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
VIN input Shows the VIN 24-208 bit One ASCII sign Identifier selected
number input from (3-26 for each /No signal
fieldbus, serial or bytes) character.
Ethernet. Changes CSI First byte is
as soon as the counter. Counter
number is given. increases each
This is not the VIN time a new
used in the identifier string
tightening result. inputted.
If the VIN is longer 16-200 bit Identifier input
than the VIN input (2-25 character string.
length the Power bytes) One ASCII sign
Focus will take the
CSC for each
first x characters
character.
and cut the end. If
the VIN number is 16-192 bit In Intel Endian
shorter then this (2-24 mode, whole
parameter length bytes) words.
the Power Focus CSCI One ASCII sign
will not fill with for each
zero. character.
32-208 bit In Intel Endian
(4-26 mode, whole
bytes) words.
CSII One ASCII sign
for each
character.
First byte is
counter. Counter
increases each
time a new
barcode inputted.
U32 Convert barcode
to U32 number.
Corresponding to
Identifier U32 in
To PF side.
326 (428) 9836 3123 01

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
U32_HN Convert barcode
W to U32_HNW
number.
Corresponding to
identifier
U32_HNW in To
PF side.
U16 Convert barcode
to U16 number.
Corresponding to
identifier type
U16 in To PF
side.
VIN used Shows the VIN 16 – 200 One ASCII sign Tightening result
in number used in a bit (2-25 for each / Start new
tightening tightening. This is bytes) character. tightening or new
the VIN used in the CSC Pset selected or
tightening result. new Job selected
16 – 192 Only show in
If the VIN is longer bits (2 – Intel Endian and
than the VIN input 24 bytes) must be whole
length the Power words.
CSCI
Focus will take the
first x characters 16 bits Convert barcode
and cut the end. If U16 to U16 number.
the VIN number is Corresponding to
shorter then this identifier type
parameter length U16 in To PF
the Power Focus side.
will not fill with 32 bits Convert barcode
zero. U32 to U32 number.
Corresponding to
identifier U32 in
To PF side.
32 bits Only show in
U32_HN Intel Endian.
W Convert barcode
to U32_HNW
number.
Corresponding to
identifier
U32_HNW in To
PF side.
9836 3123 01 327 (428)

TLS ST Tag LED

duration for all)
Sound (time
Illuminator
tightening
Value
Blue LED
Tracking
To next
Time
16 – 200 Max 25 char
bits
CSCI
Wear Active until service is performed (i.e. while wear alarm is pending) X X X X
indicator
21.2 Digital input and fieldbus items to PF

This section contains a description of the items that can be selected when data to the Power Focus is
configured.
For fieldbus: Set signal = a signal to set a bit/byte/bytes in the PLC. Reset signal = a signal to reset a
bit/byte/bytes in the PLC.
Description Fieldbus items Digital inputs
Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal

Name Description Data type Value /Reset signal
Abort Job Aborts the running Job. Job 1 bit 0 = Not used Abort Job /no X X X X
status is Job aborted. 1 = Abort signal
8 bit (1 A = Abort
byte)
Character
Abort Job and Abort Job And Reset all result 1 bit 0 = Not used Abort job and
status status 1 = Abort status /no signal
Ack error message Acknowledge event/error 1 bit 0 = Not Used Ack event X X X X
message. 1 = Ack Error message /no
signal
328 (428) 9836 3123 01

Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal
Batch decrement Decrements the batch counter 1 bit 0 = Not used Batch decrement X X X X
with one. In Job, batch 1 = Decrement /no signal
decrement is only possible from
the Job reference and it is not
possible to decrement batch
once the Job is completed
Batch increment Increments the batch counter 1 bit 0 = Not used Batch increment X X X X
with one. Batch status is 1 = Increment /no signal
dependent on C243 Batch status
at increment
Bypass Identifier Bypasses the next identifier in 1 bit 0 = Not used Bypass next X X X X
the Work order for entering 1 = Bypass Id identifier /no
identifier types. signal
Bypass Pset in Job Skips the next Pset or 1 bit 0 = Not used Bypass Pset /no X X X X
Multistage in the running Job. 1 = Bypass Pset signal
Batch status is dependent on in Job
C243 Batch status at increment
Click Wrench 1-4 Use in combination with the click wrench tightening strategy to confirm a click X X X X
wrench operation.
Dig out monitored Monitored by DigIn Controlled 1 bit 0 = reset Set DigIn X X X X
# = 1-4 1-4 1 = set controlled /Reset
DigIn controlled
Disable fieldbus When this digital input goes high following events occur: X X X X
carried signals Fieldbus communication is disabled.
Relay fieldbus carried signals disabled goes high.
In ToolsTalk PF monitoring mode on fieldbus “To PF” side, it is possible to display
changes in signals sent to PF over the fieldbus. (Note that the signals have no effect
on the Power Focus, since all fieldbus communication is disabled).
On the fieldbus side “From PF” will all bits be reset to zero.
The traffic of “keep alive” signals continues on the fieldbus. In this way no event
codes (i.e. No connection on fieldbus) will be displayed.
All tools are enabled (presupposed that the tools were disabled from a source over
the fieldbus before then).
If there is a running Job, which has been selected via the fieldbus, the Job will be
aborted.
Disable ST Disables scanning from ST 1 bit 0 = Not used Disable ST X X X
scanner scanner. 1 = disable ST scanner
scan /no signal
Disconnect tool Sends disconnect tool request. 1 bit 0 = Not used Disconnect tool X X
1 = disconnect /no signal
9836 3123 01 329 (428)

Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal
External Used for external input, for example from a PC application. X X X
monitored 1-8
Fieldbus digin These inputs give a direct link to fieldbus. Fieldbus digital input numbers must be X X X
1-4 configured in Power Focus, I/O Expander and in fieldbus. Fieldbus mimics the status
of a digital input.
Fieldbus Sends to PF to check if fieldbus 1 bit 0 = Not used Fieldbus Hand
handshake works. 1 = Handshake shake Set
/Fieldbus
Handshake
Reset
Flash tool green Activates the tool green light 1 bit 0 = Not used Tool light flash X X X X
light, or (flashing at approximately 1.33 1 = Tool light green
Tool light flash Hz). The light is on until flash /no signal
green tightening starts. After
tightening the tool light
indicates status according to
result. This input is ignored
during rundown.
Flash tool yellow Activates the tool yellow light 1 bit 0 = Not used Tool light flash X X X X
light, or Tool (flashing at approximately 1.33 1 = Tool light yellow
lights flash yellow Hz). The light is on until flash /no signal
tightening starts. After
tightening the tool light
indicates status according to
result. This input is ignored
during rundown.
Forced CW once The tool will be forced to perform one loosening even if the ring is positioned in X
CW.
After the loosening has been performed the tool will return to the current ring
position
Forced CW toggle The tool will be forced to perform loosening until the function has been selected X
again.
After the function has been selected again the tool will return to the current ring
position.
Forced CCW once The tool will be forced to perform one loosening even if the ring is positioned in X
CW.
After the loosening has been performed the tool will return to the current ring
position
Forced CCW The tool will be forced to perform loosening until the function has been selected X
toggle again.
After the function has been selected again the tool will return to the current ring
position.
330 (428) 9836 3123 01

Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal
ID-card Signal input from card reader to indicate that an ID-card is inserted in the reader. X X X
9836 3123 01 331 (428)

Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal
Identifier Input of VIN number from the 24 – 208 bit One ASCII sign New VIN input
PLC. Set identifier input source (3-26 bytes) for each /no signal
in PF to “Fieldbus”. CSI character
0 string is ignored. First byte is
counter
16 – 200 bit One ASCII sign
(2-25 bytes) for each
CSC character
2 bytes in U 16: If the
the same value is less than
word 5 digits decimal,
U16 PF will fill with
zeros in front.
4 bytes in U32: If the value
two words is less than 10
U32 digits decimal,
PF will fill with
zeros in front.
4 bytes in Only for Intel
two words format
U32_HNW
16 – 192 (2 One ASCII sign
– 24 bytes for each
CSCI character, string
is in Intel byte
order
32 – 208 One ASCII sign
bytes) for each
CSII character.
First byte is
counter.
String is in Intel
byte order.
Identifier_Multi Max 100 characters in identifier 16 – 800 Char string Identifier
string. bits /no signal
CSC
16 – 800 Intel Endian
bits
CSCI
332 (428) 9836 3123 01

Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal
16 bits in 00….0001 = Job
one word 1
U16 00….1000 = Job
8
Job off Gets off Job mode and unlocks 1 bit 0 = Job On Job Off X X
tool. 1 = Job Off /Job On
Job select bit (0-8) Job select input when selecting Job from digital input. X X X
Job select Selects a Job. Job select source 2 – 8 bits in 0000 0001 = Job Select Job
must be set to Fieldbus. Job 0 = the same 1 /no signal
no Job selected. byte. 0001 0000 = Job
BF 16
16 bits in 00….0001 = Job
one word 1
U16 00….1000 = Job
8
Keep alive Sends to PF to check if fieldbus 2 – 8 bits in 00000000 = 0 Keep alive
communication alive. the same 11111111 = 255 changed
byte /no signal
BF
Last DigIN Must be the last one
Line control alert1 Input for a position breaker. 1 bit 0 = Not Used Line control X X X
Gives alarm if a Job with line 1 = Line control alert 1
control is not finished. alert 1 /no signal
Line control alert2 Input for a position breaker. 1 bit 0 = Not Used Line control X X X
Gives alarm if a Job with line 1 = Line control alert 2
control is not finished. alert 2 /no signal
Line control start Input signal to start the line 1 bit 0 = Not Used Line control X X X
control function. 1 = Line control start set
Activate with J330 set to Yes. /Line control
start reset
Logic digin 1-10 DigIn not connected to any function but used by the Logic Operator function. X X
(PF4000 only)
MasterUnlockTool Unlocks all locks which are 1 bit 0 = Not used Master unlock X X X X
regarded as event controlled. 1 = Master tool
Unlock /no signal
Open protocol When activated all the commands received by the Power Focus via Open Protocol X X X X
commands disable are rejected.
9836 3123 01 333 (428)

Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal
Off The input is not used.
Pset select bit (0- Pset select input when selecting Pset from digital input. The table shows the relation X X X
9) between bit set and Pset ID.
Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Pset/Job ID
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 1
0 1 0 2
0 1 1 3
1 0 0 4
... ... ... ...
Pset select Select a Pset. C200 Pset must be 2 – 8 bits in 0000 0001 = Select Pset
set to “Fieldbus”. Pset0 = no the same Pset 1 /no signal
Pset selected. byte. 0001 0000 =
BF Pset 16
16 bits in 00….0001 =
one word Pset 1
U16 00….1000 =
Pset 8
Pset select 0Is1 Selects a Pset. C200 Pset must 2 – 8 bits in 0000 0001 = Select Pset
be set to “Fieldbus”. Pset0 = no the same Pset 2 /no signal
Pset selected. byte. 0001 0000 =
Number 0 = Pset1 number 1 = BF Pset 17
Pset2 etc.
Pset select and set Selects Pset and sets its batch 16 bits Byte 0 = PsetID Set Batch Size
batch size size. OA Byte 1 = Batch and
Byte0: PsetID; Byte1: size Select Pset
BatchSize /no signal
Pset toggle Toggle between Psets connected 1 bit 0 = Not used Pset Toggle X X X X
to one socket in a Selector. 1 = Pset Tog /no signal
C200 Pset must be set to
“Selector”.
Read result Handles read results. 1 byte 0 = Not used ReadResult
handshake BF 1 = Read Handshake
2 = Skip /no signal
4 = Flush
334 (428) 9836 3123 01

Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal
Relay pos# # = 1-4 Controls a relay from fieldbus. 1 bit 0 = Relay OFF Set fieldbus
In I/O setup the selected relay 1 = Relay ON relay x /Reset
must be programmed to fieldbus fieldbus relay x
relay x. There are four different
items.
Remote start cont., Tool starts tightening. The tool stops if the input signal disappears (equal to a start X
with tool trigger).
The position of the tool direction ring is not taken into
account. This may cause tool reaction forces in a direction
unexpected to the operator.
Remote start pulse Tool starts tightening if the input pulse is > 100 ms. Tool runs until target is reached. X
The position of the tool direction ring is not taken into
account. This may cause tool reaction forces in a direction
unexpected to the operator.
Request ST scan Sends a scan request to ST 1 bit 0 = Not used Request ST Scan X X
scanner. The scan LED on an 1 = request /no signal
ST scanner is lit if a scan
request is configured for the
LED in ST scan configuration.
Scanner source must be correct.
Reset all Resets all identifiers and relays 1 bit 0 = Not used Reset all X X X X
Identifiers for identifier. 1 = Reset all ID identifier
/no signal
Reset batch Resets the batch counter to 0. 1 bit 0 = Not used Reset batch /no X X X X
1 = Reset the signal
batch
Reset bistab relay Reset bi-stable relay No. 1 X X X
1
Reset bistab relay Reset bi-stable relay No. 1 X X X
1
Reset Job status Resets Job done status. 1 bit 0 = Not used Reset Job Status
1 = Reset Job /no signal
Status
9836 3123 01 335 (428)

Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal
Reset latest Resets the latest identified 1 bit 0 = Not used Reset latest X X X X
Identifier identifier. 1 = Reset latest identifier
Id /no signal
Reset NOK Unlocks (if locked) and resets 1 bit 0 = Not used Reset NOK X X X X
counter Possible coherent not ok 1 = Reset NOK counter
tightening counter. counter /no signal
Reset relay Resets all relays except 1 bit 0 = Not used Reset relay /no X X X
tracking event relay 1 = Reset signal
Reset result status Resets all result status on relay, 1 bit 0 = Not Used Reset result
RE-Alarm and fieldbus. 1 = Reset result status /no signal
Restart Job Stops current Job and restarts 1 bit 0 = Not used Restart Job /no X X X X
the same Job from 0. 1 = Restart Job signal
Select next Pset Selects next Pset. 1 bit 0 = Not used Select next Pset X X X X
1 = Select next /no signal
Pset
Select prev Pset Selects previous Pset. 1 bit 0 = Not used Select previous X X X X
1 = Select Pset /no signal
previous Pset
Selector control Used to set green light on 32 bits 0=device ID Set selector
green light selector when selector external OA 1=not used green light
controlled is active. Two bits 2=position 1-4 /reset selector
for one position, 01 flash, 10 3=position 5-8 green light
solid others off.
Selector control Used to set red light on selector 32 bits 0=device ID Set selector red
red light when selector external OA 1=not used light
controlled is active. Two bits 2=position 1-4 /reset selector
for one position, 01 flash, 10 3=position 5-8 red light
solid others off.
Set batch size / Set Sets batch size in indicated Pset 2 - 8 bits in 00000000 = 0 Set batch size
batch size Pset ID ID (Set Batch Size Pset ID). the same 11111111 = 255 and Pset id /no
These two items must be used BF signal
together.
2 bytes Binary
0<Batch Size<=99 representation
U16
(Decimal 0-
65535)
Set bistab relay 1 Activate bi-stable relay No. 1 X X X
Set bistab relay 2 Activate bi-stable relay No. 2 X X X
336 (428) 9836 3123 01

Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal
Set CCW Sets direction according to 1 bit 0 = set CW Set CCW X X X
input level. Low level 1 = set CCW /Set CW
corresponds to CW and high
level corresponds to CCW. SL
tool only.
Set home position Sets home position for home 1 bit 0 = Not used Set home X X X X
position strategy. 1 = Set home position
position /no signal
Set monostab Activate mono stable relay No. X X X
relay 1 1
Set monostab Activate mono stable relay No. X X X
relay 2 2
Set selector LED Sets/Resets selector LED from 32 bits Byte 0 = Device Set selector LED
fieldbus Byte0: DeviceID; OA ID /no signal
Byte1: Not used; Byte2: Sel Byte 1 = Not
LED 1-4; Byte3: Sel LED 5-8 used
Byte2, 3 =
selector LED
Start ST scan Sends a scan start request to ST 1 bit 0 = Not used Start ST Scan X X X
scanner. Scanning starts 1 = Start ST /no signal
directly. Scanner source must Scan
be correct.
Store current This is a command input to X X
tightening store the current tightening
program in the program settings into the
tool wireless tool NVRAM. The
tool must be set in standalone
mode
Timer enable tool Used with the function Timer 1 bit 0 = reset Timer Enable X X X X
enable tool that locks the tool 1 = set Tool /Timer
according to configuration. The Enable Released
function unlocks the tool for a
period of five seconds. Once
the period expires, the tool is
locked again. If a start attempt
is made before five seconds
have passed, the tool remains
unlocked until it is stopped or
button is released (plus that a
new five seconds period starts).
9836 3123 01 337 (428)

Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal
Toggle CW/CCW Toggles direction between CW 1 bit 0 = Not used Toggle X X X
and CCW. SL tool only. 1 = Toggle CW/CCW
/no signal
Toggle CW/CCW Changes direction and changes 1 bit 0 = Not used Toggle X X X
for next run back automatically after one 1 = Toggle CW/CCW for
run. SL tool only. next run
/no signal
Tool disable n.c. The tool does not start when this input is active. If the tool rotates, it will X
immediately stop. The input is active when the circuit is opened (normally closed).
Tool disable n.o. The tool does not start when this input is active. If the tool rotates, it will X
immediately stop. The input is active when the circuit is closed (normally open).
Tool disabled Fieldbus disable tool. To avoid 1 bit 0 = Enable tool Tool disable
conflicts this parameter shall 1 = Disable tool /Tool enable
not be selected if Tool enabled
is used.
Tool enabled Fieldbus enable tool. To avoid 1 bit 0 = Disable tool Tool enable
conflicts this parameter shall 1 = Enable tool /Tool disable
not be selected if Tool disabled
is used.
Tool in work TLS System reports that the X
space tool is in work space via Open
protocol interface.
Tool in product TLS System reports that the X
space tool is in product space via
Open protocol interface.
Tool lights flash green, see Flash tool green light
Tool loosening The function is similar to Tool 1 bit 0 = Loosening Tool loosening X
disable Disable, but only for loosing. enable disable
1 = Loosening
disable
Tool start Starts the tool in loosening 1 bit 0 = Stop tool Start loosening X
loosening direction. Direction depends on 1 = Start /Stop tool
CW/CCW in PF. Tool start loosening
input source must be set to
Fieldbus.
Tool start Starts the tool in tightening 1 bit 0 = Stop tool Start tightening
tightening direction. Direction depends on 1 = Start /Stop tool
CW/CCW in PF. Tool start tightening
input source must be set to
Fieldbus.
338 (428) 9836 3123 01

Function button
I/O Expander
Internal I/O
(optional)
String
ST GPIO
length Set signal
Tool stop Stops the tool. 1 bit 0 = Not used Stop tool
1 = Stop tool /no signal
Tool tightening The function is similar to Tool 1 bit 0 = Tightening Tool tightening X
disable Disable, but only for Enable disable
tightening. 1 = Tightening /Tool tightening
Disable enable
Tool tightening Tool starts tightening if the 1 bit 0 = Not used Tool tightening
pulse pulse is longer than 100 ms and 1 = Start Tighten start
continues until target or current Pulse /no signal
limit is reached
Unlock tool Unlocks tool if tool locked by 1 bit 0 = Not used Unlock tool X X X X
batch ok or lock on reject 1 = Unlock tool /no signal
9836 3123 01 339 (428)

Parameter list
22 Parameter list
This section lists the Power Focus parameters.
22.1 Pset
22.1.1 Programming
Parameter Parameter name Description Default
number setup
P100 Control strategy For a description of the options, see section Control strategies. IF DS tool:
Tq con DS con
Tq con/ang mon ELSE: Tq
Tq con/ang con (AND) con/ang
Tq con/ang con (OR) mon
Ang con/tq mon
DS con
DS con/tq mon
Reverse ang
Reverse tq
Click wrench
Rotate spindle forward
Rotate spindle reverse
Home position forward
Home position reverse
EP monitoring
Yield
Yield / Tq con (OR)
Pulsor fixed
Pulsor control
Snug gradient
Residual Tq7Time
Residual Tq/Angle
Breakaway peak
Loose and tightening
Pulsor angle shutoff
The Reverse angle, Rotate spindle forward/reverse, and Home
position forward/reverse strategies are not applicable for
Open end tools.
9836 3123 01 341 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
P101 Tightening strategy One stage: tightening is performed in one stage. Control is done from P110 Two stage
Cycle start until P113 Final target is reached.
Two stage: tightening is performed in two stages. Control is done from P110
Cycle start until P111 First target. The tool stops and then accelerates to a
lower speed and controls until P113 Final target is reached.
Quick step: quick step is a variant of a two stage tightening. The difference is
that the tool speed changes directly from the higher speed to the lower speed
without stopping.
Ergo ramp: This is a two stage strategy with a constant increase in torque
during the second stage of the tightening. Gives the operator constant reaction
torque in the tool regardless of joint hardness.
P104 Rundown angle This parameter is optional. If chosen, there are two alternatives. No
From start: The rundown phase starts when the tool trigger is pressed and
continues until the torque value reaches P116 Rundown complete.
From cycle start: The rundown phase starts when the torque level exceeds the
P110 Cycle start torque level and continues until P116 Rundown complete is
reached.
P105 Zoom step This parameter enables the zoom step function. Zoom step strategy combines No
quick tightening with high precision and low scatter.
P107 Click wrench no. This parameter is only used if Click wrench is chosen as P100 Control Click
strategy. It is used to connect the click wrench strategy to any one of four wrench 1
defined digital input.
P108 Start Trace from Will generate a Trace from Tool start or P110 Cycle start. P110 Cycle
For STwrench, only P110 Cycle start is available. start
P109 Monitor end time Decides if monitoring of end time (cycle complete) will start from P110 P110 Cycle
from Cycle start or P116 Rundown complete. start
P110 Cycle start Defines the starting level for a tightening cycle. IF P100
Control
strategy is
set to DS
con or DS
con/tq mon:
0.1 * T102
ELSE:
0.05 * T102
Tool max
torque
P111 First target Defines the level at which the changeover takes place between the first and 0.25 * T102
second stage in a two stage tightening, quick step or ergo ramp. Tool max
torque
P112 Final tq min Defines the lower torque limit for OK tightening. 0.3 * T102
Tool max
torque
342 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number setup
P113 Final target Defines the desired final torque value when a torque (tq) P100 Control 9999 Nm
strategy is used. The tool shuts off when the final target value is reached.
To maintain accuracy when tightening, final target shouldn't

be lower than specified minimum for the tool in use. Refer to
tool catalogue for necessary data.
P114 Final tq max Defines the upper torque limit for OK tightening. The tool shuts off if the 0.5 * T102
torque value exceeds this value. Tool max
torque
P115 Cycle complete This parameter indicates the torque level when the tightening cycle is 0.03 * T102
complete (valid if the tool has shut off prior to reaching this level).. Tool max
torque
P116 Rundown complete The torque level when the rundown phase is finished. (Only used if P104 0.2 * T102
Rundown angle or any of the PVT options are selected). Tool max
torque
P118 Measure torque at Defines at what point the torque is measured. Torque
Torque peak: gives the highest torque value during the tightening. peak
Angle peak: gives the torque at the highest angle value.
Shut off: measures the torque when the target condition has been fulfilled.
P119 Loosening limit Defines the limit for a valid loosening. Adjustable from 0 to T102 Tool max 0.1 * T102
torque. Tool max
torque
P120 Start final angle Angle measurement starts when the torque value exceeds this value. P120 0.25 * T102
Start final angle must be selected equal to or greater than P110 Cycle start. Tool max
(If a PVT option is used then it has to be greater than P116 Rundown torque
complete.)
P121 Measure angle to Defines to what point the final angle is measured. The start point is always Angle peak
P120 Start final angle.
Torque peak: gives the angle at the highest torque value.
Angle peak: gives the highest angle value during the tightening.
Cycle complete: measures the angle at P115 Cycle complete.
Shut off: measures the angle when the target condition has been fulfilled.
P122 Final angle min This parameter indicates the lower limit for final angle. If the final angle is 0 deg
below this level the tightening is considered as NOK.
P123 Target angle Indicates the target value for the angle in degrees when angle control, ang 0 deg
con, is used. When this value is reached the tool is turned off.
P124 Final angle max Defines the upper limit for the tightening angle. If the angle exceeds this level 9999 deg
the tightening is considered as NOK and the tool will shut off.
P125 Rundown angle min This parameter indicates the min limit value for P104 Rundown angle. If the 0 deg
angle is smaller than this value at P116 Rundown complete, “low” is indicated
and the tool will shut off.
P126 Rundown angle This parameter indicates the max limit value for P104 Rundown angle. If the 9999 deg
max angle is larger than this value, “high” is indicated and the tool will shut off.
9836 3123 01 343 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
P127 Final angle max Defines the upper limit for the tightening angle. If the angle exceeds this level 9999 deg
mon the tightening is considered as NOK but the tightening will NOT shut off due
to this.
P128 Rehit angle Defines the max angle for rehit detection. 0 deg
Only for MW tool.
P130 Soft start speed Defines the tool speed during the soft start interval. 10%
Allowed interval is between 1 and 30 percent of maximum tool speed.
P131 Step 1 speed Defines the first step speed. 100%
Speed is adjustable between 1 and 100 percent of max tool speed.
P132 Step 2 speed Defines the second step speed. 40%
Speed is adjustable between 1 and 40 percent of the tool max speed.
If two stage tightening is used the speed in the second step will increase
according to the P136 Step 2 ramp until it reaches this value. If quick step is
used the tool changes to step 2 speed directly without using a ramp.
P133 Loosening speed Defines speed during loosening. The value is adjustable between 1 and 100 100%
percent.
P134 Loosening ramp Defines acceleration during loosening. The value is adjustable between 0 and 0%
100 percent. A low percentage gives fast acceleration.
P135 Step 1 ramp Defines step 1 acceleration. The value is adjustable between 0 and 100 0%
percent. A low percentage gives fast acceleration (0% is normally used).
P136 Step 2 ramp Defines step 2 acceleration. A low percentage gives fast acceleration (0- 20%
100%).
P137 Ergo ramp Defines the acceleration. The value is adjustable between 0 and 100 percent. 40%
Only used if ergo ramp is chosen as the P101 Tightening strategy.
P138 Zoom step speed Defines the speed used for zoom step strategy. The value is a percentage of 10%
the tool’s max speed. The value is adjustable between 1 and 20 percent.
To set zoom step speed, parameter P105 Zoom step must be active.
P139 Speed unit Sets speed parameters (P130-P133, P138 and P161) relative to tool max “Percent”
speed ("Percent") or absolute ("RPM") for current P-set.
Changes between RPM and % due to less accuracy in % can
lead to quantization effects in values for speed parameters.
P141 End time Defines the time required for the torque level to stay below 115 Cycle 0.2 s
complete before the tightening is aborted (valid if the tool has not shut off
prior to reaching cycle complete).
The value is adjustable between 0.02 and 5.0 seconds.
P142 Soft start time During this time, from the moment that the tool trigger is pressed, the spindle 0.2 s
rotates very slowly. This gives the operator a chance to fit the socket on the
screw. The value is adjustable between 0.0 and 5.0 seconds.
P143 Tool idle time Defines the idle time between a completed tightening and the start of the next 0.0 s
tightening. (Used in Multistage).
The value is adjustable between 0 and 32 seconds.
344 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number setup
P144 Cycle abort timer If the tool does not reach its shut off point, this timer will shut it off. The 30 s
timer is activated when the tool trigger is pressed.
The value is adjustable between 0.1 and 60.0 seconds.
P150 Batch count Activates a function that measures how many times a tightening is repeated. Off
It must be determined from where P151 Batch size value should be read, if
this parameter is activated.
Options:
Off: batch count functionality is not used.
Pset: use batch size of a Pset.
Fieldbus: an external source decides P151 Batch size via fieldbus.
Ethernet/serial: an external source decides P151 Batch size via Ethernet or
serial interface.
If batch count is used in a Job (that includes the specific Pset),
this parameter is recommended to be set to “Off”.
P151 Batch size The size can be 1 - 99. To set this parameter, the P150 Batch count must be in 1
active mode.
Batch size defined in Job overrides batch size defined in Pset.
P152 Lock at batch done The tool will be locked when reaching Batch done. Batch done is reached No
when the number of correct tightenings is equal to P151 Batch size.
P153 Max coherent Defines the number of possible subsequent NOK (not OK) tightenings. This 0 (Off)
NOK’s parameter is overruled by M208. To be able to set a value for P153 the
parameter J301 Job type must be set to 'Forced' or 'Free and forced'
Range: 1-10.
P160 High speed High speed rundown is a function for reducing the cycle time by running the Off
rundown tool at high speed during rundown.
High speed rundown is a stage inserted between Soft start and Step 1, i.e. the
Soft start time and Soft start speed affects the number of degrees of the
rundown phase. This gives the possibility for fast tightening cycles even for
long bolts with a small angle that require a slow step-one speed to avoid
overshoots.
P161 Rundown speed Rundown speed in percent. 100 %
P162 High speed interval High speed rundown interval. 9999 deg
P163 High speed ramp Defines the acceleration to P161 Rundown Speed during the high speed 10%
rundown stage. The value is adjustable between 0 and 100 percent. A low
percentage gives fast acceleration.
P164 Disable high speed Disable the high speed rundown function after a NOK tightening Off
rundown speed once and enable high speed rundown speed when the tightening is OK. This
if NOK function is only possible to enable if the P160 is On
P170 Adjustable limit Adjustable positioning limit for open end tools. Used to set torque limit for No
the positioning of the tool after tightening. If set to No the internal default
value is used as limit.
9836 3123 01 345 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
P171 Limit Maximum torque during positioning. Default value is tool dependent and Tool
stored in tool memory. The max value is limited to T424 Max torque dependent
positioning limit.
The limit must be lower than the maximum torque in reverse

specified by the open end gear supplier. Using higher values
can result in damaging the open end gear.
P180 Delta angle Gradient angle interval 10 deg
P181 Delta torque Gradient torque interval Tool
dependent,
5% of Tool
max tq
P182 Torque limit Torque search limit for snug detection Tool
dependent,
Tool max tq
P183 PVT distance Defines how many degrees before the Snug point the start value of the PVT 0 deg
compensation torque shall be used.
P184 PVT interval The angle interval after the PVT distance point, during which the PVT 0 deg
compensate torque is evaluated.
P185 Compensate value Option to choose between an average value and peak value during the PVT Average
interval.
P186 Delay monitoring During this interval all Snug Gradients found will be disregarded. The delay 0 deg
after cycle start interval starts when Cycle start has been passed.
P190 Snug PVT The lowest torque value allowed while searching after Snug point. P110 Cycle
monitoring min start
P191 Snug PVT The highest torque value allowed while searching after Snug point P182
monitoring max Torque
limit
22.1.2 Programming +
number setup
P200 Current monitoring This function is not applicable for DS tools. No
Activates the current monitoring function.

The spindle torque is proportional to the motor current. By measuring motor
current a method of measurement that is independent of the torque transducer
is achieved. The torque forming current is expressed as percentage of
nominal current at T102 Tool max torque. Set an acceptance window for the
torque as redundant process control via parameters P201 CM min and P202
CM max.
P201 CM min Defines min limit for OK tightening. 0.0%
346 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number setup
P202 CM max Defines max limit for OK tightening. 150%
P210 Selftap Activates the PVT selftap function. No

When the joint has a torque peak at the start of the tightening it can be
recommended to use the PVT selftap monitoring option to ensure that the
tightening gets the right characteristics. It also makes it possible to perform
tightenings where the start torque is higher than P113 Final target or P114
Final tq max.
P211 Selftap interval Defines the section where measuring is performed. 1
Setting is performed in degrees in the interval 1 to 9999.
P212 No. of selftap Defines the number of windows that the P211 Selftap interval is to be divided 1
windows into. Each window is then evaluated separately.
Mean value foundations are calculated from a number of windows to reduce
the effect of noise. Fewer number of windows mean that more samples will
be grouped together, hence one odd sample will have less impact on the
calculated mean value and vice versa. A higher P212 No. of selftap windows
makes the monitoring more sensitive whereas a lower number will filter more
noise.
The number of windows can be chosen between 1 and 9999.
P213 Selftap min Indicates the lowest torque level for the interval. If the torque level falls P115 Cycle
below this level, a low-level alarm will be generated. complete
If P109 Monitor end time from is set to Cycle start, then range is from P115
Cycle complete value to P214 Selftap max.
If P109 Monitor end time from is set to Rundown complete, then range is from
0 to P214 Selftap max.
P214 Selftap max This parameter indicates the highest torque level for the interval. If the torque 9999 Nm
level exceeds this level, a high level alarm will be generated. Range is from
P213 Selftap min to T102 Tool max torque.
P220 PVT monitoring Activates the PVT monitoring function. No
P221 PVT delay interval Defines delay before P220 PVT monitoring starts. 0 deg
P222 PVT monitor Defines the interval during which the P220 PVT monitoring is to be 1 deg
interval performed.
P223 No. of PVT Defines the number of windows that the P222 PVT monitor interval is to be 1
windows divided into. Each window is then evaluated separately.
Mean value foundations are calculated from a number of windows to reduce
the effect of noise. Fewer number of windows mean that more samples will
be grouped together, hence one odd sample will have less impact on the
calculated mean value and vice versa. A higher P223 No. of PVT windows
makes the monitoring more sensitive whereas a lower number will filter more
noise.
The number of windows can be chosen between 1 and 9999.
9836 3123 01 347 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
P224 PVT min limit This value is evaluated against the monitor interval peak value at the end of P115 Cycle
the interval. If the torque value falls below this limit, an alarm is generated. complete
If P109 Monitor end time from is set to Cycle start, then range is from P115
Cycle complete value to P225 PVT max limit.
If P109 Monitor end time from is set to Rundown complete, then range is
from 0 to P225 PVT max limit.
P225 PVT max limit This parameter is monitored in real time during the monitor interval and if P116
exceeded, an alarm is generated. Rundown
complete
P230 PVT comp When this option is set to “Yes” a prevailing torque PVT compensate is No
(measured at the interval of 20 samples preceding start of P231 PVT comp
point) used as reference for the torque during the actual tightening cycle.
All torque values; i.e. P113 Final target, P111 First target and
P114 Final tq max are compensated (subtracted) from the
prevailing value. Also, the results are compensated.
P231 PVT comp point The value can be set between 0 and 9999 degrees. 10 deg
P240 Tool tightening CW/CCW CW
direction Select tool rotation direction. “CW” for right hand threaded screws and
“CCW” for left hand threaded screws. To be able to start in the decided
direction, turn the tool direction ring to its correct position.
This parameter has no effect when running an Open end tool
(tube nut tool).
P241 Soft stop Yes/No Yes
The PF will ramp down the torque when target is reached. The “Yes” option
is recommended.
P242 Alarm on rehit Yes/No No
If selected, Power Focus will detect rehits (event code E112 Rehit). The red
tool LED will be lit when a rehit is detected. The criteria for a rehit are a
short or a non-existent second stage in combination with a slow speed in the
first stage.
P243 Alarm on tq < target Yes/No No
Decides if the tightening should be approved if the final torque is lower than
the P113 Final target but above P112 Final torque min.
P244 Alarm on lost Yes/No No
trigger Power Focus will detect if the tool trigger was released before the P113 Final
target was reached.
P245 DS torque tuning Only used if “DS con” is chosen as a P100 Control strategy. It compensates 100%
factor for the error that DS measurement induces. The value can be set between 80
and 220 percent. For information how to adjust the DS torque-tuning factor,
see section DS con.
P246 Alarm on end time Yes/No No
shutoff If end time times out before P113 Final target was reached then an event code
will be displayed.
348 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number setup
P247 Socket release Rotates the socket approximately three degrees backwards after the tightening No
is done.
P250 Gradient monitoring Monitors the torque increase or decrease for an angle window. No
P251 Gradient torque min Minimum increase of the torque for the angle window. 0
P252 Gradient torque Maximum increase of the torque for the angle window. 9999
max
P253 Joint hardness Hardness coefficient for the joint. 10
1- hard joint, 20- soft joint
P254 Start torque Torque threshold where the gradient monitoring is to be started. Start final
angle
P255 Angle offset Additional angle from P254 Start torque before gradient monitoring is started. 0 deg
P260 Start torque The torque threshold where the yield control is to be started. 0.0 Nm
Yield control is activated by selecting the P100 Control strategy
to Yield or Yield/Tq con (OR). The P101 Tightening strategy
can be set to One stage, Two stage or Quickstep, and yield
control will always interact in the second stage of the tightening.
P105 Zoom step strategy ending is disabled when yield control is
selected. An additional tightening angle can be added after the
yield point is reached by setting an angle to the P264 Extra
angle step parameter.
P261 Step angle Defines the angle interval between the sample windows. 0 deg
P262 Window angle Defines the length of the angle interval (the window) in which an average of 0 deg
the torque values shall be calculated.
P263 Yield slope ratio This parameter decides the sensitivity of the yield point detection. The set 50 %
value is the percentage of the maximum slope, at which the yield point is
considered reached. 100% corresponds to the maximum slope during the
tightening (early shut-off and highest sensitivity), and 0% to a completely
horizontal portion of the trace (late shut-off close to or after peak torque).
P264 Extra angle step Additional angle step after the yield point is reached. 0 deg
P280 Post view torque Enable/disable the post view torque functionality. Only useful if torque is to No
be measured during monitoring interval.
Some joints have a torque peak prior of P116 Rundown complete. Post view
torque function makes it possible to monitor torque values during two
specified angular intervals. The interval start is defined as angle prior to
rundown complete. Torque is then monitored for a specified angular interval.
Evaluation (OK/NOK) is done when rundown complete is reached.
Not accessible when any PVT-option is selected.
P281 Post view min Defines the low limit for the torque during the entire interval. P110 Cycle
torque start
P282 Post view min Start of min monitor interval. 9999
monitoring start
P283 Post view min Length of min monitor interval. 1
monitoring interval
9836 3123 01 349 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
P284 Post view max Defines the high limit for the torque during the entire interval. P116
torque Rundown
complete
P285 Post view max Start of max monitor interval. 1
monitoring start
P286 Post view max Length of max monitor interval. 1
monitoring interval
22.1.3 Pset setup

number setup
P400 View existing Psets To view existing Psets in the current PF channel. Both numbers and logical
names will be displayed.
P401 Create new Pset To create and open a new Pset. Each Pset has a unique ID number between 1
and 250 (or up 300 with the configurable memory functionality).
P402 Name Pset Used when a selected Pset is to be named with a logical name. Up to 25 Empty
characters. string
P403 Copy Pset Used when a source Pset is to be copied to a destination Pset.
P404 Delete Pset Used when a Pset is to be removed.
If a Pset is a part of a Job it can not be deleted.
P406 Pset updated Timestamp (date and time) for Pset latest modification. Not editable.
P409 Pset updated by Displays the name of the user who last changed the Pset. Not writable. If no
user has logged in the filed values are: TTPF if changed via ToolsTalk,
OPER if changed via the controller, and BLANK if the Pset has been created
in an earlier version of the software.
P410 Delete Pset results Used when all results that belong to the current Pset are to be cleared.
P411 Delete all results Used when all Pset results are to be cleared.
P420 Comment The comments displayed here are entered in a dialog box each time a Pset is No
stored. A prerequisite is that parameter C600 is set to Pset comments. Length
0-100 characters.
22.1.4 Statistic programming

number setup
P500 Min valid stat tq The result must be greater than or equal to this value in order for it to be 0 Nm
limit included in the statistical calculations.
350 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number setup
P501 Max valid stat tq The result must be less than or equal to this value in order for it to be 9999 Nm
limit included in the statistical calculations.
P502 Subgroup size Defines the subgroup size for statistical diagrams and control limits. If this 4
parameter is changed, the results will be recalculated.
Group size can be set between 2 and 20.
P503 No. of subgroups Power Focus can automatically calculate statistical control limits. In order for 10
these limits to be reasonable, they must be performed on a greater number of
tightenings. This parameter is used to set the number of subgroups used for
these calculations.
P504 Subgroup frequency Defines which subgroups that will be used in the statistical calculations. If the 1
frequency is 4 then only every fifth subgroup will be used.
P505 Latest n values The latest number of values (1 - 100) that is used in the statistical 30
calculations.
P506 SPC alarm tq With this parameter it is possible to switch on or off the torque SPC alarm Off
function.
P507 SPC alarm angle With this parameter it is possible to switch on or off the angle SPC alarm Off
function.
P508 SPC alarm CM With this parameter it is possible to switch on or off the current SPC Off
monitoring alarm function.
P510 Torque X-bar LCL The lower control limit for mean value. 0 Nm
Calculated automatically or entered manually.
P511 Torque X-bar UCL The upper control limit for mean value. 9999 Nm
P512 Torque range LCL The lower control limit for range. 0 Nm
P513 Torque range UCL The upper control limit for range. 9999 Nm
P514 Torque X-bar-bar The desired mean value for calculated mean values for groups of tightenings. 0 Nm
P515 Torque range-bar The desired mean value for calculated mean ranges for groups of tightenings. 0 Nm
P520 Angle X-bar LCL The lower control limit for mean value. 0 deg
P521 Angle X-bar UCL The upper control limit for mean value. 9999 deg
P522 Angle range LCL The lower control limit for range. 0 deg
P523 Angle range UCL The upper control limit for range. 9999 deg
P524 Angle X-bar-bar The desired value for calculated mean values for groups of tightenings. 0 deg
9836 3123 01 351 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
P525 Angle range-bar The desired value for calculated mean ranges for groups of tightenings. 0 deg
P530 Rundown angle X- The lower control limit for mean value. 0 deg
bar LCL Calculated automatically or entered manually.
This function is only available if parameter P104 Rundown angle is selected.
P531 Rundown angle X- The upper control limit for mean value. 9999 deg
bar UCL Calculated automatically or entered manually.
P532 Rundown angle The lower control limit for range. 0 deg
range LCL Calculated automatically or entered manually.
P533 Rundown angle The upper control limit for range. 9999 deg
range UCL Calculated automatically or entered manually.
P534 Rundown angle X- The desired mean value for calculated mean values for groups of tightenings. 0 deg
bar-bar This function is only available if parameter P104 Rundown angle is selected.
P535 Rundown angle The desired mean value for calculated mean ranges for groups of tightenings. 0 deg
range-bar This function is only available if parameter P104 Rundown angle is selected.
P540 Selftap X-bar LCL The lower control limit for mean value. 0 Nm
This function is only available if parameter P210 Selftap is selected.
P541 Selftap X-bar UCL The upper control limit for mean value. 9999 Nm
P542 Selftap range LCL The lower control limit for range. 0 Nm
P543 Selftap range UCL The upper control limit for range. 9999 Nm
P544 Selftap X-bar-bar The desired value for calculated mean values for groups of tightenings. 0 Nm
P545 Selftap range-bar The desired value for calculated mean ranges for groups of tightenings. 0 Nm
P550 PVT X-bar LCL The lower control limit for mean value. Calculated automatically or entered 0 Nm
manually.
This function is only available if P220 PVT monitoring is selected.
P551 PVT X-bar UCL The upper control limit for mean value. Calculated automatically or entered 9999 Nm
manually.
352 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number setup
P552 PVT range LCL The lower control limit for range. Calculated automatically or entered 0 Nm
manually.
P553 PVT range UCL The upper control limit for range. Calculated automatically or entered 9999 Nm
manually.
P554 PVT X-bar-bar The desired value for calculated mean values for groups of tightenings. 0 Nm
P555 PVT range-bar The desired value for calculated mean ranges for groups of tightenings. 0 Nm
P560 CM (X-bar) LCL The lower control limit for mean value. 0%
P561 CM (X-bar) UCL The upper control limit for mean value. 9999%
P562 CM R LCL Defines the low limit for permitted variations in the range calculations. 0%
P563 CM R UCL Defines the high limit for permitted variations in the range calculations. 9999%
P564 CM (X bar-bar) Defines the desired CM average for all of the subgroups calculated 0%
automatically or entered manually. (If calculated: In each subgroup the
average tightened CM value is calculated. Then an average is calculated
based on all of the averages.)
P565 CM (R bar) Defines the desired average of the CM variation for all of the subgroups. 0%
Calculated automatically or entered manually. (In each subgroup the average
tightened CM variation is calculated. Then an average is calculated based on
all of the averages.)
22.2 Multistage
22.2.1 Setup
Parameter Parameter name Description
number
M100 View existing To view all existing Multistages.
Multistages
M101 Create new To create a new Multistage.
Multistage
M102 Copy Multistage Used for the copying of an existing Multistage.
M103 Delete Multistage Used when a Multistage is to be deleted.
9836 3123 01 353 (428)

Parameter list
22.2.2 Multistage programming

number setup
M200 Multistage name Used when a selected Multistage should be given a name (optional).
M201 Stage list Stage list specifies the list of available Psets that can be linked together into a Pset 1
Multistage. Executes the specified link list of Psets into a Multistage.
M202 Batch count Activates a function that measures how many times a Multistage tightening is Off
repeated. It must be determined from where the batch size value should be
read, if the batch count is activated.
Options:
Off: batch count is not used.
Pset: use Psets batch size.
Fieldbus: An external source decides batch size via fieldbus.
Ethernet/serial: an external source sets batch size via Ethernet or serial
interface.
If batch count is used in a Job (that includes the specific
Pset), this parameter is recommended to be set to “Off”.
M203 Batch size Specifies the number of Multistage tightenings in a batch. The range is 0 to 1
99.
M204 Lock at batch OK The next time batch OK is reached the tool will be disabled until it is No
unlocked by the operator.
M208 Max coherent Defines the maximum allowed amount of possible NOK (not OK) Off
NOK’s subsequent tightenings. This parameter overrules P153 Max coherent NOK’s.
M210 Torque result Defines from what stage the torque result will be received. Last stage
Accessible when torque is selected as a P100 Control strategy.
M211 Angle result Defines from what stage the angle result will be received. Last stage
Accessible when angle is selected as a P100 Control strategy.
M212 Rundown result Defines from what stage the rundown angle result will be received. Last stage
Accessible when parameter P104 Rundown angle is used.
M213 PVT Selftap result Defines from what stage the PVT selftap result will be received. Last stage
Accessible when P210 Selftap is activated.
M214 PVT mon. result Defines from what stage the PVT mon. result will be received. Last stage
Accessible when P220 PVT monitoring is activated.
M215 CM result Defines from what stage the current monitoring result will be received. Last stage
Accessible when P200 Current monitoring is activated.
M216 Trace Defines the point from what stage the graph results (Trace diagram) will be Last stage
received.
M217 Post view torque Defines from what stage the graph will be received. Last stage
result Accessible when P280 Post view torque is activated.
354 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number setup
M220 Min valid stat tq >=Cycle start, < Max valid stat tq limit P110 Cycle
limit The result must be greater than or equal to this value to be included in the start
statistical calculations.
Not accessible when a DS strategy or reverse is selected (see P100 Control
strategy).
Results are only stored in the Multistage, not in the

individual Pset.
M221 Max valid stat tq >Min valid stat tq limit, <=tool max torque T102 Tool
limit The result must be less than or equal to this value to be included in the max torque
statistical calculations.
strategy).

individual Pset.
M222 Subgroup size 2 - 20 4
Defines the size of the subgroup that forms the basis for the statistical
calculations. If this parameter is changed, all statistics have to be recalculated
or deleted.
strategy).

individual Pset.
M223 No. of subgroups 1 - 7500 10
Power Focus calculates control limits on request. For these limits to be
relevant they must be based on a large number of data, at least 100. This
parameter defines the number of subgroups to be used in the statistical
calculations. If this parameter is changed, all the results have to be
recalculated.
strategy).
M224 Subgroup frequency 1 – 7500 1
This parameter indicates the number of subgroups that are disregarded
between every stored subgroup.
strategy).
M225 Latest n values 1 – 100 30

The number of tightening values which are included in the latest statistical
calculations. Not accessible when a DS strategy or reverse is selected (see
P100 Control strategy).
M226 SPC alarm tq This parameter switches the torque SPC alarm function on or off. Off
strategy).
9836 3123 01 355 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
M227 SPC alarm angle This parameter switches the angle SPC alarm function on or off. Off
strategy).
M228 SPC alarm CM This parameter switches the current monitoring SPC alarm function on or off. Off
Accessible when P200 Current monitoring is activated.
22.3 Job
22.3.1 Setup
number setup
J100 View existing Jobs To view existing Jobs in the current PF channel. Both numbers and logical
names will be displayed.
J101 Create new Job Create and open a new Job. 1
Each Job has a unique ID number between 1 and 99 (or up 400 with the
configurable memory function). Combining selected Psets/Multistages creates a
Job.
The new Job contains default values on all parameters.
J102 Name The name of the Job helps the operator to identify the different Jobs (maximum None
25 characters).
J103 Copy Job Power Focus offers the possibility to copy the properties of an already existing
Job to another Job. If the target Job has not already been created it will be
created automatically. The source Job keeps its Job ID and the target Job gets a
new Job ID.
J104 Delete Job This function deletes an already existing Job from the Power Focus memory and
the RBU. A running Job will be considered as aborted before it is deleted.
356 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list
22.3.2 Programming
number setup
J300 Job list The Job list specifies the Psets and Multistages that can be included in the
Job. The total number of Psets/Multistages in one Job can not exceed 50.
This parameter contains:
PF channel: Power Focus channel ID that the selected Pset and Multistage
belongs to.
Pset/Ms (Event): identification number of Psets/Multistages included in
the Job. The Psets/Multistages specified in the Job must be predefined, and
they can be included in more than one Job. Same Pset/Multistage can be
used several times in a Job.
Pset name: name of the selected Psets/Multistages. (Pset name is not
visible in Job list on PF Graph).
Auto select: yes = auto select, no = manually select.
With auto select the Job functionality automatically chooses the next Pset.
With a manually selected Pset/Multistage the operator must manually
choose the next Pset.
This function is only available for forced order Jobs.
It is not possible to use the auto select functionality for free
order Jobs (see parameter J301 Job order type).
A Job has override privileges, in comparison to a single
Pset/Multistage, on a defined maximum allowed amount of
possible NOK (not OK) subsequent tightenings.
Batch size: A batch size should be specified for each Pset or Multistage in
a Job. The batch size specifies the number of tightenings to be performed
for each Pset or Multistage. Maximum batch size is 99. It is possible to
define free running Psets/Multistages by setting batch size to 0. In this
case, the bypass function must be used to be able to continue the selected
Job.
Max coherent Not OK tightenings (NOK’s): Max coherent Not OK
tightenings (NOK’s) are a defined maximum allowed amount of possible
NOK (not OK) subsequent tightenings for each Pset/Multistage in a Job.
If P153 Max coherent NOK’s or M208 Max coherent NOK’s is used for the
Psets or Multistages included in the Job, these settings are ignored by the
Job setting.
The tool will be locked (for both tightening and loosening) when number
of possible not OK tightenings is reached for each batch.
When the tool is locked due to possible not OK tightenings the only ways
to unlock the tool are:
Reset counter for performed not OK tightening via a digital input.
Select abort Job (in case the selected Job shall not lock the tool).
Select Job off.
9836 3123 01 357 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
J301 Job type A Job must be defined as forced order Job, free order Job or free and Forced
forced order Job.
Free order: offers the operator to perform Psets/Multistages in any order.
The Job members work independently from each other. In a Cell Job with
free order, all Job members are able to perform tightenings at the same
time.
Forced order: Psets/Multistages must be performed in the order specified
in the Job list. One Job member at a time performs a tightening while the
other Job members are locked.
Free and forced order: allows the operator to perform Psets/Multistages in
the same PF channel as the order defined Job, but the operator is free to
perform tightening from any channel in the Job.
J302 Lock at Job done Yes: tools of the Job members will be disabled during a Job except the Yes
member who performs tightening according to the Job list. After a Job is
completed or aborted, tools of all Job members will be disabled for both
tightening and loosening. The tool remains locked until a new Job is
selected or the tool is enabled again.
No: the tool will be enabled for all Job members after the Job is completed.
For those Job members who are not involved in the Job the tool will be
enabled also while the Job is in progress.
J303 Tool loosening This parameter controls the tool loosening functionality during a running Enable
Job.
Enable: tool loosening functionality is unlocked during a running Job. Tool
loosening is enabled for all Job members.
Disable: tool loosening functionality will be locked during a running Job.
Enable only on NOK tightening: The tool loosening is disabled during a
Job but it will be enabled when a NOK tightening is performed.
Disable at Batch start: The tool loosening functionality is locked until the
batch is done.
J304 Repeat Job After a Job is completed, the Job will be automatically restarted. To turn No
off this feature the Job must be aborted, deleted or the Job off mode must
be selected.
J310 Increase batch at OK: Specifies that only accepted tightenings will be considered performed OK
tightening and counted.
OK+NOK: Specifies that also not accepted tightenings will be considered
performed and counted.
This will also have directly effect on the batch status,
which will be NOK (nxNOK when not accepted tightening
is performed and counted in a Job).
J311 Batch status at OK: The batch status will be OK at batch Increment or bypass event. The NOK
increment/bypass nxOK LED on PF Graph or PF Compact will light.
NOK: The batch status will be NOK at batch increment or bypass event.
358 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number setup
J312 Decrement batch at Yes/No/If last tightening OK No
OK loosening If YES, an OK Loosening generates a batch decrement for both OK and
NOK tightening. Set to If last tightening OK to decrement only for OK
tightening.
It is not possible to go back one step after the Job has been completed.
If ”batch counter type” is set to OK and last tightening was
a NOK tightening, an OK loosening will not decrease the
batch counter.
When the control strategy “Ds con” is implemented and
this parameter is set to “Yes”, the batch does not
decrement after an OK loosening.
J320 Max time to start This parameter defines the time limit, from when the Job is running to 0
Job when the first tightening is started or batch increment/bypass is performed.
If the time limit is exceeded the Job will be aborted. The timer restarts if a
Job is reselected.
Allowed values are between 1 - 9999 seconds. Value 0 (seconds)
deactivates this function.
J321 Max time to This parameter defines time limit, from Job is up running to the last 0
complete Job tightening in the Job is started. If the time limit is exceeded the Job will be
aborted.
Allowed values are between 1 - 9999 seconds. Value 0 (seconds)
deactivates this function.
J322 Display result at This parameter is a timer for Jobs with auto selected Psets/Multistages. It 0
auto select defines the time for tightening result to be displayed on a PF Graph or PF
Compact. The result disappears, and LED OK, NOK and nxOK shuts off,
when the tool trigger is pushed or if the time limit is exceeded.
The timer also works for restart Job, when a Job is completed, before
another Pset/Multistage is selected or when a Pset/Multistage is deselected.
Allowed values are between 1 - 60 seconds. Value 0 (seconds) deactivates
this function.
J330 Use line control The Job will be ready to start when a Job with activated Line control has No
been selected and the line control start signal has been received.
Otherwise, if line control start signal has not been received the Job will not
be ready to start and the tool will be locked until the line control start
signal is received.
A line control start signal is an external signal defined to be received by PF
from a digital input. This signal can be received before or after a Job
selection.
Line control start signal status will be cleared when the running Job has
been completed or aborted.
Line control related inputs/outputs have only an effect on a Job reference
and when this parameter is set to Yes.
9836 3123 01 359 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
J341 Result of non- Yes/No No
tightenings Yes: The non-tightening events; OK loosening, batch increment or batch
decrement, and not performed tightenings due to digital inputs, Bypass
Pset in Job or Abort Job, generate a result that is stored in the PF database.
No: No non-tightening results for Job are stored in the Power Focus
database. If this parameter is set to Yes, parameter C211 for Pset and
Multistage is disregarded in Job.
J342 Reset all identifiers If activated, a reset will be made for all identifiers (Type 1, Type 2, Type 3 No
at Job done and Type 4) at Job done.
J350 Header in result Select whether running Pset name, Job name or PF name shall be Pset name
view displayed in the header of result view (PF Graph display).
22.4 Controller
22.4.1 Information
number
C100 Main code version The version number of the Power Focus software release (i.e. the full software package).
C101 Application code The version number of the application code.

version
C102 Parameter tree The version of the parameter-tree.
version
C103 RBU code version The version number of the RBU-code.
C104 Boot code version The version number of the Boot-code.

C105 DSP code version The version number of the DSP-code.
C106 MC code version The version number of the MC-code.
C110 Controller type The type of the Power Focus.
C111 Serial number The serial number of the Power Focus unit. It is possible to change the number.
C115 RBU type The type of RBU (Rapid Backup Unit) inserted in the Power Focus. The available RBU
types are; Bronze, Silver, Gold, DS, X or a Customer special.
C116 RBU serial number The serial number of the RBU (the hard-coded, unique, MAC-address).
C118 MAC address Ethernet MAC address.
C119 Drive size Shows the drive size of the controller. Available drive sizes are:
SL, Small, Medium, Large, Uni, IRC.
360 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list
22.4.2 Configuration
number setup
C200 Pset Defines what device is to be used when selecting the running Pset. Off
Available options; Off, Selector, DigIn, Ethernet/Serial, Identifier, Fieldbus,
PF Keyboard, Fieldbus selector, STwrench tag and ST Selector.
C201 Job Defines what device is to be used when selecting the running Job. Off
The option is accessible when Job is accessible (RBU type).
Available options; Off, DigIn, Ethernet/Serial, Identifier, Fieldbus and PF
Keyboard
C202 Job override Defines what device is to be used when selecting the running Job. Off
This source has a higher priority than C201 Job. The option is accessible when
Job is accessible (RBU type).
Available options; Off, DigIn, Ethernet/Serial, Identifier, Fieldbus and PF
Keyboard
C210 Lock on reject When this parameter is activated, the tool locks when a NOK tightening has No
occurred.
Available options; No, DigIn unlock and Rev ring unlock
To unlock tool use digital input unlock, rev ring unlock, Fieldbus or the
Ethernet/serial protocol.
C211 Result of non- Yes/No No
tightenings If Yes is selected, then a non-tightening event i.e. loosening, batch operation
will generate a result.
If the checkbox is selected, then the non-tightening events; OK loosening,
batch increment or batch decrement generate a result that is stored in the PF
database. This parameter is used for Pset and Multistage. For Job, see J341.
C220 Disable loosening at Yes/No No
OK Used to prevent the operator from loosening a correctly tightened joint.
C230 OE positioning type Reverse/Forward/Reverse Torque Based Forward
Selects type of positioning mode for open end.
C240 Reset batch at Pset Yes/No Yes

change Resets the batch counter when a new Pset is selected.
C241 Reset batch at Pset Yes/No Yes
store Used if batch counter for a Pset is to be stored, and a reset of batch counter is
wanted.
C242 Decrement batch at Yes/No/If last tightening OK No
OK loosening If YES, an OK Loosening generates a batch decrement for both OK and NOK
tightening. Set to If last tightening OK to decrement only for OK tightening.
This function only works with a single spindle, NOT with Sync.
C243 Batch status at OK/NOK NOK

increment Defines if an increment or bypass operation is OK or NOK.
9836 3123 01 361 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
C244 Increase batch at OK tightening OK
tightening OK+NOK tightening
Defines if batch counter shall be increased at OK tightenings or at OK+NOK
tightenings.
C250 Use last Pset Yes/No No
Use last Pset which was selected before Power Focus reboot.
C260 Set Time and date are set by this command.
C270 Events Opens the window for event log and display options.
22.4.3 Network
number setup
C300 IP address The IP address is a number for identification in a network. 0.0.0.0
C301 Subnet mask Specifies the number of IP addresses on the subnet and also the number of PF 0.0.0.0
that can be placed below a Net reference, if no router is used.
C302 Default router IP address of the router used on the subnet. 0.0.0.0
C310 Channel ID Identification number of the channel/system to which the programming refers. 0
Valid values are 0-20. 0 is only used for standalone PF.
C311 Channel name Name of PF. It is possible to use up to 25 characters.
C312 Cell reference IP Defines the IP address to the Power Focus acting Cell reference. 0.0.0.0
The Cell reference monitors and collects information from the Cell members
included in the group.
This IP address must be written into each included Cell member.
C313 Cell ID number The Cell ID is a unique number for the Cell reference (a kind of identification 0
number).
Valid values are 0-1000. Accessible when the Power Focus is a Cell reference.
C314 Cell name A unique name to be able to find the Cell in the network.
It is possible to use up to 25 characters. Accessible when the Power Focus is a
Cell reference.
C315 Net reference IP Defines the IP address to the Power Focus acting Net reference. 0.0.0.0
The Net reference monitors and collects information from the Net members
included in the group.
This IP address must be written into each included Net member.
362 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number setup
C316 Job reference IP Defines the IP address to the Power Focus acting Job reference. 0.0.0.0
The Job reference monitors and collects information from the Job members
included in the group. RBU dependent.
This IP address must be written into each included Job member.
C317 Sync reference Defines the IP address to the Power Focus acting Sync reference. 0.0.0.0
The Sync reference monitors and collects information from the Sync members
included in the group. RBU dependent.
This IP address must be written into each included Sync member.
C320 Multicast On/Off. Enable/disable Multicast functionality. Off
C321 Multicast IP address It is possible to set this IP address between 224.0.0.1 (all devices on this sub 225.6.7.8
net) and 239.255.255.255 (multicast standard).
Only valid if C320 Multicast is activated.
C322 Port Port number for multicast communication. 8086
C323 Results None/All/Not ok All

The results that are reported to the multicast address.
C324 Traces None/All/Not ok None
The traces that are reported to the multicast address.
C325 Sync status On/Off. Used if sending Sync status on multicast. Off
C326 Event code On/Off. Used if sending event code on multicast. Off
C330 Port Port number for open protocol server Ethernet communication. 4545
C331 Serial cable loss When enabled, Power Focus detects cable loss when running open protocol On
detection serial on serial port 1 or 2.
C340 Port Port number for ToolsTalk PF Ethernet communication. 6543
C350 ToolsNet On/Off Off
Result after each tightening is recorded in ToolsNet. A ToolsNet database
registers and stores the results from tightenings, traces, data and history. Each
PF units can store information from approximately 5000 tightenings. But the
capacity in the ToolsNet database is, in principle, unlimited. The information
can be mapped against the Power Focus, object or VIN-number, as desired.
C351 IP address IP address for ToolsNet server. Only valid if C350 ToolsNet is activated. 0.0.0.0
C352 Port Port number for ToolsNet communication. 6570

Port 6570 is not to ToolsNet but to the PIM server which connects
PF units to ToolsNet.
C353 Traces None/All/Not ok None
The traces reported to ToolsNet.
9836 3123 01 363 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
C354 Keep Pset date on Used to keep Pset time stamp when Pset data is read from file. None
restore On: Pset date is kept when uploading file to controller. Off: Pset date is changed
to current date when uploading file to controller.
C360 Port Port number for Acta Ethernet connection. 6540
22.4.4 COM ports

number setup
C400 Baud rate The baud rate of the Serial 1 COM port on the MC-card of the Power Focus. 9600 bits/s
Available options: 2400, 4800 and 9600
C401 Protocol The type of protocol running on the serial 1 COM port on the MC-card of ASCII
PF.
Available options: None, ASCII, 3964R and IDESCO
C410 Baud rate The baud rate of the Serial 2 COM port on the CC card of the Power Focus. 9600 bits/s
Available options: 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 and 115200 bits/s
22.4.5 Display
number setup
C500 Language Select language for the Power Focus display. English
Options available in ToolsTalk: Chinese, English, French, German, Italian,
Japanese, Brazil, Spanish and Swedish
C501 Torque unit Select unit for showing torque. Nm
Options available: Nm, lbf.ft, lbf.in, kpm, kgf.cm, ozf.in, and dNm.
C503 Torque with PVT Add PVT compensate value to display torque value. No
comp
C510 One channel Shows how the result after a tightening will be presented in the PF Graph user
interface.
Four variables can be shown at the same time. In PC, activate the part window
with the left mouse button, open the list with variables with the right mouse
button, and select the variable to follow.
C511 Two channels Possible to show two PF channels at the same time. Select window to edit with
keys 1, 2, 3 and 4. Then press the enter key to activate list of options. Pset and
PF channel no. is changed with Pset (-/+) and change (-/+) keys. This function is
valid only for the PF Graph user interface.
C512 Compact display Used to set-up the compact display.
C520 Viewing angle Set the PF Graph display-viewing angle to modify display visibility. (Not for
ToolsTalk PF user).
364 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list
C530 Soft keys enabled Function that connects and disconnects the menu selection keys. On the PF Yes
Graph display, the five top keys will be locked. On the PF Compact the
functions Autoset, plus (+) and minus (-) key will be locked.
C540 Backlight auto off If selected, the lights on the PF Graph display will turn off after 30 minutes of Yes
inactivity. The light will turn on again after a key is pushed or after a tightening.
C550 Theme Selected color theme. PF4000
Available options: PF4000, Classic, Night
C551 OK background Background color in result windows for OK results. Default
Available options: Default, Black, White, Green
C552 OK foreground Foreground (text) color in result windows for OK results. Default
C553 NOK background Background color in result windows for NOK results. Default
C554 NOK foreground Foreground (text) color in result windows for OK results. Default
22.4.6 Memory
number setup
C600 Type Presents different options to configure the memory. Default
Access is depending on RBU type. configuration
Available options: Default configuration, More Psets, More Jobs, More
results, More events, More Identifiers and Totally configurable, Pset
comments.
C601 No. of Psets Number of Psets possible to configure. 250
Always readable. Writable if C600 Type is set to “Totally configurable”.
Scope: 1 to 600
C602 No. of Jobs Number of Jobs possible to configure. 99
Scope: 1 to 700
C603 No. of Results Number of results possible to save. 5000
Scope: 1 to 9000
C604 No. of Identifier Number of VINs possible to save in each result. 1
result parts Always readable. Writable if C600 Type is set to “Totally configurable”.
Scope: 1 to 4
C605 No. of Events Number of events possible to save. 100
Scope: 1 to 800
C606 No. of Statistical Number of statistical events possible to save. 100
events Always readable. Writable if C600 Type is set to “Totally configurable”.
Scope: 1 to 500
9836 3123 01 365 (428)

Parameter list

number setup
C607 No. of Traces Number of traces possible to save 8
Scope: 1 to 100
C609 Estimated memory Command that informs the user about the memory allocation.
usage Always readable. Not writable.
C610 Delete all results Tightening and statistical database for the Power Focus is deleted.
C611 Total reset Totally reset of the Power Focus memory.
All programming, tightenings and statistics will be deleted.
C612 Reset general event All events in the general event log are deleted.
log
C613 Reset statistical All events in the statistical event log are deleted.
event log
22.4.7 Accessibility
number setup
C800 Use Prevents parameter updates on the Power Focus keyboard and from ToolsTalk No
PF applications.
C801 Entry Specify unit allowed to enter the password. Available options: Tools Talk and All
All
C802 Setup password Choose a password, which will give write access to all parameters except those
for the network.
C803 Communication Choose a password, which will give write access to the network parameters.
password
22.5 Tool
22.5.1 Information
number value
T100 Type Shows information about the connected tool type.
366 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number value
T101 Usage Type of tool, fixed or handheld. Fixed tools have a lower max speed, which
means that this parameter has to be evaluated when calculating the speed
factor.
Options available. Handheld and Fixed
Accessible when a tool is connected, except STB offline.
T102 Tool max torque Shows the maximum tightening torque for the tool in chosen unit. Possible Nm
values between 0.1 and 6553 Nm.
The value is possible to change if correct password privileges are met.
Accessible when a tool is connected, except STB offline.
This parameter must only be changed by users with tool
knowledge. Read only access for ST/SL tools and STB online.
T103 Gear ratio Shows the mechanical gear ratio for the tool.
T104 Production date Tool production date. In Unix format.
T105 Serial number Shows the serial number of the tool.
T106 Denomination
T107 Product number
T110 Size Shows information about the motor size in the tool.
T111 Type Shows information about the connected Tensor tool type.
Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.
T113 Denomination Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.
T114 Product number Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.
T121 Denomination Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.
T122 Product number Accessible when an ETX tool is connected.
T130 Application code Shows the version number of the application code.
version
T131 Boot code version Shows the version number of the boot-code.
22.5.2 Configuration
9836 3123 01 367 (428)

Parameter list
Parameter Parameter name Description Default value

number
T200 Tool start select Defines which device is allowed to start the tool. Tool trigger
source When safety trigger is used, GPIO 4 function must be set to ”Off”.
To start the tool, safety trigger and start trigger must be pushed
simultaneously (second button must be pushed within 0.5 s from first
button, order is arbitrary). If any safety trigger or start trigger is released
while tool is running, tool will stop immediately.
Once tool has been started using safety trigger, both buttons must first
be released to allow the tool to be started again.
Options available: Tool trigger, DigIn, Fieldbus, Sync start, Remote
start, Front/Push start, Front/Push start AND Tool trigger, Front/Push
start OR Tool trigger, Safety trigger
T201 Timer enable tool Determines if and how the tool shall be locked by default, and requires Off
to be unlocked by digital input Timer enable tool.
The function unlocks the tool for a period of T202 seconds. Once the
period expires, the tool will be locked again. If a start attempt is made
before T202 seconds have passed, the tool will remain unlocked until it
is stopped or button is released.
Options:
Off: timer enabled tool functionality will not be in use.
Always: timer enabled tool functionality will be in use, and that
tightening, loosening and positioning (for Open end tools) will be
disabled.
Tightening: timer enabled tool functionality will be in use, and that
tightening will be disabled.
Loosening: timer enabled tool functionality will be in use, and that
loosening will be disabled.
Positioning: timer enabled tool functionality will be in use, and that
positioning (for Open end tools) will be disabled.
At least one input source must be configured to use
digital input Timer enable tool, otherwise the
configuration will be useless (the tool will be disabled
and it will not be possible to enable it).
T202 Timer enable tool Timer function within range 0.5 to 5.0 seconds. 0,5 s
time For more information, see section Tool.
647H
T203 Direction alert Possibility to add alert to tool direction. Options: Off, CW, CCW. Off
T204 Alert type Defines the type of alert for T203. Options: Buzzer, flash tool LEDs,
buzzer and LEDs.
T210 Mode Defines the function of the Tool accessory bus. Off
Available options: Off, Power on, General purpose IO, ST Bus
Not applicable on SL drives
T220 Enable On
T221 Volume Available options: Low, Medium, High High
368 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number
T224 Events The event-sound configuration.
T230 CW pressed Defines the function of function button when ring is in CW position. For SL-drive:97
Available functions are described in chapter. (Toggle CW
CCW)
Otherwise: Off
T231 CCW pressed Defines the function of the function button when ring is in CCW For SL-drive:97
position. Available functions are described in chapter. (Toggle CW
CCW)
Otherwise: Off
T232 CW single push Defines the function of function button single push when ring is in CW Off
position. Available functions are described in chapter.
T233 CCW single push Defines the function of function button single push when ring is in Off
CCW position. Available functions are described in chapter.
T234 CW double push Defines the function of function button double push when ring is in CW Off
position. Available functions are described in chapter.
T235 CCW double push Defines the function of function button double push when ring is in Off
CCW position. Available functions are described in chapter.
T236 Push detection Defines the maximum time that may elapse from button down to button 300
interval up for a push to be detected. Range: 250 to 1000 ms.
T237 Next push interval Defines the maximum time that may elapse from successful detection of 300
a push for a new push to be detected. Range: 250 to 1000 ms.
T240 Events The blue LED is used to highlight events similar to the relays of the Off
controller. The blue LED may be set to highlight several events. Use the
add key to add events and set duration. Remove events with the remove
key. Available functions are described in chapter.
T250 Illuminator mode Defines operation mode of illuminator (LED’s in front of the tool and Off
corresponding relay function). Available selections are off, on, tracking
event and event controlled.
T251 On event Defines which event (relay function) that is used to turn on illuminator Off
while operating in “tracking event” or “event controlled” mode. For
available events see Digital I/O and fieldbus items (Blue LED).
648H
T252 Off event Defines which event (relay function) that is used to turn off illuminator Off
while operating in “event controlled” mode. For available events see
Digital I/O and fieldbus items (Blue LED).
649H
T253 On time Defines how long illuminator will remain lit, if not turned off by event, 60
while operating in “tracking event” or “event controlled” mode.
On time period starts to elapse when on event occurs. In case on event
occurs again before on time has elapsed, the on time period will be
restarted.
9836 3123 01 369 (428)

Parameter list

number
T260 Control type Selection of tool light control sources. Defines which protocol the tool PF-controlled:1
lights should follow:
Available options: PF-controlled:1, PF-controlled:2, PF-controlled:3,
Light off.
The table below shows the functionality of the tool LED’s for each
option.
Option Yellow tool light Red tool light Green tool light
PF- LOW. Torque HIGH. Torque OK. Torque and

controlled:1 and/or angle and/or angle angle values
values under values over within specified
specified limits. specified limits. limits.
PF- Customer specific.
controlled:2
PF- Event code to be Tightening Tightening OK
controlled:3 acknowledged NOK
Light off Tool LED’s functionality disabled.
T261 Use on time On/Off. Defines whether the tool LED’s should light for a specified Off
period of time (on) or continuously (off) after a tightening. Default is
off.
T262 On time Select time for tool light LED, can be set between 0 and 300 seconds.
Only valid if C261 Use on time is on.
T263 Indicator mode Configures ST tool to show selected Pset (Pset 1-8) on the tool LED's. Off
Available options: Off, Pset indication
Applicable only if an ST tool is connected.
T270 Power save timeout Tool will turn off automatically if inactive for this period of time. 30
Unit: Minutes. Min value: 1. Max value: 120.
T271 Start condition Tool radio start condition Off
Alternatives: Off, Connected, Start request
T272 Link timeout After this timeout the tool is considered offline. 5000
Unit: Milliseconds. Min value: 1000. Max value: 60000.
T276 Max sender power Max sender power on the IRC module. Only IRC-B. Full
T277 Torque and angle Whether or not a torque and angle trace should be produced for every No
trace tightening. Only IRC-B.
T278 Power save Sets if the parameter T270 Power save timeout is active or not. On
T279 Delay "tool lock" This setting determines if a tool lock request shall be delayed until the On
current tightening/loosening/positioning is completed.
T290 Primary tool Expected primary tool connection. Cable or IRC. Cable
T292 IRC pairing When selected, IRC pairing starts if tool is in pairing mode and tool
connection is IRC-B.
T293 Power Focus IP port Port for STB tool IP connection. 6677
T294 Serial port Serial port where IRC-B device is connected. Serial 2 or internal. Serial 2
370 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number
T296 IRC-W operational Operational mode when IRC-W is used. Ad-hoc or Infrastructure Ad-hoc
mode
T297 IRC-W channel Radio channel when IRC-W is used. Valid channels: Auto, 1-14, 36, 40, Auto
44, 48
22.5.3 Diagnostic
number
T300 Sensor tracking Sensor tracking monitors the torque and angle sensors in real-time. A window with torque,
angle and zero offset values updates continuously. Sensor status is monitored while the
spindle is rotated (manually) or if the tool is heated/cooled etc. The motor does not run. An
exit-button ends the command and returns the user to the main diagnostic window.
Sensor tracking function is not possible to use during a tightening.
For DS tools have torque and zero offset tracking no validity since they
have no transducer. The value presented is therefore set to zero (0).
T310 Trigger Diagnostics for tool LED's and buttons.
T311 Direction ring Diagnostics for tool LED's and buttons.
T312 Function button Diagnostics for tool LED's and buttons.
T313 Lights Diagnostics for tool LED's and buttons.
T320 Motor temp. Shows the current motor temperature.
T321 Motor temp. limit Temperature when the motor is considered overheated.
T322 No. of over temp. Number of times the motor has reached its temperature limit.
T323 Peak motor temp. Maximum measured motor temperature.
22.5.4 Maintenance
number value
T400 Calibration value Shows the calibration value stored in the tool.
T401 Calibration date Shows the date of latest calibration for the tool. Automatically updated when
the calibration value is set.
9836 3123 01 371 (428)

Parameter list

number value
T402 Set calibration value This parameter sets the T400 Calibration value and the T401 Calibration date in
the tool memory, and performs a shunt calibration. The shunt calibration is
useful for determining if the shunt calibration value received at a previous
shunt calibration tends to drift away. The shunt calibration is also performed
before each new tightening, and the same checks and boundaries apply.
T403 Normalization value Shows the normalization value for the tool. 1000
Valid scope: 100 to 9999.
T404 Calibration alarm 0 = No alarm is active, 1 = activating of parameter T405 Calibration alarm 0
date. (Unix format no of seconds from 1970-01-01).
T405 Calibration alarm This parameter makes it possible to change date for next calibration alarm.
date
T406 Set calibration Not applicable in the PF Graph HMI.
alarm date
T410 Total no. of Total number of tightenings performed by the tool during its entire lifetime.
tightenings
T411 Service indicator Enable/disable (on/off) tool service indicator alarm function.
T412 Number of Number of performed tightenings since latest tool service.

tightenings since
service
T413 Service interval Number of tightenings between tool services. This parameter serves as service
indicator alarm limit. Value between 1 and 250 (x 10 000).
T414 Latest service date Shows the date of when the latest service was performed. Automatically
updated when Service counter reset is performed.
Possible to set manually to any date.
T415 Service counter Sets T412 Number of tightenings since service to zero, sets T414 Latest service
reset date to current date and sets T411 Service indicator to off.
T416 Lock tool on alarm Enables/disables lock on alarm. Tool will be locked while service indicator
alarm or while wear indicator alarm is activated.
T417 User message Shows a user specified message-string of maximum 35 characters plus a null-
termination. The message shall be stored in the tool memory.
T420 Use Open end Defines if a tool with an Open end head should be used.
T421 Inverted motor Shows if the Open end has to use an inverted motor rotation.
rotation
T422 Open end tightening Defines if Open end CW (clockwise) or CCW (counter clockwise) is to be
direction used.
T423 Open end tune The Open end tune command sets the reference position of the Open end
head, and measures the gear ratio and gear play. The tool rotates slowly in the
reverse direction until its true open position at the mechanical stop in the
Open end head is reached. Open end tuning measures the total T103 Gear ratio
and writes the new value to the tool memory.
T424 Max torque Defines the max value for P171 Limit
positioning limit
372 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number value
T430 Wear indicator Enables/disables (on/off) the wear indicator alarm function.
T431 Wear used For every tightening the wear is calculated through a formula with in-
parameters: torque, speed and temperature etc.
As soon as a tightening or loosening is started, the wear is calculated and
added to T431, which is the accumulated wear since last service.
When the T431 has reached 100%, it's time for service
When the tool has been serviced this parameter is set to 0.
T432 Remaining Estimated number of tightenings that can be performed before wear indicator
tightenings alarm occurs.
T433 Alarm factor Using T433, the customer can scale the effective service interval (time to 100%
wear alarm is activated). In case T433 is set to 25%, the alarm will activate 4
times earlier than by default. In case T433 is set to 400%, the alarm will
activate 4 times later than default.
T434 Min wear An additional condition for activation of wear indicator alarm. Specifies the 250000
tightenings minimum amount of tightenings (since latest service) that must be performed
before wear indicator alarm activates.
T440 QRTT on On/Off Off
Automatic tool calibration using the ACTA 4000 and a QRTT device is
enabled in this branch. A tool calibration session is started by connecting the
ACTA to the Power Focus and fit the QRTT device to the spindle. One
Multistage with three Psets is used when the calibration is run, one torque
tightening (for torque calibration) and two different rotate spindle (for
loosening and angle calibration) Psets.
It is necessary for the Power Focus to have enough memory space available to
store the Multistages and Psets needed. If the calibration shows an
unsatisfactory result the operator is assumed to take the appropriate action. No
calibration value (calibration- or normalization value etc.) will be changed
automatically.
T441 QRTT Pset 1 Pset used by ACTA. 0
T444 QRTT Mset Multistage used by ACTA. 0
T445 Create QRTT Creates the QRTT Pset and Multistage. Use only when tool is connected.
T450 Perform motor When selected, this parameter will perform motor tuning on the connected
tuning tool.
T451 Perform Sync motor When selected, this parameter will perform Sync motor tuning on the
tuning connected tools (a Sync group must exist).
T460 Disconnect tool Disables reading and writing to the tool memory and allows the user to
change tools without power off.
9836 3123 01 373 (428)

Parameter list
22.5.5 Buzzer configuration

number value
E100 Name Sound buzzer name.
E101 Frequency Valid scope: 400 - 4000 Hz 800
E102 Time On Valid scope: 0.01 - 65.0 Seconds 0.1
E103 Time Off Valid scope: 0.01 - 65.0 Seconds 0.2
E104 Repetition Valid scope: 0 - 100 times 3
E105 Volume Valid scope: 0 - 100 % 50
This parameter is relative (in percent) to parameter T221 Volume, which could
be set to high, medium or low. T221 Volume is found in the sound setup
window.
22.5.6 Sound configuration

Parameter Parameter name
number
W102 Stream name
374 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list
22.6 Accessories
22.6.1 Digital I/O

number
A110 Relay status Shows the usage and status of the relay devices.
A111 DigIn status Shows the usage and status of the digital input devices.
A112 Relay test Performs a test of the relays used.

Be aware of that changing the state of a relay may effect equipment
connected to it. Please ensure that no damage or injury can be caused by
the connected equipment before activating.
It is not possible to have Power Focus in normal operation during the test.
9836 3123 01 375 (428)

Parameter list
22.6.2 I/O bus

number setup
A230 Selector confirm Available when A232 Selector external controlled is set to No. Options: off, on, Off
on with acknowledge.
Off: function disabled.
On: when a new Pset/Multistage is selected Power Focus needs a confirmation
signal from the selector. This is made by lifting a socket from the indicated
socket tray. The exception is when a Pset/Multistage from the same socket tray
is selected sequentially. Then no confirmation is needed.
On with acknowledge: Every time a new Pset/Multistage is selected Power
Focus needs a confirmation signal from the selector. This is made by lifting a
socket from the indicated socket tray.
With this option there is no exception when a Pset/Multistage from the same
socket tray is selected sequentially. Then the Power Focus still needs a
confirmation signal from the selector
Selector confirmation is also applicable when selecting
Psets/Multistages in a Job.
A231 Selector lost mode Determines whether the last selected Pset or “No Pset” is selected when Last Pset
communication with a selector is lost. Available when A232 Selector external
controlled is set to No.
A232 Selector external Turns selectors into externally controlled mode. Used to externally control the No
controlled Selector LED’s via fieldbus items Selector control green light and Selector
control red light. For more information, see section Digital I/O and fieldbus
items.
376 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list
22.6.3 Tool bus

Parameter Parameter name
number
A310 GPIO
A311 ST selector
A312 ST scanner
A313 Internal ST selector
A314 TLS ST Tool Tag
22.6.4 Printer
number setup
A400 Brand With parameter printer type the printer is selected. Options are: IBM, HP and IBM
Epson.
A401 Paper size With parameter paper size the paper format is selected. A4
Options are: A4, US Letter or Printer roll..
A402 Continuous print With this parameter selected, the results after each tightening are automatically No
sent to the printer port.
A403 Trace with angle Used when printing a trace from the Power Focus printer port. No
offset
A404 New page at Job With A402 Continuous print and this parameter selected, each new job is printed No
done on a new page.
A405 Include C311 P402 Adds an extra header containing Channel name, Pset name and VIN to the
VIN beginning of each batch.
22.7 Sync
22.7.1 Programming
Sync programming options are only available if PF is a Sync reference.
9836 3123 01 377 (428)

Parameter list

number value
S100 Sync group list Create a Sync group list by selecting available PF units.
S101 Tightening strategy Defines strategy to use for Sync tightening. State Sync
Available options: Stage and SynchroTork
SynchroTork allows continuous Synchronization of up to six spindles
during final tightening. This will improve assembly quality in the joints
where an even clamp force build-up is critical, such as in U-bolt
applications. The torque difference between the spindles is minimized
during the tightening stage by adjusting the individual speeds.
Synchronization of the tools is assured through high-speed communication
via the proprietary Power Focus accessory bus. It should be noted that this
function does not eliminate the need for a reaction bar, or similar, in higher-
torque applications.
Option SynchroTork is only available for PF 4000.
SynchroTork is not applicable for angle and DS control
strategies.
S102 Loosening strategy Normal/Sync loosening. Sync loosening is a safety feature that makes all Normal
spindles sense torque before loosening starts. Normal means that all spindles
are loosening with full speed and power.
S103 Continue if Sync Yes/No. If this option is selected the Sync group is allowed to continue No
failed tightening with the Sync members that reached the first target value in time.
The spindles that did not reach the first target value in time are disabled.
Only valid for two stage tightenings.
S104 Sync OK time Used together with continue if Sync failed and defines the time that the 2
spindles in the Sync group wait, after reaching the first target value, for all
spindles to reach the same status. If this time limit is exceeded, the Sync
tightening continues without the spindles that did not reach the first target in
time.
Permitted values are between 0 and 13 seconds.
22.8 Identifier
22.8.1 Identifier setup

number value
I100 Input source Defines what source is accepted when an identifier from Type 1 is read. List menu
Available options: Off, Scanner, Fieldbus, Ethernet/Serial, Ethernet/Serial
& scanner, ST scanner, Scanner & Fieldbus, All.
I101 Significant A string of integers that tells PF which positions to look at in the VIN.
positions
378 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number value
I102 Significant strings A table that matches each filtered string from VIN to a Pset or Job
number.
I103 Send identifier Makes it possible to send a 100 character long identifier to the Power Input menu
Focus.
I104 Significant A string of integers that tells PF which positions in the scanned barcode
positions for Result that are considered for result part A.
Part 1
I105 Belongs to Type An integer that tells which ID type result part A belongs to. 1
I107 Length Length of the incoming identifier string. Input menu
I180 Identifier work Defines in which order different Identifier types are entered 1
order
I181 Tool locked during If selected, the tool is locked until the work order is completed. 0
work order
I183 Reset all identifiers If selected, all identifiers (in the work order) for the selected Pset are 0
at Pset batch done deleted at batch done and the work order needs to be recreated for the next
Pset. If not selected, usually only one identifier type needs to be changed
(in the work order) for the next Pset.
I184 Ignore Identical If selected, all Work Orders that are repetitive will be discarded 0
Work Orders
22.9 Fieldbus
Parameter Parameter Description
number name
F100 Fieldbus type This parameter must be selected first. It includes the types; DeviceNet, ProfiBus-DP,
InterBus, ModBusPlus, ModBus/TCP, ControlNet, Ethernet/IP, Profinet-IO, FL-net, and
InterBus 2Mb.
If there is no fieldbus configuration inside the Power Focus when open fieldbus icon or read
from PF, “None” will be shown in the setup window. If offline programming is used, “None”
is selected when starting. If there is no fieldbus card installed in Power Focus, fieldbus
programming only works in offline mode.
F102 From PF data From PF data length is the total length of the data string sent from PF to the PLC. The lengths
length must be the same as defined in the PLC. Because swap bytes are needed for some fieldbus
types, only even numbers should be programmed (2, 4, 8, 10, etc.). Data length should be a
number higher than zero.
The maximum length that can be programmed is different for each fieldbus type.
If InterBus is used, PF has to be restarted when the data length is changed.
9836 3123 01 379 (428)

Parameter list

number name
F103 To PF data length To PF data length is the total length of the data string send from the PLC to PF. The length
must be the same as defined in the PLC. Because swap bytes are needed for some fieldbus
types, only even numbers should be programmed (2, 4, 8, 10, etc.). Data length should be a
number higher than zero.
The maximum length that can be programmed is different for each fieldbus type.
If InterBus is used, PF has to be restarted when the data length is changed.
F104 From PF global From PF global data length is the length of sending broadcast data to the network. This is a
data length special function for ModBusPlus, not available for other fieldbus types. If only point-to-point
data is transferred, set this parameter to zero.
From PF data length - From PF global data length = From PF point-to-point
data length (which is only available in ModBusPlus).
F105 To PF global data To PF global data length is the length of receiving broadcast data from the network. This is a
length special function for ModBusPlus, not available for other fieldbus type. Max length = 64
bytes. If only point-to-point data is received, set this parameter to zero.
To PF data length - To PF global data length = To PF point-to-point data
length (which is only available in ModBusPlus).
F106 From PF data The FL-net memory area 2 for cyclic data transfer is 8192 words. This area is shared by all
offset nodes in the network. Each node configures the part of the area it will update. "From PF data
offset" is the start address for data from PF.
F107 To PF data offset The FL-net memory area 2 for cyclic data transfer is 8192 words. This area is shared by all
nodes in the network. Each node configures the part of the area it will update. To PF data
offset is the start address for data to PF.
F110 Set node address Some buses can use a SW-configured node address and baud rate. This parameter has two
and baud rate selections:
from Software: Makes it possible to program node address and baud rate from user interface.
Hardware: Node address and baud rate is configured with the switches on the fieldbus card.
Normally the switches on the fieldbus card must be set in a specific way to
enable these parameters from ToolsTalk PF.
F111 FB node address This parameter specifies the network ID number used in the fieldbus system. Two controllers
in the same fieldbus network cannot have the same node address.
Valid for DeviceNet (0-63).
F112 Baudrate Communication speed on the fieldbus system.
The baud rate shall be the same in all PF units and in the PLC.
F113 Connection mode This parameter manages the way the fieldbus system detects changes of data on the different
controllers. Some fieldbus types have the possibility to set different connection modes.
There are three modes; polled, bit strobe and change of state.
The settings in PF and the PLC must be the same.
380 (428) 9836 3123 01

Parameter list

number name
F120 Set node address Some buses can use a SW-configured node address. This parameter has two selections:
from Software: Makes it possible to program node address from user interface.
Hardware: Node address is configured with the switches on the fieldbus card.
Normally the switches on the fieldbus card must be set in a specific way to
enable these parameters from ToolsTalk PF.
F121 FB node address This parameter specifies the network ID number used in the fieldbus system. Two controllers
in the same fieldbus network cannot have the same node address.
Valid for Profibus-DP (1-124), ModbusPlus (1-99), and ControlNet (1-64).
F130 PCP length Provides a way to send longer data strings than the standard 20 bytes process data. The data
package that is sent to or from the Power Focus can be longer than the 20 bytes process data.
The part exceeding the process data is sent in small packages. The PCP length defines the
package length. PCP data has lower priority then the process data.
Available selections are 0, 1, 2, and 4. These numbers are the lengths in words. 0 = no PCP.
The PF has to be restarted when the PCP length is changed. The length must be
the same in the PLC.
F131 Process data Process data length is the first part of the InterBus message. The length has to be same for
length both input and output data. Maximum process data length is 20 bytes minus the PCP length in
bytes. This means that the highest Process string length is 20 bytes if PCP is zero.
The PF has to be restarted when the process data length is changed. The length
must be the same in the PLC.
F140 Set Source ModBusPlus global data exchanges require a source address, which is a node address where
address from to get the global data from.
Software: the node address is set from user interface.
Hardware: the node address only can be set from the switches on ProfiBus card.
F141 Source address Source address is the network ID number used in the fieldbus system. Set address to get
global data from this source.
F150 IP address Set an Ethernet connection IP address for fieldbus module, such as ModBus/TCP,
Ethernet/IP, Profinet-IO, FL-Net.
F151 Subnet mask Set an Ethernet connection Subnet mask for fieldbus module, such as ModBus/TCP,
Ethernet/IP, Profinet-IO.
F152 Gateway Set an Ethernet connection Gateway for fieldbus module, such as ModBus/TCP, Ethernet/IP,
Profinet-IO.
F155 Device name A set for Profinet-IO, define a device name and master need to know the device name to get
communicate with it.
F157 Assembly Parameter valid only for Ethernet/IP and works only on Anybus FW 2.xx or later. It makes
instance possible to configure Anybus card with Assembly Instances as in FW 1.32 or earlier.
For 0: it is ODVA compatible, 1: FW 1.32 compatible (Listen-only 4, Input-only 3)
F160 Virtual fieldbus This is a choice to make a virtual fieldbus. One virtual master can have four virtual members
F161 Virtual from PF From PF Data length for the virtual member.
data length
9836 3123 01 381 (428)

Parameter list

number name
F162 Virtual to PF data To PF Data length for the virtual member.
length
F163 Virtual from PF From PF data offset for the virtual member.
data offset
F164 Virtual to PF data To PF data offset for the virtual member.
offset
F200 FB update If the fieldbus system is heavily loaded, it might be necessary to slow down the update
interval interval in Power Focus fieldbus card. If this parameter is set to 0.5 seconds, the Power Focus
updates the bus every 0.5 seconds. The average data traffic must be possible to fit within the
programmed interval. If the traffic has a higher peak load the messages are buffered. Default
value 0.10 s.
Valid settings range from 0.05 to 10 seconds.
F210 Tool stop at If the fieldbus system goes down or Power Focus goes offline it might be necessary to stop
offline running tool for safety purpose.
No tool stop: does not stop running tool.
Tool stop - fieldbus start: stops running tool if tool start select source is fieldbus.
F220 Read result If selected, the result is not sent until the PLC sends the read command. To enable this
handshake function, ReadResultHandshake in To PF Setup, and ReadResultHandshakeAck and
SentTighteningId in From PF setup have to be added in the bitmap.
F300 Bitmap select This parameter makes it possible to view the bitmap in the same way in Power Focus and the
PLC configuration software. It defines if byte 0 or byte 1 shall be to the left.
Default settings are the type that is common for the selected fieldbus type.
For DeviceNet, Intel Endian must be used. For ProfiBus, Motorola Endian must be used.
382 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
23 Event codes
Event codes are displayed as popup windows to inform users of the status of Power Focus. All events are
stored in the Statistics event log or the General event log, depending on the event code type. The number
of events that can be stored in the log depends on memory configuration (see section Memory). Once the
650H
log is full, the oldest events will be overwritten by the most recent ones.
There are three severity levels defined for the events. The characteristics for each one are:
 Info: Events that only informs the user of some activity, for example 'PF Started'.
o PF4000 Graph: White background
o TTPF: Info symbol
 Warning: Events that may indicate unexpected behavior, for example 'Torque high'.
o PF4000 Graph: Yellow background
o TTPF: Warning symbol
 Error: Severe errors in the system or events that indicates a failure of some sort. Almost all events
with this severity level needs to be acknowledged, for example "Current limit reached".
o PF4000 Graph: Red background
o TTPF: Error symbol
To open the event log, click Get Event Log in the
Options list.
The Event Log window appears.

Click Clear to delete all events in the log.
Click Save to file to store the event log as a text file.
Click Open in Excel to export the log to the
Microsoft Excel software.
Click Read to update the status of the event code
window.
When option Automatic update is checked, the
events in the log are showed in real-time (in the
same way as event pop up widows).
9836 3123 01 383 (428)

Event codes
The event codes are logged with four integer parameters shown in the Control column. For some event
codes, these parameters are used to store extra information about the event.
As default, all events are displayed and logged.

It is possible to configure PF to show or log selected events only.
Open Controller>Configuration>Events and click the Event button to open the Controller Events window.
Select Log to log the event in the Power Focus Statistic or General event log.
Select Show to display the event in Graph and TTPF interfaces.
384 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
The Statistic and General event log can also be

cleared from the system setup branch.
Open Controller>Memory and click Reset general
event log and/or Reset statistical event log. Confirm
the command in the pop-up window.
23.1 Event code list

The event codes are listed with number, name, description and a procedure to clear the event. The
Acknowledge column indicates that the event has to be acknowledged before proceeding. An 'x' in the
columns for PF ready and Tool ready indicate that the relay and corresponding fieldbus item are affected,
and that an action (described under 'Procedure') has to be taken before proceeding.
Before any work is performed, ensure that the safety instructions for the controller and the tool have been
read and understood. Note that some of the procedures described only can be performed by an Atlas
Copco authorized service provider.
9836 3123 01 385 (428)

Event codes
See also the General safety instructions in this manual, and Product Information for the controller and the
tool.
The events are grouped according to the table below.
Event
Group Description
code
E001-E099 0 Rundown failures
E100-E199 1 Event related errors
E200-E299 2 User input events
E300-E399 3 Statistical events
E400-E499 4 Communication events
E500-E599 5 Hardware events (tool)
E600-E699 6 Hardware events
E700-E799 7 Hardware events
E800-E899 8 Software events
E900-E999 9 Events MMI
23.1.1 E001-E099 Rundown failures

Event Event name Description Procedure
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
E003 Torque measurement The programming is incorrect as Check the programming for the PF ready
possibly invalid no movement is possible in the Pset.
second stage. Ensure that there is some movement
in the second stage.
386 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
23.1.2 E100-E199 Event related errors

Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E102 Rundown prohibited An attempt to make a tightening is Depending on C210 Lock on reject x
due to Lock on made and tightenings are disabled by configuration, either unlock the tool by
Reject the parameter C210 Lock on reject the direction ring or by digital input
because the result was not OK. Unlock tool or Master unlock tool.
Additional parameter information: If applicable, reconfigure C210 Lock
First integer parameter: 0=Locked on reject.
during tightening, 1=locked during
loosening
Second integer parameter 0=Service
denied, 1=service aborted.
E103 Tool locked by One or several of the digital input Unlock the tool with one of the x
digital input functions lock the tool: Tool disable, following digital input functions:
Tool tightening disable, Tool loosening Tool disable, Tool tightening disable,
disable. Tool loosening disable
Additional parameter information: Note: Unlock tool or Master unlock
First integer parameter: 0=Locked tool will not act as unlock trigger.
loosening
E107 Rundown prohibited A Job using line control is selected with Unlock the tool with one of the x
due to Line control, parameter Use J330 line control. The following digital input functions: Line
batch not enabled Job does not start until a line control control start signal, Job abort or
start signal is received from digital Master unlock tool.
input function Line control start signal.
Additional parameter information:

First integer parameter: 0=Locked
loosening
E112 Rehit An attempt to tighten an already For information only.
tightened bolt was made.
E113 Current limit reached The current limit has been reached, the Acknowledge the event. x x x
- Rundown aborted drive is disabled. Perform a motor tuning.
Tool>Maintenance>Motor tuning.
9836 3123 01 387 (428)

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E117 Tool locked – cannot Power Focus cannot communicate with Acknowledge the event. x x x
access RBU the RBU and must be rebooted to Turn off PF and check that the RBU is
protect data. correctly connected.
Reboot PF.
First integer parameter: 0=Locked
loosening
E120 Motor tuning failure The connection between the tool and Acknowledge the event. Check that x x x
PF is incorrect or faulty, or the remote the remote start connector on PF is
start connector is missing or incorrectly present and correctly wired.
wired. Check that the tool cable and
connectors are undamaged and
correctly connected.
Service the tool.
E121 Open end tuning This event indicates that the Open end Acknowledge the event. x x x
failure tuning command has not been Check that the remote start connector
successfully performed. on PF is present and correctly wired.
Verify that parameters T421-T422
match the geometry of the attached OE
head.
Check that the mechanical stop is
undamaged and working properly.
E122 Open end positioning Open end positioning failed due to too Remove the tool from the joint.
failure much torque during positioning phase. Restart the positioning.
E125 Alarm on timeout / This event is issued when parameter Redo the tightening.
Alarm on torque lost P246 Alarm on end time shutoff is If the event reappears, set P141 End
activated and the time defined in P141 time to a higher value or set P246
End time is exceeded before final Alarm on end time shutoff to No.
torque is reached.
The reason can be that the tool has
slipped off the joint, for example.
388 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E126 Multistage aborted This event indicates that the current Check the additional information to
running Multistage has not been see which events occurred.
performed entirely (the drive has been Follow the procedure for those events.
shut off or the tool trigger was released
before the end).
If the second parameter in the sub
information is zero (no event is
indicated), activate P244 Alarm on lost
trigger and P246 Alarm on end time
shutoff in the stage in which the
multistage was aborted.
E126 additional parameter information

 The first integer parameter indicates at which stage that the Multistage was aborted.
 The second integer parameter indicates which event occurred. 0= no event occurred.
 The third and fourth integer parameters, each containing 32 bits, indicate what went wrong with the
tightening.
Example 1: E126 (2, 113, 9, 8)

The multistage was aborted (E126) in stage 2 (first digit), when the tightening reached current limit (E113
Current limit reached rundown aborted). The third digit, 9, equals 1+8 that correspond to Multistage
aborted and Current limit reached. The fourth digit, 8, corresponds to Final angle max exceeded.
NOTE: Current Limit Reached is one of few event codes for which there is a corresponding tightening
error bit.
Example 2: E126 (3, 129, 1, 16896)

The multistage was aborted (E126) in stage 3 (first digit), when torque lower than target occurred (E129
Torque lower than target). The third digit, 1, means Multistage aborted, and the fourth digit 16896 equals
16384+512, Torque less than target and Current monitoring max exceeded.
9836 3123 01 389 (428)

Event codes
First integer Second integer Third integer Fourth integer

The stage The event code Error bits part I Error bits part II
when the
Multistage
aborted
Dec Event Dec Event
n Stage n nnn No of event that Multistage aborted 1 Rundown angle max exceeded
1
occurred
2 Rehit 2 Rundown angle min not reached
Torque measurement 4 Final torque max exceeded
4
possible invalid
8 Current limit reached 8 Final angle max exceeded
Timeout on end time 16 Self tap max exceeded
16
shutoff
32 Remove fastener limit 32 Self tap min not reached
64 Drive disabled 64 PVT monitoring max exceeded
Transducer lost 128 PVT monitoring min not
128
reached
256 Transducer short circuit 256 PVT Compensate overflow
Transducer corrupt 512 Current monitoring max
512
exceeded
Sync timeout 1024 Post view torque min not
1024
reached
2048 Dynamic CM Min Tq 2048 Post view torque max exceeded
4096 Dynamic CM Max Tq 4096 Post view torque angle too small
8192 Angle Max mon 8192 Trigger lost
16384 Yield nut off 16384 Torque less than target
32768 Yield too few samples 32768 Tool hot
390 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E127 PVT shut off This event indicates that the drive was In the Trace monitor, check the result
shut off in the selftap or prevail phase of and change the settings accordingly.
the rundown, or the compensate conditions
were not fulfilled.
E128 Trigger lost When the function trigger lost is activated For information only.
in the Pset, this event indicates that the
trigger of the tool was released before final
target.
E129 Torque lower than When the function torque lower than For information only.
target target is activated in the Pset, this event
indicates that the torque result is below Note: Check also E128 to see if E129
final target. The torque status is NOK even is issued because the trigger was
if the torque result was larger than final released before final target.
torque min.
E130 Post view torque Post view torque conditions were not In the Trace monitor, check the result x
shut off fulfilled. and change the settings accordingly.
E131 Tool Disconnected This event code is generated when the tool Acknowledge the event. x x x
is disconnected (logically or physically) If the tool has been logically
from PF. The event code is also generated disconnected, disconnect physically
when an attempt to start a disconnected also.
(logically or physically) tool is done.
Additional parameter information: Note: The tool can be logically
First integer parameter: 0=locked during disconnected if the user requests
tightening, 1=locked during loosening, disconnection or if the open end
2=locked during positioning, 3=locked settings are modified.
during motor tuning, 4=locked during
open end tuning.
A damaged cable can result

in a disconnected tool.
E132 Wrong tool start T200 Tool start select source is not Acknowledge the event. x x x
input setting corresponding to the remote start jumper Check the wiring of the remote start
position. connector.
Verify that the tool trigger is not
pressed during hot swap or system
start-up.
9836 3123 01 391 (428)

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E133 Tool locked by The tool is prohibited via ToolsTalk PF. Unlock the tool by x
Tools Talk - sending an “Enable tool” message via
Additional parameter information: ToolsTalk PF protocol or
First integer parameter: 0=locked during - using digital input Master unlock
tightening, 1=locked during loosening, tool.
2=locked during positioning, 3=locked
open end tuning.
E136 Tool locked by This event code is displayed if the tool is Unlock the tool by x
batch OK locked by the function P152 Lock at batch - using the digital inputs Unlock tool
OK. or Master unlock tool or
Additional parameter information: - sending an “Enable tool” message on
First integer parameter: 0=locked during fieldbus, Open protocol or ToolsTalk
tightening, 1=locked during loosening, PF protocol.
open end tuning.
E137 Tool locked by The tool is locked by fieldbus. Unlock the tool by x
fieldbus Additional parameter information: - sending an “Enable tool” message via
First integer parameter: 0=locked during fieldbus or
tightening, 1=locked during loosening, - using the digital input Master unlock
2=locked during positioning, 3=locked tool.
open end tuning.
E138 Wrong tool start It is only possible to start the tool from Check the setting for T200 Tool start
input source selected tool start select source. select source.
E139 Tool locked by The tool is locked by open protocol. Unlock the tool by x
Open protocol Additional parameter information: - sending an “Enable tool” message via
First integer parameter: 0=locked during Open protocol or
tightening, 1=locked during loosening, - using the digital input Master unlock
2=locked during positioning, 3=locked tool.
open end tuning.
392 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E140 Insert user ID card The tool is locked; the user must insert his Insert a valid ID card. x
to release tool ID card in the card reader to release the
tool.
First integer parameter: 0=locked during
tightening, 1=locked during loosening,
open end tuning.
E141 Tool locked during Multiple identifiers; tool is locked during Check the work order settings in the x
work order work order. Tool will be unlocked when Options dialog in the Identifier branch.
all expected identifiers have been received Scan the identifiers in the correct work
in correct order. order without pushing the trigger.
Unlock the tool by
Restoring of identifier configuration is
done
Reset all identifiers command is
performed via digital input, open
protocol or identifier monitor
Reset latest identifier command is
performed after the first type in the
work order is accepted.
E143 Tool locked by The PF has detected a serious condition Usually this is an operator error. x x
system and needs to lock the tool. Check configuration in PF.
E145 Tool locked by The tool is locked by digital input Timer Unlock the tool with digital input x
Timer enable tool enable tool when the Job was not started Timer enable tool.
within the time set in J320 Max time to If applicable, set J320 Max time to start
start Job. Job to a higher value.
E146 No tool cable Incorrect or damaged cable. Ensure that the tool cable is correctly x
detected connected and without damage.
Replace the cable.
E147 Tool locked by A Pset with click wrench tightening Use the correct combination of tool x
click wrench Pset strategy is selected for a tool. and Pset.

First integer parameter: 0=Locked during
tightening, 1=locked during loosening
9836 3123 01 393 (428)

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E149 Tool locked The function C220 Disable loosening at Unlock the tool by selecting forward x
disable loosening OK has locked the tool. on the tool, or by digital input Master
at OK unlock tool.
Additional parameter information: Continue tightening.
loosening
E150 Job client does not When running a Cell Job, this event is Check which controller in the Cell that
respond displayed by the Job reference when one is not responding.
of the Job members does not respond. Check the cables and connections
between the Cell member and the Cell
Additional parameter information: reference.
The first integer parameter indicates the Check that the IP addresses in the Cell
channel ID for the Job client that does not group are correct.
respond. Check that IP addresses within the Cell
is not used by someone else.
E151 Job in OFF mode It is not possible to select a new Job. The In the Job monitor, clear the Job off
Power Focus is in Job off mode. check box.
Select new Job.
E152 PF locked in Job Conditions within the job functionality Activate the controller. x
mode have locked the tool. E.g. due to not If possible, disable J302 Lock at Job
currently active tool in or after job done.
sequence, or tool not enabled after job
selection etc.

tightening
E153 Not ok to select A Job must be completed or aborted Finish running the present Job.
new Job before selecting a new Job. A Job must be If needed, abort running Job or select
selected on a Job master. new Job on Job master.
E154 Remote Job When running a Cell Job, this is displayed For information only.
running by the Job members when a Cell Job is
selected on the Job reference.
E155 Remote Job When running a Cell Job, this is displayed For information only.
aborted by the Job members when a Cell Job is
aborted.
394 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E156 Job members lost When running a Cell Job, this is displayed Check cables and connections to the
by the Job reference when it has lost lost Job client.
contact with one of the Job members. In the Controller menu of the lost Job
client, open Network and check that
Additional parameter information: the Job reference IP-address is correct,
The first integer parameter indicates the and that the Job member is part of the
channel ID for the lost Job client. same cell as the Job reference.
In the Job menu of the Job reference,
check that the all PFs are present in the
Job list.
E157 Job reference lost When running a Cell Job, this is displayed Check cables and connections to the
by the Job clients when they have lost Job reference.
contact with their Job reference. In the Controller menu, check the
network settings for the Job reference
and the Job clients. All Job clients and
the Job reference must belong to the
same cell.
E158 Invalid Job ID When the selected Job does not exist. In the Job reference, open the PF Map
and check the ID of all defined Jobs.
E159 No Pset in selected When the selected Job does not contain In the Job reference, open PF Map >
Job any Pset. Job, and double-click the selected Job.
Add the correct Psets and store the
settings.
E160 Job select source Attempt to select a Job with the wrong In the Job reference PF Map, open
not valid input source. Controller>Configuration.
In the Select source view, check the
settings for C201 Job.
E161 Line control alert The line control has been activated, and For information only.
1 the first control alert limit has been
reached.
E162 Line control alert The line control has been activated, and For information only.
2 the second control alert limit has been
reached.
9836 3123 01 395 (428)

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E166 Job aborted This event will be displayed when a For information only.
running Job is aborted.
Additional parameter information.
First integer parameter:
2 Digital input
3 Ethernet/serial (PC
5 Field bus
6 Keyboard
7 Reserved
8 Reserved
9 Manual mode (the current active
job is aborted and a new job
becomes active when selected from
digital input)
10 Timer 1 (max time to start job)
11 Timer 2 (max time to complete job)
12 Deleted (a pending job is deleted
from PF database)
13 Job off mode
14 Line control
Alarm 2
15 Job override
E167 Max coherent Not When the number of NOT OK tightenings For information only. x
OK tightenings in a row is reached, then the tool will be
reached locked and can be unlocked only via a
digital input (reset NOK counter).
E168 ST scanner Issued at ST scanner power-on if scan For information only.
settings not engine settings are not the same as
production default production defaults.
E169 ST scanner Issued at ST scanner power-on if scan For information only.
settings not at engine settings are not at the highest
highest security security level.
level
E175 Configuration will The Power Focus will erase the Accept or reject the memory re-
be erased at next configuration in the Power Focus memory configuration.
reboot and the RBU since the memory setup has
been changed.
E177 Functionality not The user is trying to use functionality that Replace the RBU or use another
in RBU is not enabled in the RBU. functionality.
396 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E178 Memory allocation The user is trying to allocate more Check settings for Controller >
error memory than exists in the Power Focus. Memory.
Decrease the number of results, Psets
or Jobs until the memory usage is
below 100%.
E179 Totally Not possible to configure this functionality Save the PF configuration to file.
configurable without function “totally configurable Open Controller > Memory.
memory needed memory”. C600 Memory type must be set to
Totally configurable memory.
Reboot PF, the PF memory is
remapped and erased.
Reload the configuration without the
memory settings.
E190 Wrong ST scan Attempt to scan from wrong source. Open PF Map > Accessories > Tool
source bus and double click Configuration.
In the Tool bus configuration dialog
box, click ST scanner.
Ensure that the Scanner source item
list selection is applicable.
E191 ST scanner The ST scanner temperature has exceeded Disconnect the tool
overheated max temperature. Let the scanner cool for 15 minutes
E199 Not possible to If You try to store the Reference Make new tightenings and find a
store Reference Trace(In Multiple Traces menu), but it new Reference Trace and press
Trace does not exist anymore. store again.
9836 3123 01 397 (428)

Event codes
23.1.3 E200-E299 User input events

Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E206 Pset number An attempt was made to perform a Check parameter C200 Pset and select x
invalid tightening with the wrong Pset number. a Pset from the correct source.
First integer parameter: 0=Locked during
tightening, 1=locked during loosening
E207 Wrong Pset Attempt to select Pset from a source not Check parameter C200 Pset and select
Select Source specified for parameter C200 Pset. a Pset from the correct source.
E208 Not ok to select It is not allowed to select new Pset when Proceed in the Job order until the Job
new Pset the already selected Pset is auto selected is finished.
by Job. To select a new Job or Pset;
Select C202 Job override, select new
Job, or select Job off.
E209 Pset configuration The configuration of the Pset has been For information only.
updated changed.
E210 Identifier source An Identifier source is disabled. All Switch back to Automatic Mode to
disabled Identifiers sent by a disabled source are enable the Identifier source.
discarded.
E211 Wrong identifier Wrong input source for an identifier Open Identifier>Type setup and
input source string. check that the input source is correct.
Scan the identifier string.
E212 Pset/Multistage Event displayed every time a Pset or For information only.
stored Multistage is stored or restored.
First integer parameter: Pset or Multistage
number
Second integer parameter 0=Pset,
1=Multistage
E213 Pset number not An attempt to start a Job containing a Pset Choose correct Job or reprogram the
present not present in PF has been performed. Job.
E220 Fastener broken Displayed if fastener (screw or nut) Ensure that more than one comparison
breaks during yield control. is obtained before yield is reached.
In ToolsTalk, open the trace monitor
and analyze the tightening.
Change the applicable parameter.
E221 Too few samples Increase parameter P262 Window
for yield control Too few samples for mean torque angle or reduce speed during yield
calculation in yield algorithm. control.
398 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E233 Final Target This event code is displayed when an Change the value for “Final Target” to x
range error attempt is made to tighten with a final a value within tool limits.
target out of range (larger than tool max Store and try again.
torque or 9999).

First parameter: Pset number
Second parameter: Parameter number
with an incorrect value
Third parameter: Parameter in second
integer is dependent on this parameter
Fourth parameter: Parameter in second
integer violates this limit.
E234 Start final angle This event code is displayed when an Change the value for P120 Start Final x
range error attempt is made to tighten with a P120 Angle to a value within tool limits.
Start final angle out of range. Store and try again.
First parameter: Pset number

E235 Incompatible Some configurations are not compatible. Usually this is an operator error. x x
system Some combinations of devices, tools and Check configuration in PF.
configuration accessories can not be configured.
E236 Configuration set This event code is displayed if one device Acknowledge the event. x x x
inconsistent on the I/O bus has the correct ID but Ensure that the ID and the type of I/O
incorrect type specified (for example a device are the same.
Selector is connected and an RE-Alarm is
configured).

First integer parameter: Number of I/O
device with configuration problems.
Second integer parameter 2=I/O-expander
or Operator panel, 3=RE-alarm, 5=Four-
position socket selector, 6=Eight-position
socket selector.
9836 3123 01 399 (428)

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E237 Strategy No valid control strategy was chosen for Change control strategy valid for used x
configuration the stored Pset. tool.
error Additional parameter information: Check that the Pset parameters are
First parameter: Pset number correct and store the Pset.
E238 Not possible to An attempt was made to perform a Open the Multistage. x
run a Multistage Multistage tightening containing at least Remove the click wrench Pset.
with a Click one Pset with a click wrench strategy. Add an applicable Pset and store the
Wrench Pset settings.
E239 Serial number Tightening and loosening prohibited TNR
missing due to missing serial number
E240 Password The password is entered from an invalid Enter the password from ToolsTalk or
Incorrect Input source according to the configuration. change parameter C801 Entry.
Source
E250 Max time for first This message is displayed and the Job is If needed, open PF Map > Job >
tightening run out terminated if the first tightening is not Timer and change the parameter J320
(Job) performed within the specified time. Maxtime to start Job, or set to 0 to shut
off timer.
Store Job and try again.
E251 Max time to This message is displayed and the Job is If needed, open PF Map > Job >
complete Job run terminated if the Job is not completed Timer and change the parameter J321
out within the specified time in Job Maxtime to complete Job, or set to 0 to
configuration. shut off timer.
Store Job and try again.
E281 Identifier not The length of the incoming barcode string Open PF Map > Identifier and check
accepted, the is wrong. that the string Length matches the
length is not scanned string, and that the scanned
correct. string does not exceed 100 characters.
E282 Identifier not The incoming barcode string does not Open PF Map > Identifier and check
accepted, does match any type. Input source, string Length and
not match any Significant position are correctly
type configured.
E285 Bypass Identifier The Type 1 identifier can not be bypassed Open PF Map > Identifier and
not possible when an optional Type exists. remove optional Type if not used.
400 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E286 Reset Identifier Reset latest identifier is not possible when Use digital input Reset all identifiers.
not possible a complete Work Order has been
accepted.
E287 All Result Parts All Result Parts can not be stored. Make sure that the Job Master and all
can not be stored of the Job Members have the same
number of Result Parts in the
configuration.
Make sure that the Sync Master and
all of the Sync Members have the
same number of Result Parts in the
configuration.
23.1.4 E300-E399 Statistical events

code
E333 Not allowed The requested statistic subscription is not allowed. For Change the subscription.
subscription example it is not allowed to set an angle statistic
subscription for a Pset using only the torque control
strategy.
E334 No statistic available The Pset strategy is not suitable to calculate statistics (no For information only.
for this Pset strategy is chosen).
E335 Not enough data Not enough data is available to calculate the statistic Do more tightenings to get
control limits. enough data.
Calculation used: nbrofsubgroups
* subgroupsize * (1 + subgroup
frequency)
Check and if necessary change
P503 No of subgroups.
E336 Mem alloc fail It is not possible to allocate enough memory for the Open Controller > Memory and
statistic subscription. set C600 Type to Totally
configurable.
Check settings.
9836 3123 01 401 (428)

Event codes

code
E340 Xucl tq The last subgroup mean torque value is larger than the The statistic events give an
upper control limit. indication of irregularities in the
tightening process.
If needed:
Check the programming.

Check the tool status.
Check the tightening material and
joint components.
Check the work station set-up and
procedure.
E341 Xlcl tq The last subgroup mean torque value is lower than the See E340 Xucl tq
lower control limit.
E342 Rucl tq The last subgroup range torque value is larger than the See E340 Xucl tq
upper control limit.
E343 Rlcl tq The last subgroup range torque value is lower than the See E340 Xucl tq
E344 Cp tq The torque Cp is lower than 2. See E340 Xucl tq
E345 Cpk tq The torque Cpk is lower than 1.33. See E340 Xucl tq
E346 7inc x tq Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup torque mean value See E340 Xucl tq
has increased 7 times consecutively.
E347 7dec x tq Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup torque mean value See E340 Xucl tq
has decreased 7 times consecutively.
E348 7inc r tq Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup torque range value See E340 Xucl tq
E349 7dec r tq Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup torque range value See E340 Xucl tq
E350 7above x tq Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup torque mean value See E340 Xucl tq
has been above the average mean value of the average of
the latest ten subgroups 7 times consecutively.
E351 7below x tq Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup torque mean value See E340 Xucl tq
has been below the average mean value of the average of
E352 7above r tq Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup torque range value See E340 Xucl tq
has been above the average range value of the average of
402 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes

code
E353 7below r tq Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup torque range value See E340 Xucl tq
has been below the average range value of the average of
E354 2sigma x tq Trend deviation alarm, the last subgroup torque average See E340 Xucl tq
is outside Xtq-bar-bar - 2 sigma.
E355 2sigma r tq Trend deviation alarm, the last subgroup torque range See E340 Xucl tq
average is outside Rtq-bar-bar - 2 sigma.
E360 Xucl ang The last subgroup mean angle value is larger than the See E340 Xucl tq
E361 Xlcl ang The last subgroup mean angle value is lower than the See E340 Xucl tq
E362 Rucl ang The last subgroup range angle value is larger than the See E340 Xucl tq
E363 Rlcl ang The last subgroup range angle value is lower than the See E340 Xucl tq
E364 Cp ang The angle Cp is lower than 2. See E340 Xucl tq
E365 Cpk ang The angle Cpk is lower than 1.33. See E340 Xucl tq
E366 7inc x ang Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup angle mean value See E340 Xucl tq
E367 7dec x ang Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup angle mean value See E340 Xucl tq
E368 7inc r ang Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup angle range value See E340 Xucl tq
E369 7dec r ang Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup angle range value See E340 Xucl tq
E370 7above x ang Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup angle mean value See E340 Xucl tq
has been above the average mean value of the average of
E371 7below x ang Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup angle mean value See E340 Xucl tq
E372 7above r ang Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup angle range value See E340 Xucl tq
has been above the average range value of the average of
9836 3123 01 403 (428)

Event codes

code
E373 7below r ang Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup angle range value See E340 Xucl tq
has been below the average range value of the average of
E374 2sigma x ang Trend deviation alarm, the last subgroup angle average is See E340 Xucl tq
outside Xang-bar-bar-2 sigma.
E375 2sigma r ang Trend deviation alarm, the last subgroup angle range See E340 Xucl tq
average is outside Rang-bar-bar-2 sigma.
E380 Xucl cm The last subgroup mean CM value is larger than the See E340 Xucl tq
E381 Xlcl cm The last subgroup mean CM value is lower than the lower See E340 Xucl tq
control limit.
E382 Rucl cm The last subgroup range CM value is larger than the See E340 Xucl tq
E383 Rlcl cm The last subgroup range CM value is lower than the See E340 Xucl tq
E384 Cp cm The CM Cp is lower than 2. See E340 Xucl tq
E385 Cpk cm The CM Cpk is lower than 1.33. See E340 Xucl tq
E386 7inc x cm Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup CM mean value has See E340 Xucl tq
increased 7 times consecutively.
E387 7dec x cm Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup CM mean value has See E340 Xucl tq
decreased 7 times consecutively.
E388 7inc r cm Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup CM range value has See E340 Xucl tq
increased 7 times consecutively.
E389 7dec r cm Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup torque range value See E340 Xucl tq
E390 7above x cm Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup CM mean value has See E340 Xucl tq
been above the average mean value of the average of the
latest ten subgroups 7 times consecutively.
E391 7below x cm Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup torque mean value See E340 Xucl tq
E392 7above r cm Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup CM range value has See E340 Xucl tq
been above the average range value of the average of the
404 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes

code
E393 7below r cm Trend deviation alarm, the subgroup CM range value has See E340 Xucl tq
been below the average range value of the average of the
E394 2sigma x cm Trend deviation alarm, the last subgroup CM average is See E340 Xucl tq
outside XCM-bar-bar-2 sigma.
E395 2sigma r cm Trend deviation alarm, the last subgroup CM range See E340 Xucl tq
average is outside RCM-bar-bar-2 sigma.
23.1.5 E400-E499 Communication events

Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E401 Duplicate device Two I/O devices with the same ID are Acknowledge the event. x x x
IDs on I/O bus present on the I/O bus. This event occurs Make sure that all of the devices on the
even if the devices are not configured in bus have a unique ID.
PF.
E403 I/O device not I/O device is not properly connected or the Check IO cables. x x x
responding ID of the device is not the same as the one Check the configuration of the
configured. accessories on the IO bus and compare
Additional parameter information: it with the devices on the IO bus.
First integer parameter: Number of device
not responding.
E407 IO device has An I/O device has selected ID 0, which is On the device, select an ID between 1 x x x
invalid ID invalid. and 15 (in ToolsTalk) or 1-F (on
selected Additional parameter information: selector)
First integer parameter: Number of device
not responding.
E417 Too many There are too many connections at the Wait until the other sessions are done
communication same time (ToolsTalk PF, Tools Net, and close their connection.
sessions at one Operator Panel etc.) The most common
time problem is that an external program
allocates all the communication.
E420 ST Accessory not A device connected to the ST-bus is not Acknowledge the event. x x x
supported. recognized by PF. Upgrade PF software.
E421 Safety trigger not The tool software version does not support Acknowledge the event. x x x
supported by tool safety trigger function. Upgrade the tool software.
software
9836 3123 01 405 (428)

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E433 No RBU present No RBU detected at start-up or RBU Acknowledge the event. x x x
found missing at runtime. Check that there is an RBU and that it
is connected properly.
E434 RBU Timeout RBU did not respond to command from Acknowledge the event. x x x
Power Focus. Check that the RBU is connected
properly.
Reboot PF.
If the event reappears, replace the
RBU
E436 RBU file system RBU file system warning because of Reboot PF.
warning download interruption. If the event reappears, replace the
RBU
E437 RBU file system RBU file system fault. An attempt will be Acknowledge the event. x x x
corrupt made to repair it by means of erasing the Reboot PF.
RBU. Replace the RBU.
E438 RBU file A file with incorrect name or size was Acknowledge the event. x x x
mismatch returned to a read request. Reboot PF.
Replace the RBU.
E440 RBU no files RBU file system fault. Acknowledge the event. x x x
Reboot PF.
Replace the RBU.
E441 RBU access too RBU has answered to the poll but Power Acknowledge the event. x x x
busy Focus is too busy to receive the reply. Acknowledge the event.
Upgrade PF software.
E442 RBU no such file RBU file system fault. Acknowledge the event. x x x
Reboot PF.
Replace the RBU.
E444 RBU packet RBU responds with an answer not Acknowledge the event. x x x
rejected matching the last request. This is probably Reboot PF.
due to duplicates sent when the Power Replace the RBU.
Focus does not acknowledge packages.
E445 RBU corrupt RBU software fault. Acknowledge the event. x x x
Reboot PF.
Replace the RBU.
E446 RBU read error RBU read operation failed. Acknowledge the event. x x x
Try read again
Reboot PF
Replace the RBU
406 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E447 RBU write error RBU write operation failed. Acknowledge the event. x x x
Try write again.
Reboot PF.
Replace the RBU.
E448 RBU delete error RBU delete operation failed. Acknowledge the event. x x x
Try delete again.
Reboot PF.
Replace the RBU.
E449 RBU flush error RBU erase operation failed. Acknowledge the event. x x x
Try erase again.
Reboot PF.
Replace the RBU.
E450 RBU list error RBU update operation failed. Acknowledge the event. x x x
Try update again.
Reboot PF.
Replace the RBU.
E451 RBU update Database synchronization between Power Acknowledge the event. x x x
failed Focus and RBU failed. Try update again.
Reboot PF.
Replace the RBU.
E460 Fieldbus type Error detected in initialization of fieldbus. Contact the Atlas Copco service
mailbox message representative.
fault
E461 Fieldbus type gen Error detected in initialization of fieldbus. Contact the Atlas Copco service
com fault representative.
E462 Fieldbus mailbox Error detected in initialization of fieldbus. Contact the Atlas Copco service
message fault representative.
E463 Fieldbus gen com Error detected in initialization of fieldbus. Contact the Atlas Copco service
fault representative.
E464 Fieldbus The fieldbus module is broken and has to Acknowledge the event. x x x
hardware fault be replaced. Contact the Atlas Copco service
representative.
E465 Fieldbus dip The software tries to configure the value of Switch off PF.
switch error node address or baud rate, but the address See chapter Fieldbus for information
switch on the fieldbus module is not in the about how to set the switch position.
right position to enable software setting. Correct the switch and turn on PF.
E466 Fieldbus offline The fieldbus went from online to offline. Check if PF is connected to the
network.
Check if the PLC is down.
9836 3123 01 407 (428)

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E467 Fieldbus Error detected in initialization of fieldbus. Contact the Atlas Copco service
configuration representative.
fault
E468 Fieldbus The fieldbus module installed in Power Check the configured filedbus type.
hardware Focus is not the same fieldbus type as Check which fieldbus type is installed
mismatch configured with ToolsTalk PF. Change in PF.
fieldbus module or configuration to get a Reconfigure to match the installed
match. fieldbus type.
E469 Fieldbus init Error detected in initialization of fieldbus. Contact the Atlas Copco service
error representative.
E470 Fieldbus PCP InterBus PCP length error. Maximum Check the length of the process data
error length is 20 bytes. and the PCP data.
If the data exceeds 20 bytes, then
correct the configuration.
E471 Fieldbus claim Too much data traffic has caused one Reduce the data from the PLC that
area failed, lost packet lost. needs acknowledgement from PF.
one message
E472 Fieldbus release Release area command timed out. Information event.
area timeout If the event occurs frequently, then
reduce the data from the PLC that
needs acknowledgement from PF.
E473 Fieldbus Communication buffer full due to too Check if there is a frequent input
communication many input signals or incorrect fieldbus signal, or if F200 FB Update Interval
buffer alarm update interval. needs to be changed.
Decrease the input signals and/or
decrease the fieldbus update interval.
E474 Fieldbus monitor Fieldbus monitor buffer full. In TTPF, turn off the fieldbus monitor.
buffer alarm
E475 Fieldbus PsetID Fieldbus selected Pset does not match the In the PLC, check the Pset ID.
mismatch lifted socket. If the Pset and socket do not
Selector lifted correspond, then lift the correct socket
socket or change the Pset.
E480 Channel ID not The channel ID configured is not within Acknowledge the event. x x x
valid the limits permitted. The channel ID must Open PF Map > Controller >
be configured between 1 and 20. Network > Cell and change parameter
C310 Channel ID to be within 1 and 20
and unique within the cell.
408 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E481 Cell member The Cell member registration failed Acknowledge the event. x x x
registration failed because one Cell member is already In the cell member, open PF Map >
registered with the same channel ID. Controller > Network > Cell and
change parameter C310 Channel ID to
be within 1 and 20 and unique within
the cell.
E482 SW version not The application code version differs from In the cell members, open PF Map >
compatible with the cell reference. To be able to run the Controller > Information and check
cell cell functionality, ensure that all members C101 Application code version.
in the cell use the same release as the cell Ensure that all cell members have the
reference. same SW version.
E490 Cell ID not valid The Cell ID configured is not within the Acknowledge the event. x x x
limits permitted. The Cell ID must be Open PF Map > Controller >
configured between 1 and 999. Network > Cell and set C313 Cell ID
to a correct number unique within the
network.
E491 Net member The Net member registration failed Acknowledge the event. x x x
registration failed because one Net member is already In the Net member, open PF Map >
registered with the same Cell ID. Controller > Network > Cell and set
C313 Cell ID to a correct number
unique within the network.
E492 SW version not The application code version differs from In the cell members, open PF Map >
compatible with the net reference. To be able to run the net Controller > Information and check
net cell cell functionality, ensure that all cell C101 Application code version.
references in the net use the same release Ensure that all cell members have the
as the net reference. same SW version.
23.1.6 E500-E599 Hardware events (tools)

Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E500 New tool A new tool has been connected to the drive
connected
9836 3123 01 409 (428)

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E501 Tool overheated The tool is too hot and the drive is Let the tool rest until it is cool enough x x
disabled. to run.
If the event reappears, reconsider the
Additional parameter information: workstation set-up and the tightening
First integer parameter indicates at which strategy.
stage the tool was locked: Service the tool.
0=Tightening, 1=Loosening,
2=Positioning, 3=Motor tuning, 4=open-
end tuning,
Second integer parameter: 0=Service
E502 Tool service Service the tool. See parameter T413 Acknowledge the event.
interval expired Service interval. Service the tool.
Additional information: Open Tool > Maintenance > Service,
The event appears, for 3 seconds, every click Service counter reset and confirm
100 tightenings after T412 No of by clicking OK.
tightenings since service exceeds T413 Note: To remove the event and unlock
Service interval, and T411 Service indicator the tool, set T411 Service indicator to
= ON. The alarm LED indicates tracking Off.
during this period.
The tool is locked if T416 Lock tool on
alarm is checked.
E503 Calibration date The calibration date has expired. Use a torque measurement equipment
expired to calculate a calibration value.
Update tool calibration value using
T402 Set calibration value.
Update parameter T405 Calibration
alarm date.
E504 Tool wear Tool wear indicator alarm indicates that the Service the tool.
indicator alarm tool should be serviced. Connect tool to ToolsTalk Service and
reset the wear indicator.
E505 Tool rebuilt Tool redesigned. E.g. angled tool type For information only. x x
to/from OE-type redesigned to an OE-tool type.
E506 Tightenings Tool locked due to incurred software Change to a RBU that supports the x x
prevented by release and with wrong RBU.All Hea d used build.
RBU build requires a FieldTest RBU to be able
to perform tightenings.
E507 Motortuning A motortuning has been performed. For information only. x x
performed Measured values from the tool motortuning
process are entered in sub information
arguments 1 to 4
410 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E508 Motortuning Measured values from the tool motortuning The accuracy of the tool is not x x
warning process indicates that the tool is not influenced by this problem. However,
running optimally. The tool may run if the performance of the tool is
warmer than normal. Values for supporting considered to be a problem, send it to
this decision are entered in sub information motor service.
arguments 1 to 4.
(This event is default off).
E510 Tool type not The tool type is not supported by the RBU. Acknowledge the event. x x x
supported by Check which RBU-level the tool
RBU requires.
Replace the RBU.
E511 Tool-Power Mismatch between the tool and PF 3000 Acknowledge the event. x x x
Focus 3000 size controller (for example S4/S7 tool Replace the PF3000 with the correct
mismatch connected to a S9 controller). PF3000 or a PF4000, to match the
tool.
E512 Tool revision not The tool is not supported by the drive Change tool or PF SW x x x
supported by this (drive version too old)
drive SW
E513 Tool EEPROM Checksum indicates that tool memory is Acknowledge the event. x x x
corrupt - service corrupt. Tool must be serviced. Reprogram the tool and restore the
tool memory, using Tools Talk service.
E514 Motortune Checksum indicates that the motor tuning Acknowledge the event. x x x
parameters or the open-end tuning table is corrupt. Open Tool>Maintenance and do a
invalid - Additional parameter information: motor tuning or an open-end tuning.
Motortune First integer parameter indicates at which
stage the tool is locked: 0= tightening, 1=
loosening, 2=positioning, 3=motor tuning,
4=open-end tuning, 5=tracking
E517 Tool max torque Tool max torque invalid, service tool. Acknowledge the event. x x x
invalid Set parameter T102 to an appropriate
value.
For S/DS/ETX tools: use TTPF or
Graph.
Other tools: use TTS.
9836 3123 01 411 (428)

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E518 Tool Tool normalization value out of range, Acknowledge the event. x x x
normalization service tool. Use a torque measurement equipment
out of range to calculate a normalization value.
Use the strategy DS-control during
measurements.
Open Tool > Maintenance >
Calibration and update T403
Normalisation value.
E519 Tool calibration Tool calibration value out of range, service Acknowledge the event. x x x
value out of tool. Recalibrate the tool, using ACTA.
range If the event reappears, replace the tool.
E520 Wear indicator Data in tool memory used for wear Open Tool > Maintenance > Wear
data in tool indicator is invalid. Service tool. and set T434 Min wear tightenings to
invalid <100000.
E521 Wear data in tool Tool memory or MC software not Acknowledge the event. x
not updated responding. Check that the tool cable and
Please reboot PF
E535 Torque Cables to transducer cut off or shorted. Acknowledge the event. x x x
transducer error Check that the tool cable and
If the event reappears, service the tool.
E536 No transducer Cables to transducer cut off or shorted. Check that the tool cable and x
(sensor) connectors are undamaged and
E537 Calibration not Calibration offset outside limits. Service the tool.
OK, offset
outside limits
E538 Calibration not Calibration value outside limits. Service the tool.
OK, CalVal
outside limits
E539 Calibration not Calibration not OK, offset changed > 5% Try to calibrate again.
OK, Offset of max value since last calibration. If the event reappears, service the tool.
changed > 5% of
max value since
last calibration
412 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E540 Calibration not Calibration not OK, calibration value Service the tool.
OK, CalVal changed > 5% of max value since last
changed > 5% of calibration.
max value since
last calibration
E541 Transducer Cables to transducer cut off or shorted. Acknowledge the event. x x x
(sensor) lost Service the tool.
during tightening
E542 Transducer When tightening values are lost the process Acknowledge the event. x x x
(sensor) lost reads the tool register and finds out that Service the tool.
during tightening one or several error bits have been set.
from drive Symptom of failure in transducer
electronics inside the tool.
E543 Transducer When tightening values are lost the process Acknowledge the event. Check for x x x
(sensor) lost reads the tool register and finds out that damage connection path between
during tightening NO error bits have been set. Symptom of PowerFocus and the tool: sockets and
from DSP failure in connection between tool and plugs contact pins, the cable.
PowerFocus. Service the tool, PowerFocus or the
cable.
E544 Spindle rotated Rotation of spindle during calibration Make sure that all parts are still
during indicates that operator possibly strained relative to each other at tool start
transducer transducer creating offset/gain change
calibration
E550 Radio contact Radio contact with tool established, tool For information only.
with tool accessible.
established, tool
accessible
E551 Radio contact Radio contact with tool lost, tool Re-establish connection.
with tool lost, inaccessible.
tool inaccessible
E552 Communication An intermittent communication For information only.
error with tool disturbance between tool and controller. If occurring frequently, reposition
Serial Port Adapter.
If re-occurring, contact your Atlas
Copco representative.
E553 Pairing attempt An attempt to pair the Power Focus with a Set the tool in pairing mode according
with wireless wireless tool failed. to the pairing procedure.
tool failed Perform another pairing attempt.
If the event reappears, replace the tool.
E554 Command not A command (batch increment, reset batch Re-establish connection.
performed, etc.) could not be performed and was Perform the action causing the event
wireless tool discarded because the tool was currently again.
inaccessible inaccessible.
9836 3123 01 413 (428)

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E555 Condition A condition change in the controller (Pset Re-establish connection.
change not selection, Job selection, Job aborted etc.) The condition change is now
reflected in tool, could not be reflected in the tool. The tool automatically transferred to the tool.
wireless tool was currently inaccessible.
inaccessible
E556 Tool battery low Tool battery voltage is low. Replace the tool battery.
Place the discharged battery in the
battery charger.
E557 Tool battery Tool battery empty. Tool locked. Replace the battery.
empty The tool is unlocked automatically.
E558 Tool software The implemented protocol version in Upgrade the software in tool or PF to
version Power Focus for connected tool differs match each other.
mismatch from the protocol version in tool.
First parameter is Power Focus protocol
version. Second parameter is tool protocol
version.
E559 IRC pairing An IRC paring sequence has been For information only.
completed successfully completed.
E560 Tool RBU error An RBU error was detected by the tool Check that the RBU is correctly
software. mounted, otherwise service tool.
E561 Tool locked, do Tool locked since no Pset has been actively Do Store Standalone or deselect
Store standalone stored in the tool. Standalone, parameter T470 Use
Standalone.
E562 Condition A condition change in the controller (Pset Make changes in the stand alone
change not selection, Job selection, Job aborted …) interface instead if the change is meant
reflected in tool, could not be reflected in the tool. The tool to apply.
wireless tool was currently stand alone
stand alone
E563 IRC Not possible to establish radio connection Check if tool is in correct operation X
configuration with wireless tool mode (Ad-hoc and not Infrastructure
mismatch mode);
Also check the PF IRC settings.
E564 Reboot of Reboot of wireless tool needed for changes Acknowledge the event on the PF and X
wireless tool to take effect power cycle the wireless tool.
needed for
changes to take
effect
E565 Locked while The controller has locked the tool while For information only. X
updating updating the Pset/Job in the (for instance
Pset/Job in tool wireless) tool.
414 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
23.1.7 E600-E699 Hardware events

Event Event name Information Procedure
code
Acknowledge
Tool ready
PF ready
E601 System voltage DC voltage too low. Tool locked. Acknowledge the event. x x x
low Power Focus: Verify that the input
voltage is within specified limits and
reboot the system.
STB: Replace battery. If occurring
frequently, check Pset, service tool.
E602 DC-bus HI DC voltage too high Acknowledge the event.
during rundown Verify that the input voltage is within
specified limits.
E603 Drive The DC drive is too hot, drive deactivated. Let the system cool for 15 minutes x
overheated Continue operation.
E604 24V output error 24 V output disabled (overload or short Acknowledge the event. x x x
circuit) Check that the cable and connectors
are undamaged and correctly
connected.
Reduce overload by disconnecting one
or more devices.
Connect an external isolated 24V
power source to the 24V DC input of
the devices.
E619 Drive DC drive deactivated during operation. Contact the Atlas Copco service
deactivated representative.
E620 Tool stall Tool motor stall. Check that the tool cable and
If possible use a shorter tool cable.
For STB, see E601
E621 Current Current measurement error. Current cannot Contact the Atlas Copco service x
measurement reliably be measured. representative.
error
E622 Angle transducer The controller has received invalid angle Acknowledge the event.
error information from the tool. Open Tool>Maintenance>Motor
tuning and perform a motor tuning.
E623 Safety current The torque measured by the torque Contact the Atlas Copco service x
monitoring error transducer is inconsistent with the torque representative.
estimated from the measured current.
E624 Battery failure DC voltage too high or too low: Contact the Atlas Copco service x x x
battery failure. representative and send back
9836 3123 01 415 (428)

Event codes
Event Event name Information Procedure

code
Acknowledge
Tool ready
PF ready
battery to Atlas Copco (do not
reuse it!)
23.1.8 E700-E799 Hardware events

Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E700 PF started This event code is only visible in the event For information only.
log and indicates when PF is started.
E701 Backup battery The backup battery level is low. The Replace the backup battery.
low level battery should be changed.
E702 Backup battery The backup battery level is very low or the Replace the backup battery.
empty or battery is missing. A new battery should be
missing inserted as soon as possible.
E703 Ground fault in An earth (ground) fail detected, probably a Acknowledge the event. x
tool circuit tool circuit failure Rebuild the tool.
E710 ACTA/QRTT An ACTA/QRTT calibration has been For information only.
calibration performed. See below for additional
information.
E720 Protective earth Protective earth between tool and Acknowledge the event. x x x
to tool controller is interrupted. Check tool cable, tool and controller.
interrupted
E721 Tool internal Indicator board overcurrent error. Tool Acknowledge the event. x x x
error - Service service needed. Service the tool.
tool
E722 Illegal ring The direction ring is not in a defined Place the direction ring correctly. x
position position.
E723 Swivel lock There is a mismatch between swivel x
activated lock and tool start source
E724 Wrong gear Wrong gear box is mounted on the tool Mount the correct gearbox. x
box
E799 Internal info Internal info in event log info. Only of
interest to design department.
416 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
ACTA/QRTT calibration information

When an ACTA/QRTT calibration batch is completed, event code E710 ACTA/QRTT calibration is
displayed.
Torque result bits show the result of the torque calibration. All bits are sent as an unsigned 16 bit integer.
Angle result bits show the result of the angle calibration. All bits are sent as an unsigned 16 bit integer.
First integer Second integer Third integer Fourth integer
Torque result bits Angle result bits
Dec Event Dec Event Not used Channel number.

1 Batch result torque OK. 1 Batch result angle OK.
2 Torque min failed. 2 Angle min failed.
4 Torque max failed. 4 Angle max failed.
8 Torque LCLx failed. 8 Angle LCLx failed.
16 Torque UCLx failed. 16 Angle UCLx failed.
32 Torque LCLr failed. 32 Angle LCLr failed.
64 Torque UCLr failed. 64 Angle UCLr failed.
128 Torque CP > failed. 128 Angle CP > failed.
512 Torque CPK > failed. 256 Angle CPK > failed.
1024 Torque CAM > failed. 512 Angle CAM > failed.
2048 T Diff < failed.
9836 3123 01 417 (428)

Event codes
23.1.9 E800-E899 Software events

Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E805 PF Model This event indicates that the RBU revision Acknowledge the event. x x x
unknown is not supported by the controller (for Check that the correct RBU is
example an RBU bronze in a PF Graph connected to PF.
controller), the RBU is missing, or the If the event reappears, then upgrade the
RBU license file is missing or corrupt. PF software.
E808 Error condition An error condition was detected in Power Focus: Close external programs
detected by software. connected to Power Focus.
software Power Focus: The probable cause is that an STB: Return tool to service.
external application has started too many
subscriptions.
STB: Software error
E810 Database is Database must be cleared, db version x
corrupt is not correct
E822 No Job ACK Tightening initialization phase failed. Acknowledge the event. x x x
from control Hardwar e failure. Contact the Atlas Copco service
representative.
E823 No calibration No calibration was received from the drive Acknowledge the event. x x x
result during the tightening initialization phase Check tool cable.
(timeout 100 ms). Reboot PF.
E824 Cycle abort No tightening result was received from the If necessary, increase the P144 Cycle
timeout drive before the cycle abort timeout. abort timer in Pset.
E831 Autoset wrong Autoset could not be executed. The Acknowledge the event. x
angle calculated angle was too small. Program the Pset manually or by
Quick programming.
E833 Autoset tight The Autoset could not be executed, four Acknowledge the event. x
NOK result NOK tightenings were performed. Program the Pset manually or by
Quick programming.
E834 Autoset rejected Auto set is only permitted on a CW Pset. Program the Pset manually or by
Pset in CCW Quick programming.
direction If Quick programming is used, then
change the direction from CW to CCW
after programming.
E840 Feature Not This event is displayed when an attempt is Reconfigure to an allowed
Available In made to run Multistage with a RBU configuration or an available function.
Software bronze, or handle a Pset with a PsetID
Revision larger than the max number of Psets.
418 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E841 SW function The software function is not available for Change to the correct tool type.
Not Available this tool type.
for this tool type
E851 Connection with The connection with the Tools Net server Check the network configuration and
Tools Net server is lost and the Power Focus is trying to in particular the ToolsNet IP address,
lost reconnect. The Tools Net server might be Subnet mask and Default router.
down or it might be an Ethernet cable Check if the ToolsNet server is down.
problem. Check that the Ethernet cables are OK.
Check that the routers and switches are
correctly connected and without
damage.
E856 Router The router in the configuration setting Check the network configuration and
unreachable could not be reached. Check the network in particular the Subnet mask and the
configuration and in particularly the subnet Default router.
mask and the default router. Ping the router to see if it is alive.
Check the Ethernet cable.
E857 Reboot needed The configuration changes will not take Acknowledge the event. x
before changes effect until after a system reboot. Reboot PF.
take effect If the event reappears, the PF is faulty.
Contact the Atlas Copco service
representative.
E858 IP address The IP address of this PF is already in use Acknowledge the event. x
already in use by another system. Change the IP-address in PF.
E859 IP address Another system attempts to use the same Check the network settings.
collision IP address as this PF.
E860 Memory Configuration changes has not taken effect Acknowledge the event and reboot x
allocation error
E861 Session handler Configuration changes has not taken effect Acknowledge the event and reboot x
internal error
E862 Ethernet The Ethernet driver of the PF is Check the network.
overload Error temporarily switched off due to an
overloaded network.
E863 IP Port already An attempt was made to bind a TCP or Acknowledge the event. x
in use UDP socket to a port already in use. For Check all network settings.
instance, a user protocol might be using
the same port as ToolsTalk PF.
9836 3123 01 419 (428)

Event codes
Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E864 Ethernet echo An Ethernet packet was discarded, since its Check the network.
detected source MAC address was equal to the
Power Focus’ own MAC address. Notice
that this message only occurs once during
runtime, even if several such packets are
detected. There is most likely a problem in
the network.
E865 Reboot and new The configuration changes will not take Acknowledge the event. x x
IRC pairing effect until after a system reboot and new Reboot PF and perform a new IRC
needed IRC pairing after that. pairing.
If the event reappears, the PF is faulty.
Contact the Atlas Copco service
representative.
E870 Sync member The Sync member registration failed In the sync reference, open PF Map > x
registration because of a mismatch in the sync Sync > Options > Sync group list
failure configuration list. dialog box, and check that all IDs are
correct and unique.
In the sync reference, open Controller
> Network settings, and check that the
IP address and ID are correct.
E871 Sync reference The channel ID of the Sync reference is In the sync reference, open PF Map > x x
configuration not first in the Sync list as required. Sync > Options, and check that the
failure sync reference is at the top of the Sync
group list.
E872 Sync Tightening synchronization initialization Check the I/O bus cable between all x
initialization failed. sync members.
failure Check that all Sync members have the
same active Pset/multistage.
Check the external start bridge.
E874 Sync members Only Sync reference is defined in the Sync Acknowledge the event. x
missing group list. In the sync reference, open PF Map >
Sync > Options and add sync
members to the Sync group list.
420 (428) 9836 3123 01

Event codes
23.1.10 E900-E999 Events MMI

Acknowledge
code
Tool ready
PF ready
E901 MMI Start-up Error in MMI detected. Acknowledge the event. x x X
Error Reboot PF.
9836 3123 01 421 (428)

Index
24 Index
of controller, 127
tool parameters, 355
A Configuring a tool offline, 71
Abbreviations, 15 Connect
Abort Job, 123 toolbar, 60
Accessibility Connecting a PF, 66
controller parameters, 354 Connecting devices, 29
Accessories, 25, 165 connection
parameters, 363 of PF with cell or net configuration, 134
Acta Control options, 96
port, 131 Control strategies, 82
ACTA, 158 Controller, 125
tool calibration, 158 parameters, 348
ACTA 4000, 28 toolbar, 58
Activate ControlNet, 228
menu list, 57 Current monitoring, 98
Ang con/tq mon, 83
Application
under Options, 63
D
Autoset, 75 DeviceNet, 214
Diagnostic
tool parameters, 359
B Diagnostic mode, 202
Batch count, 81 Digital I/O, 165
Fieldbus settings, 209 parameters, 363
multistage parameter, 342 Digital input, 318
Batch size Digital inputs, 166
in job, 116 connecting, 36
Blue LED, 151 digital output, 297
Buzzer configuration Digital outputs
tool parameters, 362 connecting, 37
Buzzer wave, 147 Disconnect
Bypass toolbar, 60
job, 123 Disconnect tool, 160
Display, 136
controller parameters, 352
C DS con, 89
DS con/tq mon, 90
CC-Link, 233 dynamic job, 115
Cell, 130
Cell and Net, 131
Cell Job, 115 E
Cell members, 132
Cell reference, 132 earth protector, 11
Character string Edit
fieldbus, 205 menu list, 55
Click wrench, 86 Electrical safety, 11
COM ports, 135 emergency mode
controller parameters, 352 fieldbus configuration, 203
Configuration Ergo ramp
controller parameters, 349 tightening strategy, 96
Ethernet, 130, 131
422 (428) 9836 3123 01

Index
connecting, 36 I/O Diagnostic, 167

Ethernet connection, 66 I/O Expander, 25
Ethernet/IP, 225 Identifier, 59, 187
Event code list, 374 Identifier Monitor, 257
Event codes, 371 Identifier setup
Event Log, 371 parameters, 366
Event Monitor, 27 Information
external source controller parameters, 348
lock tool from, 162 tool parameters, 355
input to PF, 318
InterBus/InterBus2MB, 219
F
Factory Overview, 27
Fieldbus, 197
J
parameters, 367 Job, 115
toolbar, 59 parameters, 344
Fieldbus data, 203 toolbar, 58
Fieldbus selector, 208 Job group, 115
File Job monitor. See Functions in the Job monitor
menu list, 55 Job Monitor, 252
Fixed point number Job off, 123
fieldbus, 206 Job override, 120
Flip Flop gate, 238 Job status, 123
FL-Net, 232 joint angle, 76
Focus
menu list, 55
for Illuminator, 152 L
Function blocks, 238 line control
Function buttons job parameter, 347
for tools, 149 Line control
Functions in the Job monitor, 122 in Job, 119
Logic Configurator, 235
G toolbar, 59
logic gate, 235
General purpose I/O, 174 Logic gates, 237
Get all results, 258
GPIO, 24
Gradient monitoring, 104 M
MAC-address, 30
H Main power connector, 40
Maintenance
Hardware tool parameters, 359
in controller view, 126 Memory, 137
Help controller parameters, 353
menu list, 57 Memory reset, 140
toolbar, 60 Memory setup, 138
Home position, 87 Menu list, 54
Hot swap, 162 Modbus/TCP, 228
ModBusPlus, 221
Monitor mode, 202
I Monitors, 249
I/O bus, 168 toolbar, 59
I/O Bus, 38 Multicast, 131
9836 3123 01 423 (428)

Index
Multistage, 111 parameters, 365

parameters, 341 Printout
toolbar, 58 under Options, 64
Multistage programming ProfiBus-DP, 211
parameters, 342 Profinet, 230
Programming
job parameters, 345
N Pset, 78
Net reference, 132 Pset parameters, 329
Network Sync parameters, 365
controller parameters, 350 Programming +, 97
settings in controller, 129 Pset parameters, 334
Network setup, 133 Programming help, 77
NOK Pset, 73
in Job, 118 toolbar, 58
Pset comment, 109
Pset setup, 108
O Pset parameters, 338
PVT, 97
Offline, 70 PVT compensate, 102
One stage PVT monitoring, 100
tightening strategy, 94 PVT selftap, 99
Open Protocol, 27, 115
port, 131
open-end Q
start-up, 32
Open-end tuning, 156 QRTT, 158
Operator Monitor, 253 Quick programming, 76
Operator Panel, 26 Quick reference guide, 271
Options Quick step
menu list, 56 tightening strategy, 95
Programming +, 103
Output test, 167 R
RBU, 30
P Read PF from file, 69
Parameter list, 329 Rehit, 97
Part Id scan, 188 Relays, 166
Password, 141 Remote start connector
Personal safety, 12 connecting, 39
PF 3000, 19 remote start input, 103
PF 4000, 18 Restart Job, 122
PF List Result Monitor, 250
menu list, 58 Reverse ang, 85
under Options, 65 Rotate spindle forward/reverse, 86
PF Map, 60 Rundown angle, 96
toolbar, 59 Running Job
PF user interface, 41 menu list, 57
Picture Monitor, 256
PLC, 208
Fieldbus, 197
S
Post view torque, 107 Safety trigger, 145
Printer, 176 Selected Controller
Connecting, 35 menu list, 57
424 (428) 9836 3123 01

Index
Sensor tracking, 154 Tool bus, 173

Serial connection, 35, 66 parameters, 365
Settings Tool configuration, 145
ToolsTalk settings, 61 Tool diagnostic, 154
Setup Tool information, 143
job parameters, 344 Tool lock functionality, 162
parameters, 341 Tool maintenance, 155
simulator Tool rotation direction, 103
in logic configurator, 246 Tool tightening direction, 103
Snug gradient, 91 Toolbar, 58
socket selector Tools, 22
fieldbus configuration, 208 Tools Talk
Socket Selector, 26 port, 131
Software ToolsNet, 27, 131
in controller view, 126 ToolsNet., 131
Sound, 147 ToolsTalk overview, 54
Sound configuration ToolsTalk PF, 20
tool parameters, 362 starting TTPF, 53
ST scanner, 24, 175, 176 Tq con, 82
ST selector, 24, 175 Tq con/ang con (AND) / (OR), 84
start-up Tq con/ang mon, 83
of PF, 30 Trace, 261
Start-up instruction toolbar, 59
for open-end tools, 32 Two stage
static job, 115 tightening strategy, 94
Statistic
toolbar, 59
Statistic alarm, 266 U
Statistic programming, 110 USB connection, 67
Pset parameters, 338
Statistics, 265
Store W
fieldbus configuration, 203
Store PF to file, 68 Wave, 148
Storing, 67 Window
ST-selector connection, 34 menu list, 56
Sync, 59, 179
parameters, 365 Y
Sync motor tuning, 159, 160
Yield control, 88, 105
Yield/Tq con (OR), 88
T
Tightening strategies, 93 Z
Tool, 143
parameters, 354 Zoom step, 96
toolbar, 59
9836 3123 01 425 (428)

9836 3123 01
Software Release W10.9 SR3
Edition 18.2
2013-03
www.atlascopco.com

Power Focus 4000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Power Focus 4000

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Power Focus 4000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User guide

9836 3123 01 3 (428)

4.7 Digital inputs ........................................................................................................... 36

4 (428) 9836 3123 01

7.3 Quick programming ................................................................................................ 78

9836 3123 01 5 (428)

9.2.2 Creating a new Job ............................................................................................... 120

6 (428) 9836 3123 01

12.4 Printer .................................................................................................................. 178

9836 3123 01 7 (428)

16.2 Logic operators and function blocks ...................................................................... 247

8 (428) 9836 3123 01

20.5 Reverse ang ......................................................................................................... 298

9836 3123 01 9 (428)

22.6.1 Digital I/O .............................................................................................................. 375

10 (428) 9836 3123 01

1 General safety instructions

1.1 Work area

1.2 Electrical safety

This apparatus must be earthed.

9836 3123 01 11 (428)

increased risk of electric shock if your body is grounded.

1.3 Personal safety

12 (428) 9836 3123 01

the hands of untrained users.

9836 3123 01 13 (428)

2.1 Revision history

9836 3123 01 15 (428)

Abbreviation Description Abbreviation Description

16 (428) 9836 3123 01

3 Introduction to Power Focus

9836 3123 01 17 (428)

PF 4000 Graph has an easy-to-read LCD color display.

18 (428) 9836 3123 01

Two different hardware units are available, Graph and Compact.

PF 3000 Compact PF 3000 Graph

9836 3123 01 19 (428)

functions include access to Cpk, Traces, Operator monitor, etc.

20 (428) 9836 3123 01

9836 3123 01 21 (428)

3.6 Tensor tools

An open-end tool (or tube nut tool) is a

22 (428) 9836 3123 01

Figure shows Tensor ST.

STwrench is a torque wrench

3.6.1 Tool accessories

9836 3123 01 23 (428)

24 (428) 9836 3123 01

3.7 Hardware accessories

I/O Expander, sealed

9836 3123 01 25 (428)

MiniDisplay isa compact remote interface. It runs the Operator Guidance

26 (428) 9836 3123 01

3.8 Software accessories

9836 3123 01 27 (428)

3.8.2 ACTA 4000

28 (428) 9836 3123 01

1 Digital input + internal 24 V DC

In addition to backplane connections,